Panasonic products. SIngle function-multirange Multifunction single-range Multifunction-multirange. Precise High quality.

Size: px
Start display at page:

Download "Panasonic products. SIngle function-multirange Multifunction single-range Multifunction-multirange. Precise High quality."

Transcription

1

2 Panasonic products SIngle function-multirange Multifunction single-range Multifunction-multirange Precise High quality Reliable Robust

3 Table of Contents General Information Timers Timers Chart Overview Timers Selector Chart Timer-Related Terminology On-Delay Timer Basic Circuit General Application Guidelines Digital Timers LTH LTH-W LTH Series Cautions for use QMH Analog Timers SDXM-A/M PMH-A/S/M PMH-SD/SDM PMH-F PMH-W PMS - A/S/M Installing DIN Size Timer Options and Accessories Timers General Information Counters and Hour Meters Counters Selector Chart Counter-Related Terminology Precautions in using the Counter Counters LCH DIN Half LCH Preset Precautions in using the LCH Series LCH LCH-S LCH-W Precautions in using the LCH Series Installing DIN Size Counter (Common) Hour Meters LCD Hour Meters Selector Chart LHH DIN Half Size HM LHH Preset Type Precautions in using the LHH Series Hour Meters, electromechanical TH/TH TH/TH TH TH TH/TH TH Precautions in using the Hour Meters Options and Accessories for Counters and Hour Meters Applications / Power Supplies / International Standards

4 General Information Timers Timers chart overview Multiple operation -delay -delay Twin Flicker One-shot Star delta Integration Digital quartz timers Surface mount/flush mount LTH LTH-W LTH QMH LTH (Signal) LTH-W LTH LTH LTH PMH-W PMH-SD/SDM Multi-range analog timer (CR oscillation) Relay terminal socket PMH-A PMS-A SDX PMH-S PMH-M PMS-S SDXM-A/M PMH-A (Signal) PMH-F PMS-A (Signal) PMS-M (Signal) PMH-A PMS-A PMS-M SDX SDXM-M PMH-A PMS-A PMS-M SDX SDXM-M SDXM-A/M SDXM-M SDXM-M PC board mount SDX

5 Timers selector chart General Information Timers Operation mode Time range Each model has various time ranges. See the product lists before ordering. Major uses Features Control output (resistive) Current Voltage Mounting method Mounting parts Rated operating Arrangement Time accuracy Operation time fluctuation Temperature error Voltage error Setting error Min. power off time Life (Min. operation) Mechanical Electrical Terminal layouts and Wiring diagrams Available standards Page h h h h h m m s s s m m s m.s A A A.s Model/Product Name -start flicker -start flicker Delay one-shot Power -delay accurate, digital setting Bright and easy-to-read display Simple operation Wide time setting range Possible to set and change the time with front digit switches easily during the power off. Furthermore single unit has a time range of.s to hrs!! (Relay output type) Timed-out Form C (Transistor output type) Timed-out Form A to V AC V AC to V DC (other models) Terminal block, cap, panel cover, rubber gasket, mounting frame to V AC/DC to V AC/DC (other models) Terminal block, cap, panel cover, rubber gasket, mounting frame ms UL/c-UL, CE P. UL/c-UL, CE P. V AC V DC A ma.s time ranges selectable h.s h ±(.% + ms) in case of power on start ±(.% + ms) in case of reset or input signal start ±(.% +. s) in case of power on start ±.% ±. s (G type only) CR oscillation counting timer Output with contact Power -delay Power flicker Power One-shot For highly accurate time setting With a large transparent dial. This timer can be attached both on the DIN rails and panel. Terminal block, cap block, mounting frame, fitting sockets, protective cover to V AC to V AC V DC, V DC (other models) Timed-out Form C Timed-out Form C T.D. mode: Time delay C INST. mode: Time delay C and instantaneous C (Use MODE switch on front) ±% ±% ±% ±% ms ms UL/c-UL, CE P. V AC A Form C type A Form C type V AC A ) (Relay output type) (Transistor output type).s min.s min.s min s h type -Pin type QMH-G type QMH-S type Timed-out Form C type Timed-out Form C type N.O. N.C. Stop Lock + N.O. N.C. Stop Lock + MODE NC NO COM NC NO COM NO NC COM RESET STOP COM LTH-W Digital timer QMH Timer SDXM-A/M Timer PMH-W Analog multi-range cyclic twin timer Quartz oscillation counting timer Power delay () Power delay () Signal delay Signal delay Pulse One-shot Pulse -delay Signal Flicker Totalizing -delay Power delay () Power delay () Signal delay Signal delay Pulse One-shot Pulse -delay Signal Flicker Totalizing -delay -start flicker -start flicker Delay one-shot Power -delay Suitable for super-high accurate, digital setting V AC V DC LTH Digital timer LTH-L Digital timer LTH-W Digital timer QMH Timer Bright and easy-to-read display Simple operation Short body Economically price. Display is a bright reflectivetype LCD. Bright and easy-to-read display Simple operation Wide time setting range Possible to set and change the time with front digit switches easily during the power off. Furthermore single unit has a time range of.s to hrs!! Terminal block, cap, panel cover, rubber gasket, mounting frame to V AC V AC to V DC (other models) (Relay output type) Timedout Form C (Transistor output type) Timedout Form A (Relay output type) Timedout Form C (Transistor output type) Timedout Form A to V AC V AC to V DC (other models) Terminal block, cap, panel cover, rubber gasket, mounting frame to V AC/DC to V AC/DC (other models) Terminal block, cap, panel cover, rubber gasket, mounting frame ±(.% + ms) in case of power on start ±(.% + ms) in case of reset or input signal start ms ms UL/c-UL, CE UL/c-UL, CE P. ms UL/c-UL, CE P. P. UL/c-UL, CE P. A ma V AC V DC A ma.s time ranges selectable.h.s time ranges selectable.h.s time ranges selectable h.s h Terminal block, cap, panel cover, rubber gasket, mounting frame to V AC V AC to V DC (other models) (Relay output type) Timedout Form C (Transistor output type) Timedout Form A ±(.% + ms) in case of power on start ±(.% + ms) in case of reset or input signal start ±(.% + ms) in case of power on start ±(.% + ms) in case of reset or input signal start ±(.% +. s) in case of power on start ±.% ±. s (G type only) Operation mode me range del has various ges. See the lists before. Major uses Model/Product Name Features ol ut ive) Current Voltage Mounting method Mounting parts Rated operating Arrangement e cy Operation time fluctuation Temperature error Voltage error Setting error Min. power off time in. ion) Mechanical Electrical al layouts and Wiring diagrams Available standards Page h h h h h m m s s s m m s m.s A A A.s CR oscillation counting timer Output with contact Power -delay Power flicker Power One-shot For highly accurate time setting SDXM-A/M Timer With a large transparent dial. This timer can be attached both on the DIN rails and panel. Terminal block, cap block, mounting frame, fitting sockets, protective cover to V AC, to V AC, V DC, V DC (other models) Timed-out Form C Timed-out Form C T.D. mode: Time delay C INST. mode: Time delay C and instantaneous C (Use MODE switch on front) ±% ±% ±% ±% ms ms UL/c-UL, CE P. V AC A Form C type A Form C type V AC A (Relay output type) (Transistor output type) V AC V DC A ma (Relay output type) (Transistor output type) (Relay output type) (Transistor output type) Power -start cyclic For repetitive / operation V AC PMH-W Analog multi-range cyclic twin timer time ranges are selectable. s to h (Max. range) is controlled in one unit. Timed-out Form C to V AC, to V DC, V AC/DC, V DC (other models) Terminal block, cap, panel cover, rubber gasket, mounting frame ±.% ±% ±.% ±% ms UL/CSA, CE, LLOYD P..s time ranges selectable h A CR oscillation counting timer.s min.s min.s min s h type -Pin type QMH-G type QMH-S type -Pin type type Timed-out Form C type Timed-out Form C type + N.O. N.C. Lock Stop + N.O. N.C. Lock Stop N.O. N.C. Stop Lock + N.O. N.C. Stop Lock + MODE NC NO COM NC NO COM NO NC COM RESET STOP COM Pin type type ( ) (+) N.C. N.C. N.O. N.O. N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. ( ) (+) NC NO + ERS SELECTOR CHART Quartz oscillation counting timer Power delay () Power delay () Signal delay Signal delay Pulse One-shot Pulse -delay Signal Flicker Totalizing -delay Power delay () Power delay () Signal delay Signal delay Pulse One-shot Pulse -delay Signal Flicker Totalizing -delay -start flicker -start flicker Delay one-shot Power -delay Suitable for super-high accurate, digital setting V AC V DC LTH Digital timer LTH-L Digital timer LTH-W Digital timer QMH Timer Bright and easy-to-read display Simple operation Short body Economically price. Display is a bright reflectivetype LCD. Bright and easy-to-read display Simple operation Wide time setting range Possible to set and change the time with front digit switches easily during the power off. Furthermore single unit has a time range of.s to hrs!! Terminal block, cap, panel cover, rubber gasket, mounting frame to V AC V AC to V DC (other models) (Relay output type) Timedout Form C (Transistor output type) Timedout Form A (Relay output type) Timedout Form C (Transistor output type) Timedout Form A to V AC V AC to V DC (other models) Terminal block, cap, panel cover, rubber gasket, mounting frame to V AC/DC to V AC/DC (other models) Terminal block, cap, panel cover, rubber gasket, mounting frame ±(.% + ms) in case of power on start ±(.% + ms) in case of reset or input signal start ms ms UL/c-UL, CE UL/c-UL, CE P. ms UL/c-UL, CE P. P. UL/c-UL, CE P. A ma V AC V DC A ma.s time ranges selectable.h.s time ranges selectable.h.s time ranges selectable h.s h Terminal block, cap, panel cover, rubber gasket, mounting frame to V AC V AC to V DC (other models) (Relay output type) Timedout Form C (Transistor output type) Timedout Form A ±(.% + ms) in case of power on start ±(.% + ms) in case of reset or input signal start ±(.% + ms) in case of power on start ±(.% + ms) in case of reset or input signal start ±(.% +. s) in case of power on start ±.% ±. s (G type only) Operation mode me range del has various ges. See the lists before. Major uses Model/Product Name Features ol ut ive) Current Voltage Mounting method Mounting parts Rated operating Arrangement e cy Operation time fluctuation Temperature error Voltage error Setting error Min. power off time in. ion) Mechanical Electrical al layouts and Wiring diagrams Available standards Page h h h h h m m s s s m m s m.s A A A.s CR oscillation counting timer Output with contact Power -delay Power flicker Power One-shot For highly accurate time setting SDXM-A/M Timer With a large transparent dial. This timer can be attached both on the DIN rails and panel. Terminal block, cap block, mounting frame, fitting sockets, protective cover to V AC, to V AC, V DC, V DC (other models) Timed-out Form C Timed-out Form C T.D. mode: Time delay C INST. mode: Time delay C and instantaneous C (Use MODE switch on front) ±% ±% ±% ±% ms ms UL/c-UL, CE P. V AC A Form C type A Form C type V AC A (Relay output type) (Transistor output type) V AC V DC A ma (Relay output type) (Transistor output type) (Relay output type) (Transistor output type) Power -start cyclic For repetitive / operation V AC PMH-W Analog multi-range cyclic twin timer time ranges are selectable. s to h (Max. range) is controlled in one unit. Timed-out Form C to V AC, to V DC, V AC/DC, V DC (other models) Terminal block, cap, panel cover, rubber gasket, mounting frame ±.% ±% ±.% ±% ms UL/CSA, CE, LLOYD P..s time ranges selectable h A CR oscillation counting timer.s min.s min.s min s h type -Pin type QMH-G type QMH-S type -Pin type type Timed-out Form C type Timed-out Form C type + N.O. N.C. Lock Stop + N.O. N.C. Lock Stop N.O. N.C. Stop Lock + N.O. N.C. Stop Lock + MODE NC NO COM NC NO COM NO NC COM RESET STOP COM Pin type type ( ) (+) N.C. N.C. N.O. N.O. N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. ( ) (+) NC NO + ERS SELECTOR CHART Quartz oscillation counting timer Power delay () Power delay () Signal delay Signal delay Pulse One-shot Pulse -delay Signal Flicker Totalizing -delay Power delay () Power delay () Signal delay Signal delay Pulse One-shot Pulse -delay Signal Flicker Totalizing -delay -start flicker -start flicker Delay one-shot Power -delay Suitable for super-high accurate, digital setting V AC V DC LTH Digital timer LTH-L Digital timer LTH-W Digital timer QMH Timer Bright and easy-to-read display Simple operation Short body Economically price. Display is a bright reflectivetype LCD. Bright and easy-to-read display Simple operation Wide time setting range Possible to set and change the time with front digit switches easily during the power off. Furthermore single unit has a time range of.s to hrs!! Terminal block, cap, panel cover, rubber gasket, mounting frame to V AC V AC to V DC (other models) (Relay output type) Timedout Form C (Transistor output type) Timedout Form A (Relay output type) Timedout Form C (Transistor output type) Timedout Form A to V AC V AC to V DC (other models) Terminal block, cap, panel cover, rubber gasket, mounting frame to V AC/DC to V AC/DC (other models) Terminal block, cap, panel cover, rubber gasket, mounting frame ±(.% + ms) in case of power on start ±(.% + ms) in case of reset or input signal start ms ms UL/c-UL, CE UL/c-UL, CE P. ms UL/c-UL, CE P. P. UL/c-UL, CE P. A ma V AC V DC A ma.s time ranges selectable.h.s time ranges selectable.h.s time ranges selectable h.s h Terminal block, cap, panel cover, rubber gasket, mounting frame to V AC V AC to V DC (other models) (Relay output type) Timedout Form C (Transistor output type) Timedout Form A ±(.% + ms) in case of power on start ±(.% + ms) in case of reset or input signal start ±(.% + ms) in case of power on start ±(.% + ms) in case of reset or input signal start ±(.% +. s) in case of power on start ±.% ±. s (G type only) Operation mode me range del has various ges. See the lists before. Major uses Model/Product Name Features ol ut ive) Current Voltage Mounting method Mounting parts Rated operating Arrangement e cy Operation time fluctuation Temperature error Voltage error Setting error Min. power off time in. ion) Mechanical Electrical al layouts and Wiring diagrams Available standards Page h h h h h m m s s s m m s m.s A A A.s CR oscillation counting timer Output with contact Power -delay Power flicker Power One-shot For highly accurate time setting SDXM-A/M Timer With a large transparent dial. This timer can be attached both on the DIN rails and panel. Terminal block, cap block, mounting frame, fitting sockets, protective cover to V AC, to V AC, V DC, V DC (other models) Timed-out Form C Timed-out Form C T.D. mode: Time delay C INST. mode: Time delay C and instantaneous C (Use MODE switch on front) ±% ±% ±% ±% ms ms UL/c-UL, CE P. V AC A Form C type A Form C type V AC A (Relay output type) (Transistor output type) V AC V DC A ma (Relay output type) (Transistor output type) (Relay output type) (Transistor output type) Power -start cyclic For repetitive / operation V AC PMH-W Analog multi-range cyclic twin timer time ranges are selectable. s to h (Max. range) is controlled in one unit. Timed-out Form C to V AC, to V DC, V AC/DC, V DC (other models) Terminal block, cap, panel cover, rubber gasket, mounting frame ±.% ±% ±.% ±% ms UL/CSA, CE, LLOYD P..s time ranges selectable h A CR oscillation counting timer.s min.s min.s min s h type -Pin type QMH-G type QMH-S type -Pin type type Timed-out Form C type Timed-out Form C type + N.O. N.C. Lock Stop + N.O. N.C. Lock Stop N.O. N.C. Stop Lock + N.O. N.C. Stop Lock + MODE NC NO COM NC NO COM NO NC COM RESET STOP COM Pin type type ( ) (+) N.C. N.C. N.O. N.O. N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. ( ) (+) NC NO + ERS SELECTOR CHART Suitable for super-high accurate, digital setting V AC V DC LTH Digital timer LTH-L Digital timer LTH-W Digital timer QMH Timer Bright and easy-to-read display Simple operation Short body Economically price. Display is a bright reflectivetype LCD. Bright and easy-to-read display Simple operation Wide time setting range Possible to set and change the time with front digit switches easily during the power off. Furthermore single unit has a time range of.s to hrs!! Terminal block, cap, panel cover, rubber gasket, mounting frame to V AC V AC to V DC (other models) (Relay output type) Timedout Form C (Transistor output type) Timedout Form A (Relay output type) Timedout Form C (Transistor output type) Timedout Form A to V AC V AC to V DC (other models) Terminal block, cap, panel cover, rubber gasket, mounting frame to V AC/DC to V AC/DC (other models) Terminal block, cap, panel cover, rubber gasket, mounting frame ±(.% + ms) in case of power on start ±(.% + ms) in case of reset or input signal start ms ms UL/c-UL, CE UL/c-UL, CE P. ms UL/c-UL, CE P. P. UL/c-UL, CE P. A ma V AC V DC A ma.s time ranges selectable.h.s time ranges selectable.h.s time ranges selectable h.s h Terminal block, cap, panel cover, rubber gasket, mounting frame to V AC V AC to V DC (other models) (Relay output type) Timedout Form C (Transistor output type) Timedout Form A ±(.% + ms) in case of power on start ±(.% + ms) in case of reset or input signal start ±(.% + ms) in case of power on start ±(.% + ms) in case of reset or input signal start ±(.% +. s) in case of power on start ±.% ±. s (G type only) me range del has various ges. See the lists before. Major uses Model/Product Name Features ol ut ive) Current Voltage Mounting method Mounting parts Rated operating Arrangement e cy Operation time fluctuation Temperature error Voltage error Setting error Min. power off time in. ion) Mechanical Electrical al layouts and Wiring diagrams Available standards Page h h h h h m m s s s m m s m.s A A A.s For highly accurate time setting SDXM-A/M Timer With a large transparent dial. This timer can be attached both on the DIN rails and panel. Terminal block, cap block, mounting frame, fitting sockets, protective cover to V AC, to V AC, V DC, V DC (other models) Timed-out Form C Timed-out Form C T.D. mode: Time delay C INST. mode: Time delay C and instantaneous C (Use MODE switch on front) ±% ±% ±% ±% ms ms UL/c-UL, CE P. V AC A Form C type A Form C type V AC A (Relay output type) (Transistor output type) V AC V DC A ma (Relay output type) (Transistor output type) (Relay output type) (Transistor output type) For repetitive / operation V AC PMH-W Analog multi-range cyclic twin timer time ranges are selectable. s to h (Max. range) is controlled in one unit. Timed-out Form C to V AC, to V DC, V AC/DC, V DC (other models) Terminal block, cap, panel cover, rubber gasket, mounting frame ±.% ±% ±.% ±% ms UL/CSA, CE, LLOYD P..s time ranges selectable h A.s min.s min.s min s h type -Pin type QMH-G type QMH-S type -Pin type type Timed-out Form C type Timed-out Form C type + N.O. N.C. Lock Stop + N.O. N.C. Lock Stop N.O. N.C. Stop Lock + N.O. N.C. Stop Lock + MODE NC NO COM NC NO COM NO NC COM RESET STOP COM Pin type type ( ) (+) N.C. N.C. N.O. N.O. N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. ( ) (+) NC NO + Quartz oscillation counting timer Power delay () Power delay () Signal delay Signal delay Pulse One-shot Pulse -delay Signal Flicker Totalizing -delay Power delay () Power delay () Signal delay Signal delay Pulse One-shot Pulse -delay Signal Flicker Totalizing -delay -start flicker -start flicker Delay one-shot Power -delay Suitable for super-high accurate, digital setting V AC V DC LTH Digital timer LTH-L Digital timer LTH-W Digital timer QMH Timer Bright and easy-to-read display Simple operation Short body Economically price. Display is a bright reflectivetype LCD. Bright and easy-to-read display Simple operation Wide time setting range Possible to set and change the time with front digit switches easily during the power off. Furthermore single unit has a time range of.s to hrs!! Terminal block, cap, panel cover, rubber gasket, mounting frame to V AC V AC to V DC (other models) (Relay output type) Timedout Form C (Transistor output type) Timedout Form A (Relay output type) Timedout Form C (Transistor output type) Timedout Form A to V AC V AC to V DC (other models) Terminal block, cap, panel cover, rubber gasket, mounting frame to V AC/DC to V AC/DC (other models) Terminal block, cap, panel cover, rubber gasket, mounting frame ±(.% + ms) in case of power on start ±(.% + ms) in case of reset or input signal start ms ms UL/c-UL, CE UL/c-UL, CE P. ms UL/c-UL, CE P. P. UL/c-UL, CE P. A ma V AC V DC A ma.s time ranges selectable.h.s time ranges selectable.h.s time ranges selectable h.s h Terminal block, cap, panel cover, rubber gasket, mounting frame to V AC V AC to V DC (other models) (Relay output type) Timedout Form C (Transistor output type) Timedout Form A ±(.% + ms) in case of power on start ±(.% + ms) in case of reset or input signal start ±(.% + ms) in case of power on start ±(.% + ms) in case of reset or input signal start ±(.% +. s) in case of power on start ±.% ±. s (G type only) Operation mode ime range odel has various ges. See the lists before. Major uses Model/Product Name Features trol ut tive) Current Voltage Mounting method Mounting parts Rated operating Arrangement e acy Operation time fluctuation Temperature error Voltage error Setting error Min. power off time in. tion) Mechanical Electrical inal layouts and Wiring diagrams Available standards Page h h h h h m m s s s m m s m.s A A A.s CR oscillation counting timer Output with contact Power -delay Power flicker Power One-shot For highly accurate time setting SDXM-A/M Timer With a large transparent dial. This timer can be attached both on the DIN rails and panel. Terminal block, cap block, mounting frame, fitting sockets, protective cover to V AC, to V AC, V DC, V DC (other models) Timed-out Form C Timed-out Form C T.D. mode: Time delay C INST. mode: Time delay C and instantaneous C (Use MODE switch on front) ±% ±% ±% ±% ms ms UL/c-UL, CE P. V AC A Form C type A Form C type V AC A (Relay output type) (Transistor output type) V AC V DC A ma (Relay output type) (Transistor output type) (Relay output type) (Transistor output type) Power -start cyclic For repetitive / operation V AC PMH-W Analog multi-range cyclic twin timer time ranges are selectable. s to h (Max. range) is controlled in one unit. Timed-out Form C to V AC, to V DC, V AC/DC, V DC (other models) Terminal block, cap, panel cover, rubber gasket, mounting frame ±.% ±% ±.% ±% ms UL/CSA, CE, LLOYD P..s time ranges selectable h A CR oscillation counting timer.s min.s min.s min s h type -Pin type QMH-G type QMH-S type -Pin type type Timed-out Form C type Timed-out Form C type + N.O. N.C. Lock Stop + N.O. N.C. Lock Stop N.O. N.C. Stop Lock + N.O. N.C. Stop Lock + MODE NC NO COM NC NO COM NO NC COM RESET STOP COM Pin type type ( ) (+) N.C. N.C. N.O. N.O. N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. ( ) (+) NC NO + ERS SELECTOR CHART Quartz oscillation counting timer Power delay () Power delay () Signal delay Signal delay Pulse One-shot Pulse -delay Signal Flicker Totalizing -delay -start flicker -start flicker Delay one-shot Power -delay Suitable for super-high accurate, digital setting Economically price. Display is a bright reflective-type LCD. Bright and easy-to-read display Simple operation Wide time setting range Possible to set and change the time with front digit switches easily during the power off. Furthermore single unit has a time range of.s to hrs!! (Relay output type) Timed-out Form C (Transistor output type) Timed-out Form A to V AC V AC to V DC (other models) Terminal block, cap, panel cover, rubber gasket, mounting frame to V AC/DC to V AC/DC (other models) Terminal block, cap, panel cover, rubber gasket, mounting frame ms UL/c-UL, CE ms UL/c-UL, CE P. P. UL/c-UL, CE P. V AC V DC A ma.s time ranges selectable.h.s time ranges selectable h.s h Terminal block, cap, panel cover, rubber gasket, mounting frame to V AC V AC to V DC (other models) (Relay output type) Timed-out Form C (Transistor output type) Timed-out Form A ±(.% + ms) in case of power on start ±(.% + ms) in case of reset or input signal start ±(.% + ms) in case of power on start ±(.% + ms) in case of reset or input signal start ±(.% +. s) in case of power on start ±.% ±. s (G type only) Operation mode Time range Each model has various time ranges. See the product lists before ordering. Major uses Features Control output (resistive) Current Voltage Mounting method Mounting parts Rated operating Arrangement Time accuracy Operation time fluctuation Temperature error Voltage error Setting error Min. power off time Life (Min. operation) Mechanical Electrical Terminal layouts and Wiring diagrams Available standards Page h h h h h m m s s s m m s m.s A A A.s CR oscillation counting timer Output with contact Power -delay Power flicker Power One-shot For highly accurate time setting With a large transparent dial. This timer can be attached both on the DIN rails and panel. Terminal block, cap block, mounting frame, fitting sockets, protective cover to V AC to V AC V DC, V DC (other models) Timed-out Form C Timed-out Form C T.D. mode: Time delay C INST. mode: Time delay C and instantaneous C (Use MODE switch on front) ±% ±% ±% ±% ms ms UL/c-UL, CE P. V AC A Form C type A Form C type V AC A V AC V DC A ma (Relay output type) (Transistor output type) (Relay output type) (Transistor output type) Power -start cyclic For repetitive / operation V AC time ranges are selectable. s to h (Max. range) is controlled in one unit. Timed-out Form C to V AC to V DC, V AC/DC V DC (other models) Terminal block, cap, panel cover, rubber gasket, mounting frame ±.% ±% ±.% ±% ms UL/CSA, CE, LLOYD P..s time ranges selectable h A CR oscillation counting timer.s min.s min.s min s h type -Pin type QMH-G type QMH-S type Timed-out Form C type Timed-out Form C type N.O. N.C. Stop Lock + N.O. N.C. Stop Lock + MODE NC NO COM NC NO COM NO NC COM RESET STOP COM Pin type type ( ) (+) N.C. N.C. N.O. N.O. N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. ( ) (+) NC NO + LTH-L Digital timer LTH-W Digital timer QMH Timer Model/Product Name SDXM-A/M Timer PMH-W Analog multi-range cyclic twin timer

6 General Information Timers Timers selector chart.s Model/Product Name Model/Product Name Model/Product Name Operation mode Each model has various time ranges. See the product lists before ordering. Control output (resistive) PMH-A Multi-range analog timer Pulse -delay Pulse Flicker Pulse -Flicker Differential /-delay ()() Signal -delay Pulse One-shot Pulse One-cycle PMH-S Multi-range analog timer Power -delay PMH-M Multi-range analog timer time ranges are selectable. Power -delay Power Flicker Power -flicker Power One-shot Power One-cycle (with instantaneous contact) PMH-SD/SDM Star-Delta timer Star-Delta PMH-F/-FR/-FR -delay timer Operation Operation Power -delay mode mode CR oscillation counting timer CR oscillation counting timer CR oscillation counting timer For repetitive / Major uses For time control for short For time control for short For all uses of power For Major uses For self holding circuit For SD motor start-up Major uses operation repetitive / or long time or long time -delay operation h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h h Time range m h h Time range Time m range m m time Each model has m ranges m m time min time time various time ranges. m selectable m ranges Each model has m ranges See the product lists m m selectable various time ranges. m s time selectable before ordering. s m See See the the product lists m ranges s s before time ordering. selectable s s s s ranges s s se selectable.s s.min.s.s s time ranges selectable.s.s.s.s.s.s.s.s Multi-range analog timer Multi-range analog timer Multi-range analog timer Star-Delta timer -delay timer time ranges are selectable. time ranges are selectable. Features s to h (Max. range) is time ranges are selectable. time ranges are selectable. s to h (Max. range) is Multiple time ranges are time ranges are selectable. s to s (Max. range) is controlled time ranges in one are unit. selectable. s to h (Max. range) is controlled in one unit. selectable. Features Features s to h (Max. range) is controlled in one unit. s to h (Max. range) is is controlled. operation modes (with Power- delay of max. controlled in one unit. time ranges selectable for controlled in one unit. operation modes available. instantaneous contact) min. is controlled. A the - switching times. available. Control A Current A output A A (resistive) A A A A A Control A Current Current A A output Voltage V AC A A (resistive) A Voltage V AC V AC V AC V AC Mounting method Voltage V AC PMH-W Analog multi-range cyclic twin timer Power -start cyclic V AC Time accuracy Life (Min. operation) Mounting method Terminal block, cap, panel Terminal block, cap, panel Terminal block, cap, panel Terminal block, cap, panel Terminal block, cap, panel Terminal block, to cap, V AC panel to V DC, V AC/DC Rated Mounting Mounting parts cover, rubber gasket, mounting cover, rubber gasket, mounting cover, rubber gasket, mounting cover, rubber gasket, mounting cover, operating parts rubber gasket, mounting cover, rubber gasket, V DC frame frame frame frame frame mounting frame (other models) to V AC, to V AC, to V AC, to V AC, to V AC to V AC, to V DC, V AC/DC, to V DC, V AC/DC, to V DC, V AC/DC, to V AC, to V Timed-out Rated Rated operating V AC operating Arrangement DC, V AC/DC V DC V DC V DC V DC, V DC, V AC Form V DCC (other models) (other models) (other models) (other models) (other models) (other models) Operation time fluctuation ±.% d side: Timed-out Form Time A Timed-out Temperature Form error C Timed-out Timed-out Timed-out Form C Timed-out ±% Arrangement side: Timed-out Form accuracy Arrangement A Timed-out Voltage Form errorc Form C Form C Instantaneous Form C ±.% Form C Instantaneous: Form A [FR Setting type] error ±% Operation Operation time fluctuationh) ±.% ±.% ±.% ±.% time ±.% fluctuation ±.% Min. power off time ms Temperature error C) ±% ±% ±% ±% Time Temperature error ±% ±% Life (Min. Mechanical accuracy Voltage error %) ±.% ±.% ±.% ±.% operation) Voltage error Electrical ±.% ±.% Setting Setting error ±% ±% ±% ±% error ±% Pin type ±% Min. Min. power off time ms ms ms ms power off time ms Mechanical Life (Min. Mechanical N.C. N.C. N.O. operation) Electrical Electrical N.O. Pin type Pin type Pin type Pin type Pin type Pin type ( ) (+) No instantaneous contact input N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. input NC NC N.C. N.C. N.C. N.C. Terminal layouts and Wiring diagrams Stop input N.O. NO N.C. N.O. N.C. NO N.O. N.O. N.O. N.O. N.O. N.O. N.O. N.O. N.O. type MODE N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. Terminal layouts and wiring diagrams Available standards COM COM POWER ( ) ( ) (+) T.D. INST. type N.C. N.O. (+) ( ) Stop input input input N.C. N.O. ( ) (+) type N.C. N.O. (+) ( ) N.C. N.O. ( ) (+) type N.C. N.O. (+) ( ) ( ) (+) Terminal layouts and Wiring diagrams Pin type type With instantaneous contact Available standards N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. Page input UL/CSA, CE, LLOYD UL/CSA, CE, LLOYD UL/CSA, CE, LLOYD UL/CSA, CE, LLOYD Available standards UL/CSA, CE, LLOYD Page N.C. N.O. Mounting method Mounting parts (+) ( ) Terminal block, cap, panel cover, rubber gasket, mounting frame ( ) (+) (+) Screw (+) terminal ( ) type N.C. N.O. N.C. N.C. N.O. N.O. UL/CSA, CE, LLOYD P. (+) ( ) ( ) UL/CSA, CE, LLOYD P.

7 General Information Timers Model/Product Name PMS-A Multi-range analog timer PMS-S Multi-range analog timer PMS-M Multi-range analog timer Operation mode Pulse -delay Pulse Flicker Pulse -Flicker Signal -delay Pulse One-shot Pulse One-cycle Power -delay Pulse -delay Pulse Flicker Pulse -flicker Signal -delay Pulse One-shot Pulse One-cycle (with instantaneous contact) Time range Major uses Each model has various time ranges. See the product lists before ordering. CR oscillation counting timer For time control for short or long time h h h h h h m m m m m s s s s.s.s.s For time control for short or long time time ranges selectable CR oscillation counting timer For self holding circuit h time ranges selectable.s Features time ranges are selectable. s to h (Max. range) is controlled. operation modes available. time ranges are selectable. s to h (Max. range) is controlled in one unit. time ranges are selectable. s to h (Max. range) is controlled in one unit. operation modes (with instantaneous contact) available. Control output (resistive) Current A A A A A A Voltage V AC V AC V AC Mounting method Mounting parts Terminal block, cap, panel cover, rubber gasket, mounting frame Terminal block, cap, panel cover, rubber gasket, mounting frame Terminal block, cap, panel cover, rubber gasket, mounting frame Rated operating to V AC/DC to V AC/DC to V AC/DC Arrangement Timed-out Form C Timed-out Form C Timed-out Form C Instantaneous Form C Operation time fluctuation Time Temperature error accuracy Voltage error Setting error Min. power off time Life (Min. Mechanical operation) Electrical (resistive) ±.% ±.% ±% ±% ±.% ±.% ±% ±% ms ms ±.% ±% ±.% ±% ms Wiring diagrams Available standards UL/C-UL UL/C-UL UL/C-UL

8 General Information Timers Timer-related terminology What is a timer? The timer is a relay having such an output (with or without contact) which electrically closes (turns ) or opens (turns ) the circuit after a preset time elapses when electrical or mechanical input is given. On-delay Operation (Time delay operation) The on-delay operation is an operation to give output when preset time expires after a predetermined input is given to the power supply circuit or input circuit. On-delay operation includes power supply on-delay operation and signal ondelay operation. Example of power supply on-delay operation Power supply Output signal (Time delay contact) (In time delay operation) time Off-delay Operation (Time delay resetting) The off-delay operation is an operation to turn output when preset time expires after a predetermined input is given to the power supply circuit or input circuit, and at the same time output signal is given and predetermined input is turned. Off-delay operation includes power supply off-delay operation and signal off-delay operation. Example of power supply off-delay operation Power supply (In time delay operation) Output signal (Time delay contact) Flicker Operation The flicker operation is an operation to repeat output / action according to preset time and time while a predetermined input is given to the power supply circuit or input circuit. Flicker operation includes -start flicker operation and -start flicker operation. Example of -start flicker operation t < t Power supply or signal Output signal (Time delay contact) t t time t t t : Output time t : Output time t Star ( )/Delta (g) Operation This operation controls the time in the star connection used for star-delta starting which is conducted for starting a cage induction motor and the time for switching the star connection over to delta connection. Power supply Star side contact Delta side contact t t t : Star operation time t : - Star/Delta switching time t : Delta operation time t Preset Time The preset time is the control time set by setting time-variable timer. Time The operating time means the time which elapses between the addition of predetermined input to the power supply circuit and input circuit and the completion of operation for preset time. Hold Time It means the time which elapses between the completion of operation for preset time and the start of resetting. Pause Time It means the time elapses between the start of operation for preset time and the addition of input required again for the power supply circuit or input circuit. Timer does not perform normal function unless this pause time is set longer than the timer reset time. ting It means that the operation returns to the state before starting while the timer is in operation for preset time or after it completes the operation for preset time. ting during the operation for preset time is referred to as halfway resetting. Time It means the time elapses between shutoff of input to the power supply circuit or input of reset signal and the completion of resetting. Timer resetting function shares the reset of contact, reset of mechanical parts such as pointer etc., reset of parts in internal circuit such as capacitor etc., and the value at which all of these parts complete their resetting operation is regarded as reset time. If timer is used for a pause time shorter than specified reset time, the operation time expires earlier than preset, unexpected instantaneous operation takes place or the operation is failed, thus making it impos- sible to expect the normal operation. Therefore, be sure to set the timer pause time longer than the specified reset time. Power supply (Input signal) Time delay contact Internal mechanism Internal circuit Power application time (Input signal application time) time Hold time Pause time time Minimum Power Application Time It means the minimum time during which power must be supplied in order to operate timer normally, in the case of power supply off-delay timer. Fluctuation of Time It means the irregularity in operating time caused when timer is set at specified time and the operation is repeated under the same conditions. It is also referred to as repetitive error. Voltage Error It means the difference between the operating time at the rated and that within the allowable range. Temperature Error It means the difference between the operating time at the temperature of ± C and that within the allowable temperature range. Set Error It means the difference between the set time and the time which actually elapses. It is also referred to as setting error. The set error of an analog timer is the rate to the full-scale value. If the set error is ±%, it becomes equivalent to an error of maximum ± hours on the assumption that hours is set in the range of hours. The error produced when hours is set is also equivalent to an error of maximum ± hours. As far as the set error is concerned, digital timer is by far exact. Select a digital timer for the case when accuracy is required. When using an analog type multi-range timer for setting of long time, the setting procedure stated as follows minimizes the error. For example, if you want to set hours in the range of hours, first set the pointer to such a graduation where the actual operating time should become as close to seconds as possible in the range of seconds. Then, reset the range to hours, leaving the pointer set at the graduation as it is.

9 General Information Timers Pause Time Error It means the difference between the operating time to a fixed pause time and the operating time to a pause time that varies. The pause time characteristics are the main characteristics of CR timer (timer exploiting charge and discharge of capacitor C and resistance R). If the oscillation count timer (timer which comprises an oscillation circuit composed of CR and quartz and is operated by a counting circuit inside IC or micro-computer which counts the reference signal) is used, the pause time error becomes almost negligible owing to its principles of operation. Accordingly, the description about these characteristics may be omitted for the oscillation count timer. Equation for Each Error and Measurement Conditions The operation time shall be measured, in principle, for retention time of. second and halt time of second. The measurement shall be repeated five times except for the initial test. The equation for each error and the measurement conditions are shown in the table below: TM: Ts: TMs: Tmax: Tmin: TMx : TMx : TMx : Item () Fluctuation in operation time () Voltage error () Temperature error () Set error () Pause time error Equation Tmax. Tmin. ± x x (%) TMs TMx x TM (%) TMs TMx x TM (%) TMs TM Ts x (%) TMs TMx x TM (%) TMs Measurement conditions Set value Ts (Note ) Supply Ambient temperature Full-scale value / or more of full-scale value Full-scale value Rated Fluctuation range of allowable of power supply (Note ) Rated ± C ± F (Note ) to C + to F (Note ) ± C ± F (Note ) Note : For digital timers, the set value Ts shall be optional. Note : If no question arises from evaluation results, - C is acceptable. Note : The measurement may be performed in other specified ranges. Note : The measurement may be performed in other specified temperature ranges. Average of measured values for operation time Set value Full-scale value. For digital timers, any arbitrary scale-value may be used. Maximum of measured values for operation time Minimum of measured values for operation time Average of operation time at such as maximizes deviation from TM in allowable range Average of operation time at such temperature as maximizes deviation from TM in allowable temperature range Average of operation time at such pause time (in the range from the specified reset time to hour) as maximizes deviation from TM Functional Vibration Resistance Means such a vibration as occurs in the range where the contact closed with that vibration during the use of the timer remains closed for the specified time ( or msec.) minimum. Destructive Vibration Resistance Means such a vibration as occurs in the range where no part is damage with that vibration during the transportation or use of the timer and the operation characteristics are maintained. Functional Shock Resistance Means such a shock as occurs in the range where the contact closed with that shock during the use of the timer remains closed for the specified time ( ms) minimum. Destructive Shock Resistance Means such a shock as occurs in the range where no part is damaged with that shock during the transportation or use of the timer and the operation characteristics are maintained. Mechanical life Means the durability that is achieved when the control output is performed in the noload state. Electrical life Means the durability that is achieved when the specified and current loads are individually applied to the control output while being turned and. Generally, the life of the timer is represented by the number of times the control output is performed. When a load is connected to the control output, the term of electrical life is used. When no load is connected to the control output, the term of mechanical life is used. The electrical life is shorter than the mechanical life, and becomes longer as the load decreases. The life of the timer is made longer by connecting a relay or a similar part rather than directly switching a large load with the control output. Rated power consumption Means the power that is consumed when the rated operation is applied to the power circuit. (Rated power consumption = rated xcurrent consumption) Rated control capacity Means the reference value that is used to determine the performance of the switching part of the load. This value is represented by the combination of and current. Contact resistance Means the combined resistance that consists of the contact resistance between contacts, and the conductor resistance of pins and contact springs. Insulation resistance Means the resistance between a contact or a conductive pin like the pin to which the operation is applied, and a dead pin or a non-conductive metallic part like the time case, the base, or a retaining screw; or the resistance between contacts. Withstand Means the limit value that does not cause breakdown when high is applied for one minute to the same location as measured for insulation resistance. The detectable leak current is normally ma. In special cases, however, it may be ma or ma. Withstand surge Means the limit value that shows the durability against momentary abnormal resulting from lightning or switching a conductive load. The surge waveform is represented by the standard impulsive waveform at ±(.x) µs or ±(x) µs.

10 General Information Timers On-delay timer basic circuit (Symbols) Self-resetting switch Holding switch R Relay T Timer L Load Timer in work Relay NO contact Relay NC contact Timer delay NO contact Timer delay NC contact Timer instantaneous NO contact Timer instantaneous NC contact. Delay Operation (Instantaneous input) When control switch A is pressed, timer T starts immediately and after t-time elapses, load L is turned. When B is pressed, timer T is reset and load L is turned. A B T L A B R. Delay Operation (Continuous input) When switch A is pressed, after t-time elapsed, the timer contact closes and load L is turned. When switch A is opened, the timer is reset and the load is turned. A T L T R t T t L A T. Fixed Time Operation (Instantaneous input) When control switch A is pressed, load L is immediately turned, and after t- time elapses, load L is turned. A B (In the case of timer w/instantaneous contact) T L T T L T. Fixed Time Operation (Continuous input) When switch A is closed, load L is turned and after t-time elapses, the load is turned. When switch A is opened, timer T is reset and load L is turned.. Delay Operation When contact A is reversed, load L is immediately turned. When contact A is returned to normal state, load L is turned after t-time elapses. This circuit is used when the power supply is kept at all times or used for offdelay-like application. However, it can not be used as off-delay timer at the time of power failure. A T L A T L. Fixed Time Operation after Delay Time is Set (Instantaneous input) When control switch A is pressed, load L is turned after t-time elapses, and load L is turned after t-time elapses. This circuit is used for the case of instantaneous input (one pulse). A T T A A T t R R T T R T t L L R L. Fixed Time Operation after Delay Time is Set (Continuous input) When switch A is pressed, load L is turned after t-time elapses and load L is turned after t-time elapses. A T T. Repetitive Operation When switch A is pressed, load L is turned after t-time elapses and load L is turned after t-time elapses, and thereafter the t and t operations are repeated. This repetitive operation stops when switch A is turned. A T T L L A A T T t t R L T T t R T R T R t t t T T L R A R A T R T T T R T L T T L A T A t A T L t (In the case of timer w/instantaneous contact) T T T T L (In the case of timer w/instantaneous contact) T T L t

11 General application guidelines General Information Timers Cautions for circuits. Protective circuit for timer contact In the circuit that switches an inductive load, a contact failure may occur at a contact point due to surge or inrush current resulting from that switching. Therefore, it is recommended that the following protective circuit be used to protect the contact point. CR circuit (r: resistor c: capacitor) Timer contact Timer contact Diode circuit Timer contact Varistor circuit Timer contact Circuit r c Inductive load r c Inductive load Diode Inductive load ZNR varistor Inductive load Application AC DC Features/Notes Device Selection. Type of Load and Inrush Current The type of load and its inrush current characteristics, together with the switching frequency are important factors which cause contact welding. Particularly for loads with inrush currents, measure the steady state current and inrush current and use a relay or magnet switch which provides an ample margin of safety. The table below shows the relationship between typical loads and their inrush currents. Type of load Resistive load Solenoid load Motor load Incandescent lamp load Mercury lamp load Sodium vapor lamp load Capacitive load Transformer load (see note.) Available Not available Available Available Available Available Available If the load is a relay or solenoid, the release time lengthens. The diode connected in parallel Effective when connected to both contacts if the power supply is causes the energy stored in the coil or V and the across the load is to V. to flow to the coil in the form of current and dissipates it as joule heat If the load is a timer, leakage current at the resistance component of the flows through the CR circuit causing inductive load. faulty operation. This circuit further delays the release Note: If used with AC, be sure time compared to the CR circuit. the impedance of the load is sufficiently ( to times the release time listed in smaller than that of the c and r. the catalog) As a guide in selecting r and c, Use a diode with a reverse breakdown c:. to mf per A contact current at least times the r:. to W per V contact circuit and a forward current Values vary depending on the properties of the load and variations in timer characteristics. at least as large as the load current. Capacitor c acts to suppress the discharge the moment the contacts open. Resistor r In electronic circuits where the acts to limit the current when the power is turned on the next time. Test to confirm. circuit s reverse breakdown Use a capacitor with a breakdown of to V. Use AC type capacitors of about to times the (non-polarized) for AC circuits. power supply. Inrush current Steady state current to times the steady state current to times the steady state current to times the steady state current to times the steady state current to times the steady state current to times the steady state current to times the steady state current When you want large load and long life of the timer, do not control the load direct with a timer. When the timer is designed to use a relay or a magnet switch, you can acquire the longer life of the timer.. Connection of input The PMH and LTH series use power supply without a transformer (power and input terminals are not insulated). In connecting various kinds of input signals, therefore, use a power transformer in which the primary side is separated from the ungrounded secondary side as shown in Fig. A, for the power supply for a sensor and other input devices so that short-circuiting can be prevented. (Fig. A) Good example AC power supply AC power supply Insulation transformer Timer (Fig. B) Bad example AC power supply Insulation transformer Timer Timer (+) ( ) (+) ( ) Single coil transformer (+) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) Input device (e.g., sensor) Input device (e.g., sensor) Input device (e.g., sensor) Alternative current flow Do not use a single coil transformer (e.g., Sly-Duck). Otherwise, the internal circuit of the timer will be short-circuited as shown in Fig. B resulting in breakdown.. Long Continuous Current Flow Long continuous current flow through the timer (approx. one month or longer) cause generation of heat internally, which degrade the electronic parts. Use the timer in combination with a relay and avoid long continuous current flow through the timer. () When using contact output R T R R () When using non-contact output (Fig. A) R R (Fig. B) Using the rated characteristics of the varistor, this circuit prevents excessively high s from being applied across the contacts. This circuit also slightly delays the release time. RT. Leakage current ) For connecting and disconnecting operating to the timer, a circuit should be used, which will prevent the flow of leakage current. For example, a circuit for contact protection as shown in Fig A. will permit leakage current flow through R and C, causing erroneous operation of the timer. Instead, the circuit shown in Fig. B should be used. T Leak current R R C T RT R C T T Timer Timer

12 General Information Timers General application guidelines ) If the timer is directly switched with a non-contact element, leak current may flow into the timer and cause it to malfunction.. Power off time If the operation for the timer is turned after the limit time operation is completed or before the limit time is reached, the Power off time longer than the timer restoration time must be secured.. Suicide circuit If the timer is restored immediately after the specified time is reached, the circuit must be configured so that the restoration time of the timer can be secured sufficiently. If the power circuit for the timer is turned with the timer contact, a suicide circuit may be configured (Fig. A). In order to settle the problem with this potential suicide circuit, the circuit must be designed so that the timer is turned after the self-retention circuit is completely released (Fig. B). R T A T (Fig. A) R R T A T (Fig. B). Electrical life The electrical life varies depending on the load type, the switching phase, and the ambient atmosphere. In particular, R the following cases require careful attention: () If an AC load is switched in synchronized phases: Locking or welding is liable to occur due to contact transposition. Check this with the actual system. ()If a load is switched very frequently: If a load which generates arcs when a contact is switched is turned and very frequently, nitrogen and oxygen in air are combined due to arc energy and then HNO is produced. This may corrode metallic materials. The effective countermeasures include:. Using an arc-extinguishing circuit;. Decreasing the switching frequency;. Decreasing the humidity in the ambient atmosphere. Cautions for use (common for all models). Pin connections Correctly connect the pins while seeing the terminal layout/wiring diagram. In particular, the DC type, which has polarities, does not operate with the polarities connected reverse. Any incorrect connection can cause abnormal heating or ignition.. Connection to operation power supply ) Supply must be applied at a time through a switch, a relay, and other parts. If the is applied gradually, the specified time may be reached regardless of its value or the power supply may not be reset. ) The operation for the DC type must be at the specified ripple percentage or less. The average must fall within the allowable operation range. Rectification type Ripple percentage Single-phase, full-wave Approx. % Three-phase, full-wave Approx. % Three-phase, half-wave Approx. % Note: Refer to the ripple percentage of each timer. ) Make sure that no induced and residual are applied between the power pins on the timer after the power switch is turned. (If the power line is wired in parallel with the high- and motor lines, induced may be produced between the power pins.). Control output ) The load for the control output must be used within the load capacity specified in the rated control capacity. If it is used exceeding the rated value, the life is greatly shortened. ) The following connection might result in short circuit between the heteropolar contacts in the timer. Bad example L L Good example L L. Installing the timer ) To install the timer, use the dedicated pin bracket or socket (cap). Avoid connecting the pins on the timer by directly soldering them. ) In order to maintain the characteristics, do not remove the timer cover (case).. Superimposed surge of power supply For the superimposed surge of power supply, the standard waveform (±.xµs or ±xµs) is taken as the standard value for surge-proof. (The positive and negative s are applied each three or five times between the power pins.) For the standard values for the PMH, LTH and SDX type timers, see the respective items in Cautions for use. Single-pole, full-wave for surge waveform [±(.x) µs] Crest value (%) Crest value. Time ( s) Single-pole, full-wave for surge waveform [±(x) µs] Crest value (%) Crest value Time ( s) PMH [±(x) µs] Voltage type Surge AC type (Except for V AC),V V DC, V DC, V AC V V DC,V to V DC,V If external surge occurs exceeding the specified value, the internal circuit may break down. In this case, use a surge absorption element. The typical surge absorption elements include a varistor, a capacitor, and a diode. If a surge absorption element is used, use an oscilloscope to see whether or not the foreign surge exceeding the specified value appears.. Changing the set time Do not change the set time when the limit time operation is in progress. However, this is possible only with the motor-driven type timer if the set time is shorter than the remaining time. For changing the set time on the digital timer (LTH series), see the relevant item in Cautions for use.

13 General Information Timers. environment ) Use the timer within the ambient temperature range from C to + C + F to + F (+ C + F for the LTH series) and at ambient humidity of % RH maximum. ) Avoid using the timer in a location where inflammable or corrosive gas is generated, the timer is exposed to much dust and other foreign matter water or oil is splashed on the timer or vibrations or shocks are given to the timer. ) The timer cover (case), the knobs, and the dials are made of polycarbonated resin. Therefore, prevent the timer from being exposed to organic solvents such as methyl alcohol, benzine, and thinner, strong acid substances such as caustic soda, and ammonia and avoid using the timer in atmosphere containing any of those substances. ) If the timer is used where noises are emitted frequently, separate the input signal elements (such as a sensor), the wiring for the input signal line, and the timer as far as possible from the noise source and the high power line containing noises.. Checking the actual load In order to increase the reliability in the actual use, check the quality of the timer in the actual usage.. Others ) If the timer is used exceeding the ratings (operation and control capacity), the contact life, or any other specified limit, abnormal heat, smoke, or ignition may occur. ) If any malfunction of the timer is likely to affect human life and properties, give allowance to the rated values and performance values. In addition, take appropriate safety measures such as a duplex circuit from the viewpoint of product liabilities.

14 LTH Digital Timers DIN Size Digital Timer LTH UL File No.: E C-UL File No.: E. Pin type... mm inch type Features Bright and Easy-to-Read Display A brand new bright -color back light LCD display. The easy-to-read screen in any location makes checking and setting procedures a cinch. Simple Operation Seesaw buttons make operating the unit even easier than before. Short Body of only. mm. inch (screw terminal type) or. mm. inch (pin type) With a short body, it is easy to install in even narrow control panels. Conforms to IP s Weather Resistant Standards The water-proof panel keeps out water and dirt for reliable operation even in poor environments. (M.) and Pin Types are Both Standard Options The two terminal types are standard options to support either front panel installation or embedded installation. Changeable Panel Cover Also offers a black panel cover to meet your design considerations. Compliant with UL, c-ul and CE. Product types Time range mode Output Power down insurance Terminal type Part number. s (. s~). s (. s~). s (. s~) s ( s~) min s ( s~). min (. min~) h min ( min~). h (. h~) Power delay () Power delay () Signal delay Signal delay Pulse One-shot Pulse -delay Signal Flicker Totalizing -delay ( modes) Relay ( c) Transistor ( a) * A rubber gasket (ATC) and a mounting frame (AT-DA) are included. Part names to V AC V AC to V DC to V AC V AC to V DC Available pins LTH-ACV pins pins pins pins LTH-ACV LTH-ACVS pins LTH-ACV pins LTH-ACV LTH-ACVS pins LTH-DCV pins LTHT-ACV LTHT-ACV LTHT-ACVS pins LTHT-ACV pins LTH-DCV LTH-DCVS LTHT-ACV LTHT-ACVS pins LTHT-DCV LTHT-DCV LTHT-DCVS Time delay indicator Controlled output indicator indicator Lock indicator switch Lock switch RESET LOCK OP. RST LOCK LTH h m s UP DOWN TIMER (Countdown time display) Elapsed time display Set time display Time units display Up keys Down keys (Same for screw terminal type and -pin type) DIP switches

15 Specifications Item Rating Time accuracy (max.) Contact Life Electrical Mechanical conditions Rated operating Type Rated frequency Rated power consumption Rated control capacity Time range Time counting direction Operation mode //Stop input Lock input Input signal Indication Power failure memory method time fluctuation Temperature error Voltage error Setting error Contact arrangement Contact resistance (Initial value) Contact material Mechanical (contact) Electrical (contact) Allowable operating range Breakdown (Initial value) Insulation resistance (Initial value) reset time Temperature rise Vibration resistance Shock resistance Connection Protective construction Functional Destructive Functional Destructive Ambient temperature Ambient humidity Air pressure Ripple rate Applicable standard Relay output type AC type AC/DC type DC type to V AC, V AC, to V DC V AC/DC / Hz common Max. V A Max. W A, V AC (resistive load). s,. s,. s, s, min s,. min, h min,. h (selected by DIP switch) Addition (UP)/Subtraction (DOWN) ( directions selectable by DIP switch) A (Power delay ), A (Power delay ), B (Signal delay), C (Signal delay), D (Pulse one-shot), E (Pulse delay), F (Signal Flicker), G (Totalizing delay) (selectable by DIP switch) Min. input signal width: ms, ms ( directions by selected by DIP switch) (The -pin type does not have a stop input.) Min. input signal width: ms (The -pin type does not have a lock input.) Open collector input Input impedance: Max. k ; Residual : Max. V Open impedance: k or less, Max. energized : V DC -segment LCD (LTH, LTH-L common), Elapsed value (backlight red LED), Setting value (backlight yellow LED) ± (. % + ms) in case of power on start ± (. % + ms) in case of input signal start Timed-out Form C m (at A V DC) Ag alloy/au flash Min. x ope. (Except for switch operation parts) EEP ROM (Min. overwriting) : to % [ Temperature: to + C + to + F Min. input signal width: ms ].x ope. (At rated control ) Min. ope. (At rated control ) to % of rated operating, Vrms for min: Between live and dead metal parts (-pin), Vrms for min: Between input and output, Vrms for min: Between contacts Between live and dead metal parts Min. M : Between input and output (At V DC) Between contacts Max..s Transistor output type AC type AC/DC type to V AC, V AC, V AC/DC / Hz common Max. V A ma, V DC DC type to V DC Max. W Timed-out Form A (Open collector), Vrms for min: Between live and dead metal parts (Pin type), Vrms for min: Between input and output Min. M : Between live and dead metal parts Between input and output (At V DC) Max. C (under the flow of nominal operating current at nominal ) to Hz: cycle/min single amplitude of. mm. inch ( min on axes) to Hz: cycle/min single amplitude of. mm. inch ( h on axes) Min. m. ft./s ( times on axes) Min. m. ft./s ( times on axes) C to C + F to + F Max. % RH (non-condensing) to, h Pa % or less % or less -pin/-pin/screw terminal IP (front panel with rubber gasket) Safety standard EN- Pollution Degree /Over Category II EMC (EMI)EN-- Radiation interference electric field strength Noise terminal (EMS)EN-- Static discharge immunity RF electromagnetic field immunity EFT/B immunity Surge immunity Conductivity noise immunity Power frequency magnetic field immunity Voltage dip/instantaneous stop/voltage fluctuation immunity EN Group ClassA EN Group ClassA EN-- kv contact kv air EN-- V/m AM modulation ( MHz to GHz) V/m pulse modulation ( MHz to MHz) EN-- kv (power supply line) kv (signal line) EN-- kv (power line) EN-- V/m AM modulation (. MHz to MHz) EN-- A/m ( Hz) EN-- ms, % (rated ) ms, % (rated ), ms, % (rated ), ms, % (rated ) Digital Timers

16 LTH Digital Timers Dimensions LTH digital timer type (Flush mount) Pin type (Flush mount/surface mount) (units: mm inch) Tolerance: ±. ± TIMER OP. RST LOCK h m s.... RESET UP LOCK LTH DOWN.... Dimensions for embedded installation (with adapter installed) type Pin type Rubber gasket ATC (supplied) TIMER Panel Mounting frame for flush mount AT-DA (supplied) Rubber gasket ATC (supplied) TIMER Panel Mounting frame for flush mount AT-DA (supplied) -pin type (p cap AD-RC sold separately) -pin type (p cap AT-DP sold separately). OP. RST LOCK h m s RESET UP..... OP. RST LOCK RESET h m s UP.. LOCK LOCK LTH DOWN LTH DOWN Dimensions for front panel installations DIN rail terminal block (-pin type AT-DFK sold separately) (-pin type AT-DFK sold separately) Device installation rail AT-DLA (sold separately). (.). (.) ( ) dimension is for -pin type. Installation panel cut-out dimensions The standard panel cut-out dimensions are shown below. Use the mounting frame (AT-DA) and rubber gasket (ATC). min min For connected installations A A = ( n.) +. Note) : The installation panel thickness should be between and mm. and. inch. Note) : For connected installations, the waterproofing ability between the unit and installation panel is lost. Terminal layouts and wiring diagrams -pin type Relay output type N.C. + type Relay output type Stop Lock N.C. N.O. N.O. Transistor output type + Transistor output type Stop Lock -pin type Relay output type Stop Lock + N.C. N.O. Transistor output type Stop Lock Note) For connecting the output leads of the transistor output type, refer to ) Transistor output on page.

17 Setting the operation mode, time range and time Setting procedure ) Setting the operation mode and time range Set the operation mode and time range with the DIP switches on the side of the LTH timer. DIP switches * Item DIP switch Operation mode Refer to table Minimum input reset, start, and stop signal width ms ms Time delay direction Addition Subtraction Time range Refer to table * The -pin type does not have the stop input, so that the dip switch can be changed over between reset and start inputs. The signal range of the lock input is fixed (minimum ms). DIP switches Table : Setting the operation mode DIP switch No. Operation mode A: Power on delay A: Power on delay B: Signal on delay C: Signal off delay D: Pulse One shot E: Pulse On delay F: Signal Flicker G: Totalizing On delay Table : Setting the time range DIP switch No. Time range. s to. s. s to. s. s to. s s to s min s to min s. min to. min h min to h min. h to. h (Same for screw terminal type) Notes: ) Set the DIP switches before installing the timer. ) When the DIP SW setting is changed, turn off the power once. ) The DIP switches are set as before shipping. Setting procedure ) Setting the time Set the set time with the keys (UP and DOWN keys) on the front of the LTH timer. Front display section Elapsed time display Set time display Time delay indicator Controlled output indicator indicator Lock indicator Time units display RESET LOCK OP. RST LOCK LTH h m UP DOWN s TIMER UP keys Changes the corresponding digit of the set time in the addition direction (upwards) DOWN keys Changes the corresponding digit of the set time in the subtraction direction (downwards) RESET switch s the elapsed time and the output LOCK switch Locks the operation of all keys on the unit Digital Timers Changing the set time. It is possible to change the set time with the up and down keys even during time delay with the timer. However, be aware of the following points. ) If the set time is changed to less than the elapsed time with the time delay set to the addition direction, time delay will continue until the elapsed time reaches full scale, returns to zero, and then reaches the new set time. If the set time is changed to a time above the elapsed time, the time delay will continue until the elapsed time reaches the new set time. ) If the time delay is set to the subtraction direction, time delay will continue until regardless of the new set time.. If the set time is changed to, the unit will operate differently depending on the operation mode. ) If the operation mode is set to A (power on delay ) or A (power on Power failure memory The EEPROM is used for power failure memory. It has a life of Min. over-writings. The EEPROM is overwriting with the following timing. delay ), the output will turn on when the power supply is turned on. However, the output will be off while reset is being input. ) In the other modes, the output turns on when the start is input. When the operation mode is C (signal off delay), D (Pulse one shot), or F (Signal flicker), only when the start input is on does the output turn on. Also, when the reset is being input, the output is off. Output mode Overwrite timing Power delay () A When power is Addition G Change of preset value or start, reset input When power is after being Other modes When power is after changing preset value * Be aware that the contents of EEPROM for all modes will be overwritten when power is turned during input to external lock terminals to and to. Such an action does not exist by doing lock operation from the front.

18 LTH Digital Timers Operation mode Operation type Explanation Time chart T: Set time t, t, t, ta<t Power on delay () A Set the operation mode section of the DIP switches (no. s,, and ) on the side of the timer as shown. Clears elapsed time value and starts time delay at power. After timer completion, stops at the display of the set value (addition), or stops at (subtraction). Ignores start input. Stops delay time operation at stop. Restarts delay time operation at stop. Power supply Output Stop T t t t+t=t Power on delay () A Set the operation mode section of the DIP switches (no. s,, and ) on the side of the timer as shown. Elapsed time value does not clear at power. (power outage countermeasure function) The output remains even after the power is cut and restarted. After timer completion, stops at the display of the set value (addition), or stops at (subtraction). Ignores start input. Stops delay time operation at stop. Restarts delay time operation at stop. Power supply Output Stop T t t t+t=t Signal on delay B Set the operation mode section of the DIP switches (no. s,, and ) on the side of the timer as shown. Clears elapsed time value at power. Time delay starts at start and elapsed time value or output resets at start. Instantaneous time delay start at reset and power while start is. Stops delay time operation at stop. Restarts delay time operation at stop. In order to have the time delay start at power or reset at power, short out the start input beforehand. Power supply Output Stop T t t t+t=t Signal off delay C Set the operation mode section of the DIP switches (no. s,, and ) on the side of the timer as shown. Clears elapsed time value at power. Output control at start and time delay start at start. Elapsed time value clears when start goes again during time delay. Stops delay time operation at stop. Restarts delay time operation at stop. Power supply Output Stop T>ta+tb T>t T ta tb t Notes: ) Each signal input (start, reset, stop, and lock) is applied by shorting their input terminal to the common terminal (terminal for the -pin type, terminal for the -pin type, and terminal for the screw terminal type). ) The -pin type does not have a stop input or lock input.

19 Operation type Pulse One-shot D Explanation Set the operation mode section of the DIP switches (no. s,, and ) on the side of the timer as shown. Clears elapsed time value at power. Time delay starts and output control at start. Turns output control and clears elapsed time value at time-up. Ignores start input during time delay. Stops delay time operation at stop. Restarts delay time operation at stop. In order to have the time delay start at power or reset at power, short out the start input beforehand. Power supply Output Stop T>ta Time chart T=t+t T ta T t t t Digital Timers Pulse On delay E Set the operation mode section of the DIP switches (no. s,, and ) on the side of the timer as shown. Clears elapsed time value at power. Time delay starts at start. Ignores start input during time delay. Stops delay time operation at stop. Restarts delay time operation at stop. In order to have the time delay start at power or reset at power, short out the start input beforehand. Power supply Output Stop T T=t+t t t T T Signal Flicker F Set the operation mode section of the DIP switches (no. s,, and ) on the side of the timer as shown. Clears elapsed time value at power. Time delay starts at start. Ignores start input during time delay. Output control reverses, elapsed time value clears, and timer delay starts at timer completion. Stops delay time operation at stop. Restarts delay time operation at stop. In order to have the time delay start at power or reset at power, short out the start input beforehand. Power supply Output Stop T T T=t+t t t ta T>ta T T=t+t t t Totalizing On delay G Set the operation mode section of the DIP switches (no. s,, and ) on the side of the timer as shown. Elapsed time value does not clear at power. (power outage countermeasure function) The output remains even after the power is off and restarted. Stops delay time operation at stop. Restarts delay time operation at stop. Power supply Output Stop T=t+t+t T>ta T t t t ta Notes: ) Each signal input (start, reset, stop, and lock) is applied by shorting their input terminal to the common terminal (terminal for the -pin type, terminal for the -pin type, and ter- minal for the screw terminal type). ) The -pin type does not have a stop input or lock input.

20 xlth-w Digital Timers DIN Size Digital Timer LTH-W.... mm inch -pin type -pin type type UL File No.: E Features Wide time range The operation time range covers from. sec. to hours. The individual setting can be performed on each of and timers..s mins hmin.s.min.h s h Bright and Easy-to-Read Display A brand new bright -color back light LCD display. The easy-to-read screen in any location makes checking and setting procedures a cinch. Simple Operation Seesaw buttons make operating the unit even easier than before. Short Body of only. mm. inch (screw terminal type) or C-UL File No.: E. mm. inch (pin type) With a short body, it is easy to install in even narrow control panels. Conforms to IP s Weather Resistant Standards The water-proof panel keeps out water and dirt for reliable operation even in poor environments. (M.) and Pin Types are Both Standard Options The two terminal types are standard options to support either front panel installation or embedded installation. Changeable Panel Cover Also offers a black panel cover to meet your design considerations. Compliant with UL, c-ul and CE. Product types Time range mode Output Power down insurance Terminal type Part number pins LTHW-ACV to V AC pins LTHW-ACV LTHW-ACVS pins LTHW-ACV Relay ( c) V AC pins LTHW-ACV LTHW-ACVS Pulse input:.s pins LTHW-DCV Delayed one shot.s -start flicker to V DC pins LTHW-DCV s -start flicker mins LTHW-DCVS Available.min Integrating input: pins LTHWT-ACV hmin Delayed one shot.h to V AC pins LTHWT-ACV -start flicker h -start flicker LTHWT-ACVS pins LTHWT-ACV Transistor ( a) V AC pins LTHWT-ACV LTHWT-ACVS pins LTHWT-DCV to V DC pins LTHWT-DCV LTHWT-DCVS * A rubber gasket (ATC) and a mounting frame (AT-DA) are included. Part names T/T Operation display Display for change-over between T/T settings Controlled output indicator Lock indicator switch Set/Lock switch RESET SET/LOCK T T T OP. T LOCK LTH-W h m UP DOWN Fourth digit s TIMER First digit (Subtraction elapsed time display) Elapsed time display Set time display Time units display Up keys Down keys DIP switches (Same for -pin and screw terminal type)

21 Specifications Item Rating Time accuracy (max.) Contact Life Electrical Mechanical conditions Type Rated operating Rated frequency Rated power consumption Rated control capacity Time range Time counting direction Operation mode //Stop input Lock input Input signal Indication Power failure memory method time fluctuation Temperature error Voltage error Setting error Contact arrangement Contact resistance (Initial value) Contact material Mechanical (contact) Relay output type AC type to V AC, V AC / Hz common Max. V A A, V AC.s,.s, s, mins,.min, hmin,.h, h (selected by DIP switch) Addition (UP)/Subtraction (DOWN) ( directions selectable by DIP switch) Pulse input: Delayed one shot, -start flicker or -start flicker Integrating input: Delayed one shot, -start flicker or -start flicker Min. input signal width: ms, ms ( directions by selected by DIP switch) (The pin type does not have a stop input.) Min. input signal width: ms (The -pin type does not have a lock input.) Open collector input Input impedance: Max. k ; Residual : Max. V Open impedance: k or less, Max. energized : V DC -segment LCD, Elapsed value (backlight red LED), Setting value (backlight yellow LED) Timed-out Form C mw (at A V DC) Ag alloy/au flash DC type to V DC Max. W Min. x ope. (Except for switch operation parts) Transistor output type AC type DC type to V AC, V AC to V DC / Hz common Max. V A Max. W ma, V DC Timed-out Form A (Open collector) Electrical (contact) Min. ope. (At rated control ) Min. ope. (At rated control ) Allowable operating range to % of rated operating, Vrms for min: Between live and dead metal parts (-pin type only) Breakdown, Vrms for min: Between live and dead metal parts (Pin type only), Vrms for min: Between input and output (Initial value), Vrms for min: Between input and output, Vrms for min: Between contacts Between live and dead metal parts Min. M : Between live and dead metal parts Insulation resistance Min. M : Between input and output (At V DC) Between input and output (At V DC) (Initial value) Between contacts reset time Max.. s Temperature rise Max C (under the flow of nominal operating current at nominal ) Vibration resistance Shock resistance Connection Protective construction Functional Destructive Functional Destructive Ambient temperature Ambient humidity Air pressure Ripple rate EEP ROM (Min. overwriting) : % to % ± (.% + ms) in case of power on start ± (.% + ms) in case of input signal start [ Temperature: C to + C + F to + F Min. input signal width: ms ] to Hz: cycle/ min single amplitude of. mm. inch ( min on axes) to Hz: cycle/ min single amplitude of. mm. inch ( h on axes) Min. m. ft./s ( times on axes) Min. m. ft./s ( times on axes) C to C + F to + F Max. % RH (non-condensing) to, h Pa % or less % or less -pin/-pin/screw terminal IP (front panel with rubber gasket) Digital Timers Applicable standard Safety standard EN- Pollution Degree /Over Category II EMC (EMI)EN-- Radiation interference electric field strength Noise terminal (EMS)EN-- Static discharge immunity RF electromagnetic field immunity EFT/B immunity Surge immunity Conductivity noise immunity Power frequency magnetic field immunity Voltage dip/instantaneous stop/voltage fluctuation immunity EN Group ClassA EN Group ClassA EN-- kv contact kv air EN-- V/m AM modulation ( MHz to GHz) V/m pulse modulation ( MHz to MHz) EN-- kv (power supply line) kv (signal line) EN-- kv (power line) EN-- V/m AM modulation (. MHz to MHz) EN-- A/m ( Hz) EN-- ms, % (rated ) ms, % (rated ), ms, % (rated ), ms, % (rated )

22 LTH-W Digital Timers Dimensions LTH-W digital timer type (Flush mount) Pin type (Flush mount/surface mount) (units: mm inch) Tolerance: ±. ± TIMER T T T OP. T LOCK h m s.... RESET UP SET/LOCK LTH-W DOWN.... (Same for -pin type) Dimensions for flush mount (with adapter installed) type Pin type T Rubber gasket ATC (supplied) TIMER Panel Mounting frame for flush mount AT-DA (supplied) T Rubber gasket ATC (supplied) TIMER Panel Mounting frame for flush mount AT-DA (supplied) -pin type (p cap AD-RC sold separately) -pin type (p cap AT-DP sold separately) T T. T OP. T LOCK RESET h m UP s..... T OP. T LOCK RESET h m UP s.. SET/LOCK SET/LOCK LTH-W DOWN LTH-W DOWN..... Dimensions for front panel installations. (.). (.) DIN rail terminal block (-pin type AT-DFK sold separately) (-pin type AT-DFK sold separately) Device installation rail AT-DLA (sold separately) ( ) dimension is for -pin type. Installation panel cut-out dimensions The standard panel cut-out dimensions are shown below. Use the mounting frame (AT-DA) and rubber gasket (ATC). min..min min..min. For connected installations When n timers are continuously installed, the dimension (A) is calculated according to the following formula (n: the number of the timers to be installed): A=( n.) +. A=(. n.) +. Note) : The installation panel thickness should be between and mm. and. inch. Note) : For connected installations, the waterproofing ability between the unit and installation panel is lost. Terminal layouts and wiring diagrams -Pin type Relay output type Transistor output type -Pin type Relay output type Transistor output type A N.C. ( ) (+) N.O. ( ) (+) Stop Lock + N.C. N.O. Stop Lock + type Relay output type Transistor output type Stop Lock N.C. N.O. Stop Lock Note) For connecting the output leads of the transistor output type, refer to ) Transistor output on page. + +

23 Setting the operation mode and time range Setting procedure ) Setting the time range (Timer T /Timer T ) Set the time range with the DIP switches on the side of the LTH-W timer. Setting procedure ) Setting the operation mode Set the operation mode with the keys on the front of the LTH-W timer. * Elapsed time display Set time display T /T operation indicator T /T setting value selectable indicator Controlled output indicator Lock indicator Time units display Item Time range (Timer T ) DIP switch Refer to table Minimum input reset, start, and stop signal width ms ms Time delay direction Addition Subtraction Time range (Timer T ) Refer to table * The -pin type does not have the stop input, so that the DIP switch can be changed over between reset and start inputs. The signal range of the lock input is fixed (minimum ms). T T T OP. T LOCK DIP switches (same for screw terminal type and -pin type.) RESET SET/LOCK LTH-W h Fourth digit m UP DOWN s TIMER First digit Table : Setting the time range (Timer T ) DIP switch No. Time range. s to. s. s to. s s to s min s to min s. min to. min h min to h min. h to. h h to h Table : Setting the time range (Timer T ) DIP switch No. Time range. s to. s. s to. s s to s min s to min s. min to. min h min to h min. h to. h h to h Notes: ) Set the DIP switches before installing the timer. ) When the DIP SW setting is changed, turn off the power once. ) The DIP switches are set as before shipping. UP keys Changes the corresponding digit of the set time in the addition direction (upwards) DOWN keys Changes the corresponding digit of the set time in the subtraction direction (downwards) RESET switch s the elapsed time and the output SET/LOCK switch Changes over the display between T /T settings, sets the operation mode, checks the operation mode and locks the operation of each key (such as up, down or reset key). Digital Timers ) Setting or changing the operation mode Ex: Setting operation mode display () When the UP or DOWN key at the first digit is pressed with the SET/LOCK (PULSE-A example) switch pressed, the mode is changed over to the setting mode. () Now release the SET/LOCK switch. () The operation mode in the setting mode is changed over sequentially in the left or right direction by pressing the UP or DOWN key at the first digit, respectively. Pulse input -start One operation Pulse input -start Repeating operation Pulse input -start Repeating operation Integrating input -start One operation Integrating input -start Repeating operation Integrating input -start Repeating operation () The operational mode displayed at present is set by pressing the RESET switch, and the display returns to the normal condition. ) Setting (changing) the time () Pressing the SET/LOCK key switches the set value display between T and T. Display the timer (T or T) which is to be set (or changed). () After displaying the timer (T or T) which is to be set, press the UP or DOWN key to change the time. Checking the operation mode When the UP or DOWN key at the second digit is pressed with the SET/LOCK switch pressed, the operational mode can be checked. The display returns to the normal condition after indicating the operational mode for about two seconds. (While the display indicates the operational mode for about two seconds, the other indicators continue to operate normally.) Setting the lock When the UP or DOWN key at the fourth digit is pressed with the SET/LOCK switch pressed, all keys on the unit are locked. The timer does not accept any of UP, DOWN and RESET keys. To release the lock setting, press the UP or DOWN key at the fourth digit again with the set/lock switch pressed. * Operational mode, adding and subtracting and minimum input signal range cannot be set at T and T, respectively. Changing over the T /T setting display The T/T setting display is changed over by pressing the SET/LOCK switch. (This operation gives no effect on the other operations. The set time and elapsed time (residual time) at T are linked with those at T.) Changing the set time ) It is possible to change the set time with the UP and DOWN keys even during time delay with the timer. However, be aware of the following points. () If the set time is changed to less than the elapsed time with the time delay set to the addition direction, time delay will continue until the elapsed time reaches full scale, returns to zero, and then reaches the new set time. If the set time is changed to a time above the elapsed time, the time delay will continue until the elapsed time reaches the new set time. () If the time delay is set to the subtraction direction, time delay will continue until regardless of the new set time. ) When the set times at T and T are set to, the output becomes only while the start input is carried out. However, while the reset input is carried out, the output becomes.

24 LTH-W Digital Timers Operation mode PULSE : Pulse input INTEGRATI : Integrating input PULSE A -start/ operation t <T, t <T INTEGRATI A -start/ operation t <T, t <T Power supply ta+tb=t tc+td=t Power supply ta+tb=t tc+td=t te+tf=t tg+th=t PULSE A Output T T ta tb tc td t T t Output ta tb tc td te tf tg th t T t Delayed one shot Stop Stop Elapsed value cleared when power is turned on. Time limit start initiated when start input goes on; start input ignored if time limit interval is in progress. Elapsed value cleared when one operation has been completed. Elapsed value not cleared when power is turned on (power failure backup function). When power is turned back on, same status is maintained for output as that previous to power going off. Elapsed value cleared when one operation has been completed. -start flicker -start/repeating operation t <T, t <T PULSE B INTEGRATI B -start/repeating operation t <T, t <T Power supply ta+tb=t tc+td=t Power supply ta+tb=t tc+td=t te+tf=t tg+th=t B Output T T T T ta tb tc td t T t Output ta tb tc td te tf tg th T T t T t Stop Stop Elapsed value cleared when power is turned on. Time limit start initiated when start input goes on; start input ignored if time limit interval is in progress. Elapsed value not cleared when power is turned on (power failure backup function). When power is turned back on, same status is maintained for output as that previous to power going off. -start flicker -start/repeating operation t <T, t <T -start/repeating operation t <T, t <T Power supply ta+tb=t tc+td=t Power supply ta+tb=t tc+td=t te+tf=t tg+th=t C Output Stop T T T T ta tb tc td t T t Output Stop ta tb tc td te tf tg th T T t T t Elapsed value cleared when power is turned on. Time limit start initiated when start input goes on; start input ignored if time limit interval is in progress. Elapsed value not cleared when power is turned on (power failure backup function). When power is turned back on, same status is maintained for output as that previous to power going off. Remarks and notes The pulse input mode starts the operation by starting the start input. When using the unit by starting it with the power on, shortcircuit the start terminal (-pin: to, -pin: to and screw terminal: to ). The integrating input mode is operated by the integrated time of the start input. In other word, the timer operates only when the start input is performed. When the elapsed value is cleared by the reset input, the output is reset. When using the unit by starting it with the power on, shortcircuit the start terminal (-pin: to, -pin: to and screw terminal: to ). Each signal input such as start, reset, stop and lock inputs is applied by short-circuiting its input terminal and common terminal (-pin type: terminal, -pin type: terminal and screw terminal: terminal ) respectively. The -pin type does not have a stop input or lock input.

25 LTH series cautions for use. Terminal wiring ) When wiring the terminals, refer to the terminal layout and wiring diagrams and be sure to perform the wiring properly without errors. ) When using the instrument with an flush mounting, the screw-down terminal type is recommended. For the pin type, use either the rear terminal block (AT) or the P cap (AD-RC) for the -pin type, and the rear terminal block (AT) or the P cap (AT- DP) for the -pin type. Avoid soldering directly to the round pins on the unit. When using the instrument with a front panel installation, use the DIN rail terminal block (AT-DFK) for the -pin type and the DIN rail terminal block (AT- DFK) for the -pin type. ) After turning the unit off, make sure that any resulting induced or residual is not applied to power supply terminals through (-pin type) through (-pin type) or and (screw terminal type). (If the power supply wire is wired parallel to the high wire or power wire, an induced may be generated between the power supply terminals.) ) Have the power supply pass through a switch or relay so that it is applied at one time. If the power supply is applied gradually, the counting may malfunction regardless of the settings, the power supply reset may not function, or other such unpredictable occurrence may result.. Input connections The power circuit has no transformer (power and input terminals are not insulated). When an input signal is fed to two or more timers at once, do not arrange the power circuit in an independent way. If the timer is powered on and off independently as shown in Fig. A, the timer s internal circuitry may get damaged.be careful never to allow such circuitry. (Figs. A, B and C show the circuitry for the -pin type.) (Fig. A) Input contact point or transistor Input terminal Input terminal Power supply If independent power circuitry must be used, keep the input contacts or transistors separate from each other, as shown in Fig. B. (Fig. B) Input contact point or transistor Input contact point or transistor When power circuitry is not independent, one input signal can be fed to two or more counters at once, as shown in Fig. C. (Fig. C) Input contact point or transistor. Input and output ) Signal input type () Contact point input Use highly reliable metal plated contacts. Since the contact point s bounce time leads directly to error in the timer operations, use contacts with as short a bounce time as possible. Also, select a minimum input signal width of ms. -pin type input input type Input terminal Input terminal Stop input Lock input -pin type Input terminal Input terminal Power supply Power supply () Non-contact point input Connect with an open collector. Use transistors whose characteristics satisfy the criteria given below. VCEO = V min. IC = ma min. ICBO = µa max. Also, use transistors with a residual of less than V when the transistor is on. -pin type -pin type input to V DC Q input type type Stop input Lock input -pin type * The short-circuit impedance should be less than k. [When the impedance is, the current coming from the start input and stop input terminals is approximately ma, and from the reset input and lock input terminals is approximately. ma.] Also, the open-circuit impedance should be more than k. * As shown in the diagram below, from a non-contact point circuit (proximity switches, photoelectric switches, etc.) with a power supply of between and V, the signal can be input without using an open collector transistor. In the case of the diagram below, when the non-contact point transistor Q switches from off to on (when the signal goes from high to low), the signal is input. input -pin type (The above example is for reset input) ) The input mode and output mode change depending on the DIP switch settings. Therefore, before making any connections, be sure to confirm the operation mode and operation conditions currently set. ) The LTH series use power supply without a transformer (power and input terminals are not insulated). In connecting various kinds of input signals, therefore, use a power transformer in which the primary side is separated from the ungrounded secondary side as shown in Fig. A, for the power supply for a sensor and other input devices so that shortcircuiting can be prevented. Digital Timers

26 LTH series cautions for use Digital Timers Once the wiring to be used is completely installed and prior to installing this timer, confirm that there is complete insulation between the wires connected to the power terminals ( each) and the wires connected to each input terminal. If the power and input lines are not insulated, a short-circuit may occur inside the timer and result in internal damage. In addition, when moving your equipment to a new installation location, confirm that there is no difference in environmental conditions as compared to the previous location. (Fig. A) Good example AC power supply As PNP output LTH timer { O I Load Load s power supply Note: With the -pin type, there is no diode between points and.. output or PNP (equal value) output. (The above example is -pin type) LTH timer Surge (peak value) AC type,v DC type V AC type,v Surge wave form [± (.x) µs uni-polar full wave ] Surge (%). Peak Time ( s) Insulation transformer Timer (Fig. B) Bad example AC power supply (+) ( ) ( ) Input device (e.g., sensor) Diode rating: IF (forward current): A VR (reverse ): V Load s power supply Inductive load. Conditions of usage ) Avoid locations subject to flammable or corrosive gases, excessive dust, oil, vibrations, or excessive shocks. ) Since the cover of the timer is made of polycarbonate resin, avoid contact with ) The input signal is applied by the shorting of each input terminal with the common terminal (terminal for -pin types, terminal for -pin types and terminal for screw terminal types). Never con- nect other terminals or s higher than V DC, because it may destroy the internal circuitry. ) Transistor output () Since the transistor output is insulated from the internal circuitry by a photocoupler, it can be used as an NPN As NPN output AC power supply Insulation transformer Timer Timer LTH timer (+) ( ) Single coil transformer (+) ( ) ( ) ( ) { O I Load Load s power supply Input device (e.g., sensor) Input device (e.g., sensor) Alternative current flow () Use the diode connected to the output transistor s collector for absorbing the reverse from induced loads. ) When wiring, use shielded wires or metallic wire tubes, and keep the wire lengths as short as possible. ) For the load of the controlled output, make sure that it is lower than the rated control capacity.. Operation of LTH digital timer ) Turning on and off the power supply while operating in A* (Power on delay ) or G (Totalizing On delay) will result in a timer error to be generated due to the characteristics of the internal circuitry. Therefore, use the start input or stop input. * Not related to the start input. ) When controlling the timer by turning on the power supply, use only A (Power on delay ) or A (Power on delay ). Use of other modes in this situation will result in timer errors. When using the other modes, control the timer with the start input or stop input.. Operation mode and time range setting The operation mode and time range can be set with the DIP switches on the side of the timer. Make the DIP switch settings before installing the timer on the panel. The operation mode of LTH-W series can be set with the keys and switches on the front of the timer. Noise Power supply terminals AC type DC type V AC type Input terminals,v,v V or use in environments containing methyl alcohol, benzene, thinners, and other organic solvents; and ammonia, caustic sodas, and other alkaline substances. ) If power supply surges exceed the values given below, the internal circuits may become damaged. Be sure to use surge absorbing element to prevent this from happening. ) Regarding external noise, the values below are considered the noise-resistant s. If s rise above these values, malfunctions or damage to the internal circuitry may result, so take the necessary precautions. Noise wave form (noise simulator) Rise time: ns

27 power supply power supply Leakage current R (Fig. A) (Fig. B) Pulse width: µs, ns Polarity: ± Cycle: cycles/second ) When connecting the operating power supply, make sure that no leakage current enters the timer. For example, when performing contact protection, if set up like that of fig. A, leaking current will C R C T T pass through C and R, enter the unit, and cause incorrect operation. The fig. B shows the correct setup. R T R Relay ) Long periods of continuous operation in the time-up completed condition (one month or more) will result in the weakening of the internal electrical components from the generated heat and, therefore, should be avoided. If you do plan to use the unit for such continuous operation, use in conjunction with a relay as shown in the circuit in the diagram below.. Acquisition of CE marking Please abide by the conditions below when using in applications that comply with EN-. ) Over category III, pollution level R T Timer R Receive output from contact at relay R ) This timer employs a power supply without a transformer, so the power and input signal terminals are not insulated. () When a sensor is connected to the input circuit, install double insulation on the sensor side. () In the case of contact input, use dualinsulated relays, etc. ) The load connected to the output contact should have basic insulation. This timer is protected with basic insulation and can be double-insulated to meet EN/IEC requirements by using basic insulation on the load. ) Please use a power supply that is protected by an overcurrent protection device which complies with the EN/IEC standard (example: V A fuse, etc.). ) You must use a terminal socket or socket for the installation. Do not touch the terminals or other parts of the timer when it is powered. When installing or un-installing, make sure that no is being applied to any of the terminals. ) Do not use this timer as a safety circuit. For example when using a timer in a heater circuit, etc., provide a protection circuit on the machine side. Digital Timers. Self-diagnosis function If a malfunction occurs, one of the following displays will appear. Display Contents Malfunctioning CPU. Malfunctioning memory. See note. Note: Includes the possibility that the EEPROM s life has expired. Output condition Restoration procedure Preset values after restoration Enter reset input, RESET key, or restart unit. The values at start-up before the CPU malfunction occurred.

28 QMH Digital Timers DIN Size Digital Timer QMH Possible to set and change the time with front digit switches easily during the power off. Furthermore single unit has Features a time range of.s to hrs!! S Type (with MODE switch) G Type RoHS Directive compatibility information Product types Product name S Type QMH digital timer G Type QMH digital timer Note: Time delay directional subtraction types are also available by order Part names Time delay direction Addition Possible to set and change the time and the time range even when the power is off. Features Furthermore Selectable different single unit time has ranges a time with range front of digit. switches. s to hrs. Possible to set and change the time and the time range even when the power is off. Selectable [QMH-S Type] different time ranges with front digit switches. Low Selectable It can price. select different the mode time with ranges MODE with switch. front digit switches. Low [QMH-S T.D. MODE: price. Type] Time delay C ( Form C) It INST. can MODE: select the Time mode delay with C MODE ( Form switch. C) T.D. MODE: Time Instantaneous delay C ( C Form ( Form C) C) INST. [QMH-G MODE: Type] Time delay C ( Form C) and stop Instantaneous signal input C enable ( Form to external C) control. Compliant [QMH-G Type] with UL/c-UL and CE. and stop signal input enable to external control. Compliant with UL/c-UL and CE. Time range mode Contact arrangement Part number.s/.s/s/.min/ min/.h/h/h ( time ranges) Power delay Power delay (with reset and stop terminals) T.D. mode: Time delay C INST. mode: Time delay C and Instantaneous C (Use MODE switch on front) Time delay C to V AC/DC QMHS-UC-V to V AC/DC QMHS-UC-V to V AC/DC QMHG-UC-V to V AC/DC QMHG-UC-V MODE switch (QMH-S type only) Set time display Time setting switch ( digits) MODE T.D. INST TIMER - S QMH-S Elapsed time display Time delay indicator (OP.LED) Time range switch Time range settings Time range switch. S... S S M M H H H time range.s to.s.s to.s s to s.min. to.min min. to min.h to.h h to h h to h. S... S S S S M M H H.. H Note that there are two settings with the same range.

29 Changing the time setting It is possible to use the up and down keys to change the time setting even during timer delay. However, attention should be paid to the following. ) When the time setting is shorter than the elapsed time, and timer delay is set in the plus direction, the time setting will return to after the timer delay reaches full-scale, timer delay will be performed up to the changed time setting, and time up will be reached. ) When timer delay is set in the minus direction, timer delay will be performed up to regardless of the time, even if the time setting is shorter than the elapsed time, and time up will be reached. Digital Timers Specifications Item Rating Time accuracy* Contact Rated operating Rated power consumption to V AC/DC to V AC/DC Type During time delay After time delay During time delay After time delay QMH-S to V AC/DC and to V AC/DC V DC, V DC: Max..W V AC, V AC: Max.. VA V DC, V DC: Max..W V AC, V AC: Max.. VA V DC, V DC: Max..W V AC, V AC: Max.. VA V DC, V DC: Max..W V AC, V AC: Max.. VA During time delay After time delay During time delay After time delay QMH-G V DC, V DC: Max..W V AC, V AC: Max.. VA V DC, V DC: Max..W V AC, V AC: Max.. VA V DC, V DC: Max..W V AC, V AC: Max.. VA V DC, V DC: Max..W V AC, V AC: Max.. VA Rated frequency / Hz common (at AC) Rated control capacity A, V AC (resistive load) Time range.s to h, Selection of range:.s/.s/s/.min/min/.h/h/h Operation mode Power delay Power delay (with reset and stop terminals) Min. input signal width ms ( and Stop inputs)* time fluctuation ±(.%+.s) in case of power on start Temperature error ±(.%+.s) in case of input reset start* : to % V Setting error Temperature: to + C + to F ( C F) Voltage error Stopped time:. sec to hour T.D. mode: Time delay C Contact arrangement INST. mode: Time delay C and Time delay C Instantaneous C (Use MODE switch on front) Contact material Silver alloy Mechanical (contact) Min. Life* Electrical (contact) Min. (at rated control vltage) Allowable operating range to % of rated operating Electrical Mechanical conditions Breakdown (Initial value) Insulation resistance (Initial value) Between live and dead metal parts, between input and output, between contact sets, between contacts Min. MΩ (at V DC megger) Between live and dead metal parts:, Vrms for min Between input and output:, Vrms for min Between contact sets:, Vrms for min Between contacts:, Vrms for min time Max..s Vibration Functional to Hz: cycle/min. single amplitude of. mm. inch ( min on axes) resistance Destructive to Hz: cycle/min. single amplitude of. mm. inch (h on axes) Shock Functional m/s ( times on axes) resistance Destructive m/s ( times on axes) Ambient temperature C to C + F to + F Ambient humidity Min. to % RH (non-condensing) Air pressure to hpa Mass (Weight) Approx. g. oz Approx. g. oz Others Available standards UL, c-ul, CE display LED (red), During time delay: blinking, After time delay: Notes:. Unspecified measuring conditions are rated operating (in case of DC type, ripple rate of % or less), ambient temp. C F, and stop time second.. start applies to QMH-G type.. Excluding switches. Note that if the QMH-G type is set to zero and a STOP signal is input, output will begin when the power is turned on.. The protective structure on the AQM is IP, and IP for the AQM.

30 QMH Digital Timers Applicable standard Safety standard EN- Pollution Degree /Over Category II EMC (EMI)EN-- Radiation interference electric field strength Noise terminal (EMS)EN-- Static discharge immunity RF electromagnetic field immunity EFT/B immunity EN Group ClassA EN Group ClassA EN-- EN-- EN-- kv contact kv air V/m AM modulation ( MHz to GHz) V/m pulse modulation ( MHz to MHz) kv (power supply line) Dimensions S Type MODE T.D. INST TIMER - S QMH-S Panel cut-out dimensions Surge immunity Conductivity noise immunity Power frequency magnetic field immunity Voltage dip/instantaneous stop/voltage fluctuation immunity G Type TIMER - - S + + QMH-G..... Panel Mounting Diagram (.) (.) EN-- kv (power line) EN-- V/m AM modulation (. MHz to MHz) EN-- A/m ( Hz) EN-- ms, % (rated ) ms, % (rated ), ms, % (rated ), ms, % (rated ).. Mounting frame (AQM: supplied) (AT-DA can also be used for mounting frame. Sold separately) Mounting screw (supplied with mounting frame).. T.D. Terminal layouts and Wiring diagrams QMH-S Type MODE MODE INST. NC NC NO NO COM COM TD mode: Time delay C INST mode: Time delay C and Instantaneous C *Use MODE switch on front Notes:. signs in parentheses ( ) indicate the polarity of the DC type.. is a time delay contact. (units: mm inch) Tolerance: ±. ± A Dimensions A when n products are installed continuously: A = ( n. ) A = (. n. ) Panel (Thickness: to mm. to. inch) is an instantaneous contact. QMH-G Type STOP NC RESET NO COM COM

31 Operation mode QMH-S Type ) T.D. mode Power supply Time delay contact (N.O. contact) - or - OP.LED ) INST. mode Power supply Time delay contact (N.O. contact) - Instantaneous contact (N.O. contact) - OP.LED T T QMH-G Type Power supply - Stop - Time delay contact (N.O. contact) - OP.LED T: Setting time t+t = T ta<t Lit Blinking Blinking slowly * Set the reset inputs to and stop inputs to to ms or higher. * When shorting a signal, please set the inter-terminal resistance to kω or les and the inter-terminal residual to V or less. When releasing, please set the inter-terminal resistance to kω or greater. ta T t t Digital Timers Precautions in using the QMH. Avoid locations subject to flammable or corrosive gases, excessive dust, oil, vibrations, or excessive shocks.. Since the main-unit is made of polycarbonate resin, avoid contact with or use in environments containing methyl alcohol, benzene, thinners, and other organic solvents; and ammonia, caustic sodas, and other alkaline substances.. Power supply superimposed surge protector Although a surge protector will withstand standard-waveform with the values in the next table, anything above this will destroy the internal circuit. You should therefore use a surge absorber. to V AC/DC to V AC/DC, V, V Surge waveform [±(. ) µs uni-polar full wave ] Compliance with the CE marking When using in applications to which EN-/IEC- applies, abide by the following conditions. ) Ambient conditions Over category II, pollution level Indoor use Acceptable temperature and humidity range: to + C, to %RH (with no condensation at C) Under m elevation. In order to maintain the characteristics, do not remove the timer case.. When installing the panel, use the supplied AQM main-unit mounting frame. Note that the ATA is also available for sale separately.. If you change the operating, be sure not to allow leak current into the timer. ) Use the unit in a location that matches the following conditions. There is minimal dust and no corrosive gas. There is no combustible or explosive gas. There is no mechanical vibration or impacts. There is no exposure to direct sunlight. Located away from large-volume electromagnetic switches and power lines with large electrical currents.. Avoid leaving the unit powered continuously. Leaving the unit powered up with output set to continuously for a long period of tim (about month or more) will wear ou the electronic components. If you wi be keeping it powered continuously, combine with a relay to create the circuit shown below: R R ) Connect a breaker that conforms to EN- or EN- to the voltag input section. ) Applied should be protected with an overcurrent protection device (example: T A, V AC time lag fuse that conforms to the EN/IEC standards T T R

32 SDXM-A/M Multi-Range Analog Timer SDXM-A/M Analog Timers RoHS Directive compatibility information UL File No.: E C-UL File No.: E FEATURES Multiple functions built in The operation mode and time range can be switched by using the MODE and RANGE switches on the front panel. Part number consolidation ) The lineup consists of easy-tochoose models. ) An operation mode fixed type (SDXM-A) and -operation mode switching type (SDXM-M) are available. Cadmium-free contacts used To eliminate environmentally harmful chemical substances, relays with cadmium-free contacts are used. Economically priced ) Prices set to lower costs. ) Further cost reduction when used wi HJ Relay terminal socket. CE marking supported UL and C-UL approved. Product Product Types types. SDXM-A multi-range timer No MODE switch, Operation mode (fixed): Power -delay V DC V DC V AC to V AC to V AC to V AC Time range Timed-out Form C Timed-out Form C Part number Part number. s to min SDXM-ACM-DCV SDXM-ACM-DCV. s to min SDXM-ACM-DCV SDXM-ACM-DCV. s to min SDXM-ACM-DCV SDXM-ACM-DCV. min to hr SDXM-ACH-DCV SDXM-ACH-DCV. s to min SDXM-ACM-DCV SDXM-ACM-DCV. s to min SDXM-ACM-DCV SDXM-ACM-DCV. s to min SDXM-ACM-DCV SDXM-ACM-DCV. min to hr SDXM-ACH-DCV SDXM-ACH-DCV. s to min SDXM-ACM-ACV SDXM-ACM-ACV. s to min SDXM-ACM-ACV SDXM-ACM-ACV. s to min SDXM-ACM-ACV SDXM-ACM-ACV. min to hr SDXM-ACH-ACV SDXM-ACH-ACV. s to min SDXM-ACM-ACV SDXM-ACM-ACV. s to min SDXM-ACM-ACV SDXM-ACM-ACV. s to min SDXM-ACM-ACV SDXM-ACM-ACV. min to hr SDXM-ACH-ACV SDXM-ACH-ACV. s to min SDXM-ACM-ACV SDXM-ACM-ACV. s to min SDXM-ACM-ACV SDXM-ACM-ACV. s to min SDXM-ACM-ACV SDXM-ACM-ACV. min to hr SDXM-ACH-ACV SDXM-ACH-ACV. s to min SDXM-ACM-ACV SDXM-ACM-ACV. s to min SDXM-ACM-ACV SDXM-ACM-ACV. s to min SDXM-ACM-ACV SDXM-ACM-ACV. min to hr SDXM-ACH-ACV SDXM-ACH-ACV

33 . SDXM-M multi-range timer With MODE switch, Operation mode (switchable): Power -delay, Power Flicker start, Power Flicker start, Power One-shot V DC V DC V AC to V AC to V AC to V AC Part names Time range Timed-out Form C Pa rt number Timed-out Form C Pa rt number. s to min SDXM-MCM-DCV SDXM-MCM-DCV. s to min SDXM-MCM-DCV SDXM-MCM-DCV. s to min SDXM-MCM-DCV SDXM-MCM-DCV. min to hr SDXM-MCH-DCV SDXM-MCH-DCV. s to min SDXM-MCM-DCV SDXM-MCM-DCV. s to min SDXM-MCM-DCV SDXM-MCM-DCV. s to min SDXM-MCM-DCV SDXM-MCM-DCV. min to hr SDXM-MCH-DCV SDXM-MCH-DCV. s to min SDXM-MCM-ACV SDXM-MCM-ACV. s to min SDXM-MCM-ACV SDXM-MCM-ACV. s to min SDXM-MCM-ACV SDXM-MCM-ACV. min to hr SDXM-MCH-ACV SDXM-MCH-ACV. s to min SDXM-MCM-ACV SDXM-MCM-ACV. s to min SDXM-MCM-ACV SDXM-MCM-ACV. s to min SDXM-MCM-ACV SDXM-MCM-ACV. min to hr SDXM-MCH-ACV SDXM-MCH-ACV. s to min SDXM-MCM-ACV SDXM-MCM-ACV. s to min SDXM-MCM-ACV SDXM-MCM-ACV. s to min SDXM-MCM-ACV SDXM-MCM-ACV. min to hr SDXM-MCH-ACV SDXM-MCH-ACV. s to min SDXM-MCM-ACV SDXM-MCM-ACV. s to min SDXM-MCM-ACV SDXM-MCM-ACV. s to min SDXM-MCM-ACV SDXM-MCM-ACV. min to hr SDXM-MCH-ACV SDXM-MCH-ACV Analog Timers Pow er LED (green) Setting hand Control time scale SDXM-A Time range s witch Operation LED (orange) Setting dial Operation mode switch SDXM-M Time range s witch [RANGE] Time range switch ( different time ranges can be switched.) M type: s/ s/ min/ min M type: s/ s/ min/ min M type: s/ s/ min/ min H type: min/ min/ hr/ hr [MODE] Operation mode switch ( different operation modes can be switched.) Po w er -delay Po w er Flicker start Po w er Flicker start Po w er One-shot Operation mode and time range setting Operation mode Power -delay Power Flicker start Power Flicker start Power One-shot Operation mode switch s (m) X Time range switch m (h) X The time setting can be switched among ranges each for types for an interval between. seconds and hours. Notes:. The product is factory shipped with all settings on the side (left).. Do not operate the switches with a sharp-edged object such as a knife b lade.. The power must be turned off when setting the time range or operation mode. the switches with the power on is a cause of breakdown and malfunction.. Use a force of under N to operate the DIP switches when setting the time r ange and operation mode.

34 SDXM-A/M Operation Operation mode Mode. SDXM-A multi-range timer Power -delay operation When power is turned on, the output contact operates after the set time. The output contact remains on until the power is turned off. Time chart Analog Timers Power supply Timed-out contact (NO) UP (operation) LED (power) LED T T: Setting time (orange) (green). SDXM-M multi-range timer Power -delay operation [MODE] switch :, switch : When power is turned on, the output contact operates after the set time. The output contact remains on until the power is turned off. Power Flicker start operation [MODE] switch :, switch : When the power is turned on, the output contacts repeatedly operate at the set time. The output contact begins from the off state. Time chart Power supply Timed-out contact (NO) UP (operation) LED (power) LED T T: Setting time (orange) (green) Time chart Power supply Timed-out contact (NO) UP (operation) LED (power) LED T T T T T T t T: Setting time (orange) (green) t < T Power Flicker start operation [MODE] switch :, switch : When power is turned on, the output contact operates repeatedly at the set time. The output contact outputs at the same time power turns on. Power One-shot operation [MODE] switch :, switch : When power is turned on, the output contact performs the on operation at the same time power turns on, only for the set time. Time chart Power supply Timed-out contact (NO) UP (operation) LED (power) LED T T T T T T t (orange) Time range setting Time Range Setting T: Setting time (green) t < T Time chart Power supply Timed-out contact (NO) UP (operation) LED (power) LED T (orange) T: Setting time Type Time scale Time unit Min. scale Max. scale Setting range M type s m.. to s. to s. to m. to m SDXM-A M type s m.. to s to s. to m to m X X M type s m.. to s to s. to m to m H type m h.. to m. to m. to h. to h M type s m.. to s. to s. to m. to m SDXM-M M type s m.. to s to s. to m to m X X M type s m.. to s to s. to m to m H type m h.. to m. to m. to h. to h Note: The time setting range is the combination of the time scale (X or X) on the dial and the time unit (s, m, or h). Example: When dial reads, time scale is X and time units is seconds, then it is second. Ordering information Ordering Information (green) Ex. SDXM- A C M DCV Operation mode A M Control output arrangement C: Timed-out Form C C: Timed-out Form C * For other operating types, please consult us. Time range M:. s to min M:. s to min M:. s to min H:. min to hr * DCV: V DC DCV: V DC ACV: V AC ACV: to V AC ACV: to V AC ACV: to V AC

35 Specifications Rating Time accuracy* Contact Life Mechanical Electrical conditions Item Specifications Rated operating VAC to VAC to VAC to VAC VDC VDC Rated frequency /Hz common Rated power consumption Max. VA (at VAC) Max. VA (at VAC) Max. VA (at VAC) Max. VA (at VAC) Max. W (at VDC) Max. W (at VDC) During time delay Approx. ma Approx. ma Approx. ma Approx. ma Approx. ma Approx. ma After time delay Approx. ma Approx. ma Approx. ma Approx. ma Approx. ma Approx. ma Timed -out Form C: A V AC (resistive load) Rated control capacity Timed -out Form C: A V AC (resistive load) SDXM-A Power on delay operation fixed (Power display: /green; Operation display (when output is on): UP/orange) Operation mode SDXM-M switchable operations: Power -delay/power Flicker start/power Flicker start/power One-shot (Power display: /green; Operation display (when output is on): UP/orange) time fluctuation & Power off time change error Max. ± %, (power off time change at the range of. s to h), s range: Max. ± % and ms* Voltage error Max. ± % (at the operating changes between to +%), s range: Max. ± % and ms* Temperature error Max. ±% (at C ambient temp. at the range of to + C + to + F) Setting error Max. ±%, s range: Max. ±% and ms Contact arrangement Timed-out Form C, Timed-out Form C Contact resistance (Initial value) Max. mω (at A, V DC) Timed-out Form C type: Silver alloy, Au plating Contact material Timed-out Form C type: Silver alloy, Au plating Mechanical (constant) Min. Electrical (constant) (at rated control capacity) Vibration Functional to Hz: cycle/min double amplitude of.mm (min on axes) resistance Destructive to Hz: cycle/min double amplitude of.mm (h on axes) Shock Functional Min. m/s ( times on axes) resistance Destructive Min. m/s ( times on axes) Allowable operating range to % of rated operating time Max..s Insulation resistance (Initial value) Between live and dead metal parts, between input and output, between contact sets, between contacts Min. MΩ (at V DC megger) Between live and dead metal parts:, Vrms for min Breakdown (Initial value) Between input and output:, Vrms for min Between contact sets:, Vrms for min Between contacts:, Vrms for min Max. temperature rise C F Ambient temperature to C + to F Ambient humidity to % RH (non-condensing) Air pressure to hpa Ripple rate DC type only, transmission wave rectification (ripple rate: approx. %)* Mass (Weight) Approx. g Protective construction IEC standard: IP (IP when using ADX protective cover) Notes: *. Unspecified measuring conditions are rated operating (in case of DC type, ripple rate of % or less), ambient temp. C F, and power off time second. *. Power one-shot s range: +% and ms *. When using with a transmission wave rectification, vibration resistance and shock resistance properties worsen compared to when using a stabilized power supply. Analog Timers

36 SDXM-A/M Dimensions mm inch. SDXM-A Control time scale UP LED (orange) Terminal layouts and Wiring diagram Timed-out Form C type Analog Timers Time range switch LED (green) RANGE s m X X UP SDXM Timed-out Form C type.... Nameplate.... For Form C type Tolerance: ±. ±. * For the DC operating type, terminal is + and terminal is. SDXM-M Control time scale UP LED (orange) Terminal layouts and wiring diagram Timed-out Form C type Time range switch Operation mode switch LED (green) MODE RANGE s m X X UP.. SDXM.... Timed-out Form C type.... Nameplate.... For Form C type Applicable standard Applicable Standard Safety standard EMC EN- (EMI)EN-- Radiation interference electric field strength Noise terminal (EMS)EN-- Static discharge immunity RF electromagnetic field immunity EFT/B immunity.. Surge immunity Conductivity noise immunity Power frequency magnetic field immunity Voltage dip/instantaneous stop/voltage fluctuation immunity Tolerance: ±. ±. * For the DC operating type, terminal is + and terminal is Pollution Degree /Over Category II ( Form C type); Pollution Degree /Over Category II ( Form C type) EN Group ClassA EN Group ClassA EN-- kv contact kv air EN-- V/m AM modulation ( MHz to GHz) V/m pulse modulation ( MHz to MHz) EN-- kv (power supply line) kv (signal line) EN-- kv (power line) EN-- V/m AM modulation (. MHz to MHz) EN-- A/m ( Hz) EN-- ms, % (rated ) ms, % (rated ), ms, % (rated ), ms, % (rated )

37 Precautions during usage. periods After unscheduled operations have been completed, or if the timer operation power supply has been turned off at any time during operation, a reset period of at least. seconds should be allowed before resuming operation.. External surge protection External surge protection may be required if the following values are exceeded. Otherwise, the internal circuit will be damaged. The typical surge absorption elements include a varistor, a capacitor, and a diode. If a surge absorption element is used, use an oscilloscope to see whether or not the foreign surge exceeding the specified value appears. Single-pole, full-wave for surge waveform [±(. ) µs] Crest value (%) Crest value ) If terminals are to be soldered directly, please hand solder with a to W solder iron with a tip temperature of C for no more than seconds. Automatic soldering should be avoided. ) A flux-tight construction is not used with this timer, so be careful that flux or cleaning fluid does not get inside the case. ) To assure that characteristics are maintained, do not remove the case.. Long Continuous Current Flow Long continuous current flow through the timer cause generation of heat internally, which degrade the electronic parts. Use the timer in combination with a relay and avoid long continuous current flow through the timer. (Refer to the circuit diagram below when using a safety circuit for continuous operation.) R R T T R ) Do not use this timer as a safety circuit. For example when using a timer in a heater circuit, etc., provide a protection circuit on the machine side.. Others ) When setting the time, the dial should be kept within the range indicated on the dial face. The marking on the dial indicates the minimum time during which the control time can be varied (it does not indicate seconds). ) Do not rotate the knob past the stopper. ) Turn off the power before changing the DIP switch settings. Changing the DIP switch with the power on can cause breakdown. ) When connecting the operating power supply, make sure that no leakage current enters the timer. For example, when performing contact protection, if set up like that of fig. A, leaking current will pass through C and R, enter the timer, and cause incorrect operation. The fig. B shows the correct setup. Analog Timers. Time (µs) Operation Surge to V AC, to V AC,V V DC, V DC,V Since the main body cover and knob are made of polycarbonate resin, prevent contact with organic solvents such as methyl alcohol, benzine and thinner, or strong alkali materials such as ammonia and caustic soda.. Terminal wiring Make sure that terminals are wired carefully and correctly, referring to the terminal layout and wiring diagrams. Particularly, since the DC type has polarity, do not operate it with reverse polarity.. Assembly ) When installing, use a terminal socket or socket intended for the HC/HJ relay. For adjacent installations, be sure to first verify the installation conditions of the terminal sockets or sockets you will be using. ) Use the separately-sold dedicated socket leaf holding clip to secure terminal sockets and sockets to the timer unit. The conditions of use for dedicated socket leaf holding clip will differ depending on the terminal socket or socket you will be using. Therefore, please test under actual conditions before putting into operation.. Phase synchronization using AC load If the turning on of the timer output relay is synchronized to the AC power supply phase, there may be times when the service life is shortened because of electrical factors, or when a locking phenomenon (defective relay return) occurs because of contact point welding or a shift in the contact relay. Check the operation using the actual timer.. Acquisition of CE marking Please abide by the conditions below when using in applications that comply with EN-. ) Over category II, pollution level ( Form C type) Over category II, pollution level ( Form C type) ) The load connected to the output contact should have basic insulation. This timer is protected with basic insulation and can be double-insulated to meet EN/IEC requirements by using basic insulation on the load. ) Please use a power supply that is protected by an overcurrent protection device which complies with the EN/IEC standard (example: V A fuse, etc.). ) You must use a terminal socket or socket for the installation. Do not touch the terminals or other parts of the timer when it is powered. When installing or uninstalling, make sure that no is being applied to any of the terminals. power supply power supply When a contact switch having an operation indicating lamp (lamp equipped limit switch, etc.) is used to apply power to the timer, a resistor having a value equal to or greater than the value below shall be connected in series with the lamp. to V AC operating type: Min. kω to V AC operating type: Min. kω Limit switch Resistor Neon lamp Leakage current R T (Fig. A) (Fig. B) C R C T WRG CORRECT T Example of limit switches with lamp. VL with lamp, Vertical type with lamp, ML with lamp.

38 PMH-A/S/M Analog Timers. mm inch. Pin type Product types Type PMH-A PMH-S PMH-M.. Operation mode Screw terminal type operation modes Pulse -delay Pulse Flicker Pulse -flicker Differential /-delay () () Signal -delay Pulse One-shot Pulse One-cycle Power -delay operation modes (With instantaneous contact) Power -delay Power Flicker Power -flicker Power One-shot Power One-cycle Features -V AC free- input, -V DC type available Short body.mm. inch (screw terminal type) Front panel of IP type is protected against water-splash and dust Built-in s: type is used for easy wiring and reducing additional cost for accessories. setting instantaneous output operation Multiple time ranges s to h (Max.) different operation modes: (PMH-A) Compliant with UL/CSA, CE and LLOYD Contact arrangement Relay Timed-out Form C Relay Timed-out Form C Relay Timed-out Form C Instantaneous Form C DIN SIZE MULTI-RANGE ANALOG TIMER UL File No.: E CSA File No.: LR Time range selectable ranges s to h Protective construction IP IP IP IP IP IP Rated operating to V AC to V DC V AC/DC V DC to V AC to V DC V AC/DC V DC to V AC to V DC V AC/DC V DC to V AC to V DC V AC/DC V DC to V AC to V DC V AC/DC V DC to V AC to V DC V AC/DC V DC PMH-A PMH-S PMH-M Terminal type pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins Part number PMHA-H-ACVW PMHA-H-ACVSW PMHA-H-DCVW PMHA-H-DCVSW PMHA-H-VW PMHA-H-VSW PMHA-H-DCVW PMHA-H-DCVSW PMHA-H-ACV PMHA-H-ACVS PMHA-H-DCV PMHA-H-DCVS PMHA-H-V PMHA-H-VS PMHA-H-DCV PMHA-H-DCVS PMHS-H-ACVW PMHS-H-ACVSW PMHS-H-DCVW PMHS-H-DCVSW PMHS-H-VW PMHS-H-VSW PMHS-H-DCVW PMHS-H-DCVSW PMHS-H-ACV PMHS-H-ACVS PMHS-H-DCV PMHS-H-DCVS PMHS-H-V PMHS-H-VS PMHS-H-DCV PMHS-H-DCVS PMHM-H-ACVW PMHM-H-ACVSW PMHM-H-DCVW PMHM-H-DCVSW PMHM-H-VW PMHM-H-VSW PMHM-H-DCVW PMHM-H-DCVSW PMHM-H-ACV PMHM-H-ACVS PMHM-H-DCV PMHM-H-DCVS PMHM-H-V PMHM-H-VS PMHM-H-DCV PMHM-H-DCVS If you use this timer under harsh environment, please order above sealed type (IP type). IP type Protection dust and water jet splay on the front face.

39 Time range Time unit Scale sec min hrs h.s to s. min to min.h to h.h to h Control.s to s. min to min.h to h h to h time range.s to s. min to min.h to h h to h s to s min to min h to h h to h Note: setting is for instantaneous output operation. Specifications Item Rating Time accuracy Note:) Contact Life Electrical function Mechanical function condition Others Rated operating Rated frequency Rated power consumption Rated control capacity mode Time range time fluctuation Setting error Voltage error Temperature error Contact arrangement Type Contact resistance (Initial value) Contact material Mechanical (contact) Electrical (contact) Allowable operating range Insulation resistance (Initial value) Breakdown (Initial value) Min. power off time Max. temperature rise Functional Vibration resistance Destructive Functional Shock resistance Destructive Ambient temperature Ambient humidity Atmospheric pressure Ripple factor (DC type) Protective construction Weight PMH-A Pulse -delay Pulse Flicker Pulse -Flicker Differential /-delay () () Signal -delay Pulse One-shot Pulse One-cycle PMH-S to V AC, to V DC, V DC, V AC/DC /Hz common (AC operating type) Approx. VA ( to V AC) Approx..VA (V AC) Approx..W (V DC, V DC, to V DC) A V AC (resistive load) Power -delay PMH-A/PMH-S/PMH-M All types of PMH timer have multi-time range. time ranges are selectable. s to h (Max. range) is controlled. PMH-M Power -delay Power Flicker Power -flicker Power One-shot Power One-cycle (with instantaneous contact) s to h (Max.) time ranges switchable ±.% (power off time change at the range of.s to h) ±% (Full-scale value) ±.% (at the operating changes between to %) ±% (at C ambient temp. at the range of to + C + to + F) Timed-out Form C Timed-out Form C Instantaneous Form C Max. mω (at A V DC) Silver alloy Au flash on Silver alloy (at rated control capacity) to % of rated operating (at C coil temp.) Between live and dead metal parts Between input and output Min. MΩ (At V DC) Between contacts of different poles Between contacts of same pole,vrms for min Between live and dead metal parts,vrms for min Between input and output,vrms for min Between contacts of different poles,vrms for min Between contacts of same pole ms C F C F to Hz: cycle/min double amplitude of.mm (min on axes) to Hz: cycle/min double amplitude of.mm (h on axes) Min. m/s ( times on axes) Min. m/s ( times on axes) to + C + to + F to %RH (at C F, non-condensing) to,hpa % IP on front panel (using rubber gasket ATC) <only for IP type> g. oz (Pin type) g. oz ( type) Note: ) Unless otherwise specified, the measurement conditions at the maximum scale time standard are specified to be the rated operating (within % ripple factor for DC), C F ambient temperature, and s power off time. ) For the s range, the tolerance for each specification becomes ±ms. Analog Timers

40 PMH-A/S/M Analog Timers Terminal layouts and wiring diagrams PMH-A Pin type Timed-out Form C input input Stop input N.C. N.O. ( ) (+) N.C. N.O. PMH-M Pin type Timed-out Form C Instantaneous Form C N.O. ( ) (+) type Timed-out Form C N.C. N.O. (+) ( ) Stop input N.C. N.O. type Timed-out Form C Instantaneous Form C input input N.C. N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. (+) ( ) PMH-S Pin type Timed-out Form C N.O. N.C. ( ) (+) ) DC Type Type PMH-A PMH-S PMH-M ) Contact N.C. N.O. Timed-out contact type Timed-out Form C N.C. N.O. Pin Connect the terminal to negative ( ), and the terminal to positive (+). Connect the terminal to Connect the terminal to negative ( ), and the terminal to positive (+). Instantaneous contact N.C. N.O. negative ( ), and the terminal to positive (+). ) Voltage should not be applied to the various inputs (reset, start, and stop) of the PMH-A multi-range timer. These inputs should be input without. (+) ( ) Part names PMH-S PMH-A PMH-M Power indicator LED Time indicator window Time unit indicator Output indicator LED Hand Set dial Operation mode indicator Operation mode selector Selectable from operation modes : Power -delay FL : Power flicker FO : Power -flicker OS : Power One-shot OC : Power One-cycle Time range selector time settings selectable ( s to h) s s s s min min min min h h h h h h h h Instantaneous output area When the hand is in this area, instantaneous operation starts. Operation mode selector Selectable from operation modes : Pulse -delay FL : Pulse Flicker FO : Pulse -flicker OF : Differential /-delay () SF : Signal -delay OS : Pulse One-shot OF : Differential /-delay () OC : Pulse One-cycle

41 Dimensions PMH- type (Flush mount) Pin type (Flush mount/surface mount) mm inch Tolerance: ±. ± dia.. dia.... dia.. dia... Analog Timers Panel mount dimensions (with mounting frame) type Pin type Rubber gasket ATC (attached) Panel Mounting frame AT-DA (attached) Rubber gasket ATC Panel Mounting frame AT-DA (Sold separately) (-pin). (-pin) Rear terminal socket AT (-pin: sold separately) AT (-pin: sold separately) Surface mount dimensions Pin type Din rail socket AT-DFK (-pin: sold separately) AT-DFK (-pin: sold separately) Mounting rail AT-DLA Panel cutout dimensions Standard cutout dimensions are shown below. Use mounting frame (AT-DA) and rubber gasket (ATC) Min.. Adjacent mounting A A = ( n.) +. A = (. n.) +.. (-pin).. (-pin). Min.. Note). The proper thickness of mounting panel is between to mm.. Adjacent mount is less water-resistant.

42 PMH-A/S/M Analog Timers Operation mode PMH-A Operation type Explanation Time chart Pulse -delay If using a time-limit start when the power is turned on, and a reset when the power is turned off, pins to (screw-tightening pins and should be shorted ahead of time. Turn the operation mode selector switch to the position. If pins to (screw-tightening pins and ) are shorted (the start input is turned on) with the power supply on, the output will go on after the set time has elapsed. If the power supply is turned off, or pins to (screw-tightening pins to ) are shorted (the reset input is turned on), a reset is carried out. Note) During time-limited operation, the time-limited operation is stopped while the pins to (screw-tightening pins to ) are being shorted (the stop input is on). When the pins are released, time-limited operation resumes. Power supply Stop Time out (N.O. contact) OP. LED POWER LED Note: LED lighting LED flickering T: Setting time t, t, ta, tb<t t+t=t T t t LED lighting or No LED lighting Pulse Flicker FL Pulse -flicker FO If using a time-limit start when the power is turned on, and a reset when the power is turned off, pins to (screw-tightening pins and ) should be shorted ahead of time. Turn the operation mode selector switch to the FL position. When pins to (screw-tightening pins and ) are shorted (the start input is turned on) with the power supply on, the limited time interval begins, and the output goes on after the set time has elapsed. After the output has gone on, it goes off when the set time has elapsed, and this process is subsequently repeated. If the power supply is turned off, or pins to (screw-tightening pins to ) are shorted (the reset input is turned on), a reset is carried out. Note) During time-limited operation, the time-limited operation is stopped while the pins to (screw-tightening pins to ) are being shorted (the stop input is on). When the pins are released, time-limited operation resumes. If using a time-limit start when the power is turned on, and a reset when the power is turned off, pins to (screw-tightening pins and ) should be shorted ahead of time. Turn the operation mode selector switch to the FO position. When pins to (screw-tightening pins and ) are shorted (the start input is turned on) with the power supply on, the output goes on, and after the set time has elapsed, it goes off. This process is subsequently repeated. If the power supply is turned off, or pins to (screw-tightening pins to ) are shorted (the reset input is turned on), a reset is carried out. Note) During time-limited operation, the time-limited operation is stopped while the pins to (screw-tightening pins to ) are being shorted (the stop input is on). When the pins are released, time-limited operation resumes. Power supply Stop Time out (N.O. contact) OP. LED POWER LED Power supply Note: Stop Time out (N.O. contact) OP. LED POWER LED T T t ta t tb LED lighting or No LED lighting T T ta t t T tb Differential /-delay () OF Signal -delay SF Turn the operation mode selector switch to the OF position. When pins to (screw-tightening pins and ) are shorted (the start input is turned on) with the power supply on, the output goes on, and after the set time has elapsed, it goes off. Also, when pins to are released (the start input goes off), the output goes on, and after the set time has elapsed, it goes off. If the status of pins to (screw-tightening pins and ) changes during the time-limit interval (the start input goes from on to off, or from off to on), the time-limit interval is restarted from the point at which the change took place. If the power supply is turned off, or pins to (screw-tightening pins to ) are shorted (the reset input is turned on), a reset is carried out. Note) During time-limited operation, the time-limited operation is stopped while the pins to (screw-tightening pins to ) are being shorted (the stop input is on). When the pins are released, time-limited operation resumes. Turn the operation mode selector switch to the SF position. When pins to (screw-tightening pins and ) are shorted (the start input is turned on) with the power supply on, the output goes on, and when pins to (screw-tightening pins and ) are released (the start input is turned off), the time limit interval begins. After the set time has elapsed, the output goes off. If start input is entered at any point during the time limit interval, the time limit interval is reset. Note) During time-limited operation, the time-limited operation is stopped while the pins to (screw-tightening pins to ) are being shorted (the stop input is on). When the pins are released, time-limited operation resumes. Power supply Stop t T t ta tb Time out (N.O. contact) OP. LED Restart POWER LED Note: LED lighting or No LED lighting Power supply Stop T ta tb Time out (N.O. contact) OP. LED POWER LED Note: Note: LED lighting or No LED lighting Keep.s or more for power off time. Keep.s or more for start, stop, reset input time.

43 Operation type Explanation Time chart Pulse One-shot OS If using a time-limit start when the power is turned on, and a reset when the power is turned off, pins to (screw-tightening pins and ) should be shorted ahead of time. Turn the operation mode selector switch to the OS position. When pins to (screw-tightening pins and ) are shorted (the start input is turned on) with the power supply on, the output goes on for the set time limit interval. If the power supply is turned off, or pins to (screw-tightening pins to ) are shorted (the reset input is turned on), a reset is carried out. Note) During time-limited operation, the time-limited operation is stopped while the pins to (screw-tightening pins to ) are being shorted (the stop input is on). When the pins are released, time-limited operation resumes. Power supply Stop Time out (N.O. contact) OP. LED POWER LED T T t t ta Analog Timers Note: LED lighting or No LED lighting Differential /-delay () OF Turn the operation mode selector switch to the OF position. When pins to (screw-tightening pins and ) are shorted (the start input is turned on) with the power supply on, the time limit interval begins, and after the set time interval has elapsed, the output goes on. Also, when pins to are released (the start input goes off), the time limit interval begins, and after it has elapsed, the output goes off. If the status of pins to (screw-tightening pins and ) changes during the time-limit interval (the start input goes from on to off, or from off to on), the time limit interval is restarted from the point at which the change took place. If the power supply is turned off, or pins to (screw-tightening pins to ) are shorted (the reset input is turned on), a reset is carried out. Note) During time-limited operation, the time-limited operation is stopped while the pins to (screw-tightening pins to ) are being shorted (the stop input is on). When the pins are released, time-limited operation resumes. Power supply Stop Time out (N.O. contact) OP. LED POWER LED Note: T t t ta tb Restart LED lighting or No LED lighting Pulse One-cycle OC If using a time-limit start when the power is turned on, and a reset when the power is turned off, pins to (screw-tightening pins and ) should be shorted ahead of time. Turn the operation mode selector switch to the OC position. When pins to (screw-tightening pins and ) are shorted (the start input is turned on) with the power supply on, the output goes on after the set time limit interval has elapsed. After it has gone on, it goes off after one pulse (approximately. seconds). If the power supply is turned off, or pins to (screw-tightening pins to ) are shorted (the reset input is turned on), a reset is carried out. Note) During time-limited operation, the time-limited operation is stopped while the pins to (screw-tightening pins to ) are being shorted (the stop input is on). When the pins are released, time-limited operation resumes. Note: Keep.s or more for power off time. Keep.s or more for start, stop, reset input time. PMH-S Operation type Explanation Time chart Power -delay PMH-M Note: Time limit contact relay. When the power supply is turned on, the output goes on after the set time interval has elapsed. When the power supply is turned off, a reset is carried out. Operation type Explanation Time chart Power -delay Power Flicker FL Power -flicker FO Power One-shot OS Power One-cycle OC Turn the operation mode selector switch to display the various operations. When the power supply is turned on, the time limit interval begins, and operation is carried out. When the power supply is turned off, a reset is carried out. Keep.s or more for power off time. PMH-M timers do not have each input which is start, reset and stop. Power supply Stop Time out (N.O. contact) OP. LED Power supply POWER LED Time out (N.O. contact) OP. LED POWER LED Power -delay Power supply Time out (N.O. contact) T t ta t t t tb One pulse time (t): Approx..s Note: LED lighting or No LED lighting LED lighting LED flickering T: Setting time T *Note: Keep.s or more for power off time. Instantaneous contact (N.O. contact) OP. LED POWER LED T *Note: Keep.s or more for power off time.

44 PMH-SD/SDM DIN SIZE ANALOG Star ( )-Delta ( ) Timers PMH -SD/SDM Analog Timers UL File No.: E CSA File No.: LR.... Features Select four types of time ranges between. s and s on a single unit. Select between five types of time ranges between. s and. s for the -g switching times. There is a -g switching indicator so you can check the operation at a glance. The AC free power supply and shorter body make it easier to use. Compliant with UL, CSA, CE and LLOYD. mm inch Specifications Item Rating Time accuracy Note:) Contact Life Electrical function Mechanical function condition Others Type Rated operating Rated frequency Rated power consumption Rated control capacity Operation mode operation control time range - switching time Operation time fluctuation Setting error Voltage error Temperature error Contact arrangement Contact resistance (Initial value) Contact material Mechanical (contact) Electrical (contact) Allowable operating range Insulation resistance (Initial value) Breakdown (Initial value) Min. power off time Max. temperature rise Functional Vibration resistance Destructive Functional Shock resistance Destructive Ambient temperature Ambient humidity Atmospheric pressure Protective construction Weight PMH-SD/SDM to V AC, V AC /Hz common Approx. VA ( to V AC), Approx..VA (V AC) A V AC (resistive load) - star-delta switching (Power -delay) s to s, time ranges switchable.,.,.,.,.s ( time range selectable) ±.% (power off time change at the range of.s to h) ±% (Full-scale value) ±.% (at the operating changes between to %) ±% (at C ambient temp. at the range of to + C + to + F) Star ( ) side: Timed-out Form A, Delta ( ) side: Timed-out Form A Instantaneous: Form A (Instantaneous for PMH-SDM type only) Max. mω (at A V DC) Au flash on Silver alloy (at rated control capacity) to % of rated operating (at C coil temp.) Between live and dead metal parts Between input and output Min. MΩ (At V DC) Between contacts of different poles (*) Between contacts of same pole,vrms for min Between live and dead metal parts,vrms for min Between input and output,vrms for min Between contacts of different poles (*),Vrms for min Between contacts of same pole ms C F to Hz: cycle/min double amplitude of.mm (min on axes) to Hz: cycle/min double amplitude of.mm (h on axes) Min. m/s ( times on axes) Min. m/s ( times on axes) to + C + to + F Max. %RH (non-condensing) to,hpa IP on front panel (using rubber gasket ATC) <only for IP type> g. oz (Pin type), g. oz ( type) Notes: ) Unless otherwise specified, the measurement conditions at the maximum scale time standard are specified to be the rated operating, C F ambient temperature, and s power off time. ) For the s range, the tolerance for each specification becomes ±ms. ) Between contacts of different poles for PMH-SDM type only.

45 Time range Time range unit Time range (s) -g switching time (s). to to to to..... Product types Operation Protective Rated operating Terminal Type Contact arrangement Time range Part number mode construction type PMH-SD Star ( )-Delta (g) switching PMH-SDM Star ( )-Delta (g) switching (Instantaneous contact) PMH-SD Star ( )-Delta (g) switching PMH-SDM Star ( )-Delta (g) switching (Instantaneous contact) Star ( )- Delta (g) switching Relay Timed-out side: Form A g side: Form A Relay Timed-out side: Form A g side: Form A Instantaneous: Form A Relay Timed-out side: Form A g side: Form A Relay Timed-out side: Form A g side: Form A Instantaneous: Form A selectable ranges over s to s ( -g switching time:.,.,.,.,.s) IP IP to V AC V AC to V AC V AC to V AC V AC to V AC V AC pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins PMHSD-S-ACVW PMHSD-S-ACVSW PMHSD-S-ACVW PMHSD-S-ACVSW PMHSDM-S-ACVW PMHSDM-S-ACVSW PMHSDM-S-ACVW PMHSDM-S-ACVSW PMHSD-S-ACV PMHSD-S-ACVS PMHSD-S-ACV PMHSD-S-ACVS PMHSDM-S-ACV PMHSDM-S-ACVS PMHSDM-S-ACV PMHSDM-S-ACVS Analog Timers Terminal layouts and wiring diagrams Pin type No instantaneous contact With instantaneous contact type No instantaneous contact With instantaneous contact side time-delay contact side time-delay contact Instantaneous contact (PMH-SDM type) side time-delay contact side time-delay contact Instantaneous contact (PMH-SDM type) Dimensions mm inch dia.. dia... Operation Power supply Instantaneous contact side Contact side Contact t t t t: operation time ( indicator LED lights) t: switching time t: operation time ( indicator LED lights)

46 PMH-F DIN SIZE ANALOG MULTI-RANGE POWER -DELAY TIMERS PMH-F Analog Timers UL File No.: E CSA File No.: LR.... Features Switch operation times between three types of time ranges of s to s and min to min. Instantaneous reset available. The shorter body makes it easier to use. Compliant with UL, CSA, CE and LLOYD. mm inch Specifications Item Rating Time accuracy * Contact Life Electrical function Mechanical function condition Others Rated operating Rated frequency Rated power consumption Type Rated control capacity Operation mode Time range Operation time fluctuation Setting error Voltage error Temperature error Contact arrangement Contact resistance (Initial value) Contact material Mechanical (contact) Electrical (contact) Allowable operating range Insulation resistance (Initial value) Breakdown (Initial value) Min. power supply width Min. reset time Max. temperature rise Functional Vibration resistance Destructive Functional Shock resistance Destructive Ambient temperature Ambient humidity Atmospheric pressure Ripple factor (DC type) Protective construction Weight PMH-F PMH-FR PMH-FR to V AC, to V AC, V AC, V DC, V DC /Hz common (AC operating type) Approx..VA ( to V AC, to V AC), Approx..VA (V AC) Approx..W (V DC, V DC) A V AC (resistive load) Power -delay Power -delay (with reset) s to s: range switchable min to min: range selectable ±.% ±% (Full-scale value) ±.% (at the operating changes between to %) ±% (at C ambient temp. at the range of to + C + to + F) Timed-out Form C Timed-out Form C Timed-out Form C Max. mω (at A V DC) Au flash on Silver alloy (at rated control capacity) to % of rated operating (at C coil temp.), to % (DC Type) Between live and dead metal parts Between input and output Min. MΩ (At V DC) Between contacts of different poles (*) Between contacts of same pole,vrms for min Between live and dead metal parts,vrms for min Between input and output,vrms for min Between contacts of different poles (*) Vrms for min Between contacts of same pole s range type: ms min range type: s ms C F to Hz: cycle/min double amplitude of.mm (min on axes) to Hz: cycle/min double amplitude of.mm (hr on axes) Min. m/s ( times on axes) Min. m/s ( times on axes) to + C + to + F to %RH (non-condensing) to,hpa % IP on front panel (using rubber gasket ATC) <only for IP type> g. oz (Pin type), g. oz ( type) *Notes: ) Unless otherwise specified, the measurement conditions at the maximum scale time standard are specified to be the rated operating (within % ripple factor for DC), C F ambient temperature. ) For the s range, the tolerance for each specification becomes ±ms. When the power goes on, in rush current (.A) flows. Cautions should be taken. The minimum power supplying time after forced reset input is s or more. ) Between contacts of different pools for PMH-F, PMH-FR types only.

47 Time range Time range unit Time range s range type.s to s.s to s.s to s min range type. min to min. min to min. min to min Product types Operation Protective Rated operating Terminal Type Contact arrangement Time range Part number mode construction type PMH-F PMH-FR Power -delay (without reset) Power -delay (with instantaneous reset) Relay Timed-out Form C Relay Timed-out Form C selectable time ranges over s to s selectable time ranges over min to min selectable time ranges over s to s selectable time ranges over min to min selectable time ranges over s to s selectable time ranges over min to min selectable time ranges over s to s selectable time ranges over min to min IP IP IP IP to V AC to V AC V AC V DC V DC to V AC to V AC V AC V DC V DC to V AC to V AC V AC V DC V DC to V AC to V AC V AC V DC V DC to V AC to V AC V AC V DC V DC to V AC to V AC V AC V DC V DC to V AC to V AC V AC V DC V DC to V AC to V AC V AC V DC V DC pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins PMHF-S-ACVW PMHF-S-ACVW PMHF-S-ACVW PMHF-S-DCVW PMHF-S-DCVW PMHF-M-ACVW PMHF-M-ACVW PMHF-M-ACVW PMHF-M-DCVW PMHF-M-DCVW PMHF-S-ACV PMHF-S-ACV PMHF-S-ACV PMHF-S-DCV PMHF-S-DCV PMHF-M-ACV PMHF-M-ACV PMHF-M-ACV PMHF-M-DCV PMHF-M-DCV PMHFR-S-ACVW PMHFR-S-ACVW PMHFR-S-ACVW PMHFR-S-DCVW PMHFR-S-DCVW PMHFR-M-ACVW PMHFR-M-ACVW PMHFR-M-ACVW PMHFR-M-DCVW PMHFR-M-DCVW PMHFR-S-ACV PMHFR-S-ACV PMHFR-S-ACV PMHFR-S-DCV PMHFR-S-DCV PMHFR-M-ACV PMHFR-M-ACV PMHFR-M-ACV PMHFR-M-DCV PMHFR-M-DCV Analog Timers

48 PMH-F Analog Timers Operation Protective Rated operating Terminal Type Contact arrangement Time range Part number mode construction type PMH-FR Power -delay (with instantaneous reset) Dimensions type (Flush mount) Relay Timed-out Form C selectable time ranges over s to s selectable time ranges over min to min IP IP IP IP to V AC to V AC V AC V DC V DC to V AC to V AC V AC V DC V DC to V AC to V AC V AC V DC V DC to V AC to V AC V AC V DC V DC Pin type (Flush mount/surface mount) pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins PMHFR-S-ACVW PMHFR-S-ACVSW PMHFR-S-ACVW PMHFR-S-ACVSW PMHFR-S-ACVW PMHFR-S-ACVSW PMHFR-S-DCVW PMHFR-S-DCVSW PMHFR-S-DCVW PMHFR-S-DCVSW PMHFR-S-ACV PMHFR-S-ACVS PMHFR-S-ACV PMHFR-S-ACVS PMHFR-S-ACV PMHFR-S-ACVS PMHFR-S-DCV PMHFR-S-DCVS PMHFR-S-DCV PMHFR-S-DCVS PMHFR-M-ACVW PMHFR-M-ACVSW PMHFR-M-ACVW PMHFR-M-ACVSW PMHFR-M-ACVW PMHFR-M-ACVSW PMHFR-M-DCVW PMHFR-M-DCVSW PMHFR-M-DCVW PMHFR-M-DCVSW PMHFR-M-ACV PMHFR-M-ACVS PMHFR-M-ACV PMHFR-M-ACVS PMHFR-M-ACV PMHFR-M-ACVS PMHFR-M-DCV PMHFR-M-DCVS PMHFR-M-DCV PMHFR-M-DCVS mm inch Tolerance: ±. ± dia.. dia.... dia.. dia...

49 Terminal layouts and wiring diagrams PMH-F (without reset input) Pin type Time-out Form C PMH-FR (with reset input) Pin type Time-out Form C, with reset input PMH-FR (with reset input) Pin type Time-out Form C, with reset input N.C. N.O. ( ) (+) N.C. N.O. input ( ) (+) N.C. N.O. N.O. N.C. input ( ) (+) N.C. N.O. Analog Timers Screw-tightening pin type The PMH-FR should be used for the timelimit C. Screw-tightening pin type The PMH-FR should be used for the timelimit C and to connect reset input. type Time-out Form C, with reset input N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. (+) ( ) input PMH-F (with reset) input conditions. Contact input (pin type example). Non-contact input (pin type example) input PMH-FR PMH-FR input Use a contact with good contact reliability for the input. Contact bounce can lead to erroneous operation of the timer, so use a contact with short bounce time. Make the resistance between terminals for a short circuit less than k. Make the resistance between terminals for an open circuit greater than k-ohms. PMH-FR input Photo-coupler input PMH-FR Photo-coupler Be sure to use a photocoupler for non-contact input. Check that Vce =.V Max. when. Operation PMH-F (without reset input) PMH-FR/FR (with reset input) Tr Tr Note: Ts Tr Note: Ts Power supply T Power supply Time-delay contact N.O. input T t Time-delay contact N.C. Time-delay contact N.O. Time-delay contact N.C. Note: t<t: Tr: Ts: Time setting Minimum power supply application time Min. s (Time to restart operation after reset input is set to : both second type and minute type)

50 PMH-W DIN SIZE ANALOG MULTI-RANGE CYCLIC TWIN TIMERS PMH-W Analog Timers UL File No.: E CSA File No.: LR.... mm inch Features A single twin timer unit that repeats (variable) /. Multiple ranges with a. s to h time specification on a single unit. The output / operation is indicated by red and green LED s. It s easy to check the operation at a glance. The AC free power supply and shorter body make it easier to use. A new screw terminal type has been added to the conventional pin type. Wiring can be done easily with a screwdriver. Compliant with UL, CSA, CE and LLOYD. Specifications Item Rating Time accuracy Note:) Contact Life Electrical function Mechanical function condition Others Rated operating Rated frequency Rated power consumption Rated control capacity Operation mode Time range Operation time fluctuation Setting error Voltage error Temperature error Contact arrangement Type Contact resistance (Initial value) Contact material Mechanical (contact) Electrical (contact) Allowable operating range Insulation resistance (Initial value) Breakdown (Initial value) Min. power off time Max. temperature rise Functional Vibration resistance Destructive Functional Shock resistance Destructive Ambient temperature Ambient humidity Atmospheric pressure Ripple factor (DC type) Protective construction Weight PMH-W to V AC, to V DC, V DC, V AC/DC /Hz common (AC operating type) Approx. VA ( to V AC) Approx..VA (V AC) Approx..W (V DC, V DC, to V DC) A V AC (resistive load) Cyclic (-start/twin operation) s to h time ranges switchable (T, T time setting individually) ±.% (power off time change at the range of.s to h) ±% (Full-scale value) ±.% (at the operating changes between to %) ±% (at C ambient temp. at the range of to + C + to F) Timed-out Form C Max. mω (at A V DC) Silver alloy (at rated control capacity) to % of rated operating (at C coil temp.) Between live and dead metal parts Between input and output Min. MΩ (At V DC) Between contacts of different poles Between contacts of same pole,vrms for min Between live and metal parts,vrms for min Between input and output,vrms for min Between contacts of different poles,vrms for min Between contacts of same pole ms C F to Hz: cycle/min double amplitude of.mm (min on axes) to Hz: cycle/min double amplitude of.mm (h on axes) Min. m/s ( times on axes) Min. m/s ( times on axes) to + C + to + F to %RH (non-condensing) to,hpa % IP on front panel (using rubber gasket ATC) <only for IP type> g. oz (Pin type), g. oz ( type) Notes: ) Unless otherwise specified, the measurement conditions at the maximum scale time standard are specified to be the rated operating (within % ripple factor for DC), C F ambient temperature, and s power off time. ) For the s range, the tolerance for each specification becomes ±ms. ) As internal components may become worn when using continuous conduction, the product should be replaced periodically.

51 Time range All types of PMH-W timer have multi-time range. time ranges are selectable. s to h (Max. range) is controlled. Time unit Scale sec min hrs h.s to s. min to min.h to h.h to h Control.s to s. min to min.h to h h to h time range.s to s. min to min.h to h h to h s to s min to min h to h h to h Analog Timers Product types Protective Rated Terminal Type Contact arrangement Time range Part number mode structure type PMH-W Twin timer Cyclic (-start, Twin) Relay Timed-out Form C selectable ranges (s to h) Terminal layouts and wiring diagrams Pin Type Cyclic timed-out relay contact: C type Cyclic timed-out relay contact: C IP IP to V AC to V DC V AC/DC V DC to V AC to V DC V AC/DC V DC pins pins pins pins pins pins pins pins PMHW-H-ACVW PMHW-H-ACVSW PMHW-H-DCVW PMHW-H-DCVSW PMHW-H-VW PMHW-H-VSW PMHW-H-DCVW PMHW-H-DCVSW PMHW-H-ACV PMHW-H-ACVS PMHW-H-DCV PMHW-H-DCVS PMHW-H-V PMHW-H-VS PMHW-H-DCV PMHW-H-DCVS N.O. N.C. N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. N.C. N.O. ( ) (+) (+) ( ) Dimensions type: M. Pin type mm inch Tolerance: ±. ± Operation Power supply T T T Time-delay contact (N.O. contact) Time-delay contact (N.C. contact) Output - indicator : Output indicator (green) : Output indicator (orange) T: set time T: set time

52 PMH series modes and time setting Analog Timers. Operation method ) Operation mode setting [PMH-A type] operation modes are selectable with operation mode selector. Turn the operation mode selector with screw driver. Operation mode is shown up through the window above the mode selector. The marks are, FL, FO, OF, SF, OS, OF, OC. Turn the mode selector to the mark until you can check by clicking sound. Confirm the mode selector position if it is correct. If the position is not stable, the timer might mis-operate. ) Time range setting [PMH series common] time ranges are selectable between s to h. Turn the time range selector with the screw driver. Clockwise turning increases the time range, and Counter-clockwise turning decrease the time range. Confirm the range selector position if it is correct. If the position is not stable, the timer might mis-operate. ) Time setting [common] To set the time, turn the set dial to a desired time within the range. Instantaneous output will be on when the dial is set to. When the instantaneous output is used, the dial should be set under range. (Instantaneous output area) When power supply is on, the time range, setting time and operation mode cannot be changed. Turn off the power supply or a reset signal is applied to set the new operation mode. If the position is not stable, the timer might mis-operate.. How to use Set ring [PMH series common] ) Fixed time setting ) Time range setting Set the desired time and put set rings Example: Time range s to s. together. a Shorter time value setting Insert the rings into stopper to fix the Set the dial to s. time. Place the stop ring at the right side of Stopper boss stopper. Stopper b Longer time value setting Set the dial to s. Place the stop ring at the left side of stopper. Set range Shorter time value Stopper boss Longer time value Set ring ( pcs) ATC (sold separately) Set dial Stop ring SEC SEC Note) The stoppers for the lower limit setting set ring and the upper limit setting set ring face the opposite directions. Applicable standard (PMH series common) Safety standard EN- Pollution Degree /Over Category III EMC (EMI)EN-- Radiation interference electric field strength Noise terminal (EMS)EN-- Static discharge immunity RF electromagnetic field immunity EFT/B immunity Surge immunity Conductivity noise immunity Power frequency magnetic field immunity Voltage dip/instantaneous stop/voltage fluctuation immunity EN Group ClassA EN Group ClassA EN-- kv contact kv air EN-- V/m AM modulation ( MHz to GHz) V/m pulse modulation ( MHz to MHz) EN-- kv (power supply line) kv (signal line) EN-- kv (power line) EN-- V/m AM modulation (. MHz to MHz) EN-- A/m ( Hz) EN-- ms, % (rated ) ms, % (rated ), ms, % (rated ), ms, % (rated )

53 Precuations in using the PMH series. Input connections (PMH-A type) ) Be sure not to use terminal j as the No good Good common terminal of the input signal as shown in Fig. A. Otherwise, the internal circuit of the timer may be damaged. Use Fig. C No good Good Fig. D terminal b as the common terminal as shown in Fig. B. If the circuits is connected as in Fig. C, the internal circuits must be broken. Be sure to connect the circuit as in Fig. D. ) When one input signal is simultaneously applied to more than one timer, be sure to avoid the wiring shown in Fig. E No good Good Fig. A Fig. B Fig. F Contact or non-contact input Fig. E. Otherwise, the short-circuit current will flow and cause damage. Be sure to align the polarity of the power supply as shown in Fig. F. T T Input terminal Input terminal Input terminal Input terminal Contact input (or non-contact input) Contact input (or non-contact input) Power supply Power supply ) Terminal b-f (screw terminal -) should be connected as the start input. Connect terminals b-g (screw terminal -) for reset signal input. Connect terminals b-e (screw terminal -) for stop signal input. Be sure not to connect with other terminals and apply excessive. The internal circuit will be damaged. ) The input wiring other than the power supply circuit should avoid these conditions, high- wiring and parallel wiring with power wire. Wire in short with using the shielding wire or metal wiring tube. ) For start, reset and stop input, use gold-plated contact with high reliability. Since contact bouncing causes errors in the start, use an input contact less bounce time. ) Keep the minimum signal input time over. s.. Input signal conditions input input Stop input (PMH-A type) ) Connection of contact input (Pin type example Use gold-plated contacts with highreliability. The bounce time at the contacts causes errors in the timer operation time. Accordingly, use start input contact whose bounce time is short. The resistance when shorted should be less than kω, and when open resistance should be more than kω. For the screw terminal type, connect the terminal to the each input signal. input input Stop input ) Connection of non-contact input (Pin type example) (open-collector) Apply the open-collector connection. The characteristics of the transistor used must be VCEO=V or more, IC=mA or more, and ICBO=µA or less. Additionally, the input impedance must be kω or less, and the residual must be.v or less. For the screw terminal type, connect the terminal to the each input signal. ) Connection of non-contact input (Pin type example) ( input) Internal circuit with photoelectric sensor, etc. Q ma (The start input is turned on.) [Example of start input] Even if the open collector is not used, input is also possible from the non-contact circuit of to V DC. In this case, the start input is turned on when the signal is turned from H to L. The residual must be.v or less when Q is on. On the AC type, an insulated transformer is required as the power supply for the photoelectric sensor, etc. (power supply for the input devices). Note: Keep the minimum input signal time of each signal to.s or more.. Checking the contacts before use (PMH-F only) When the power time is less than the minimum power application time, the contacts may remain in an state, so the state of the contacts should be checked before use. When the contacts are in an state, activating them once will return them to their normal state (the state after time-out). (Be aware that relay characteristics may result in the contacts being in that same state if exposed to excessive vibration and impact during transport.). Time setting To set the time, turn the set dial to a desired time within the range. Instantaneous output will be on when the dial is set to. When the instantaneous output is used, the dial should be set under range. (Instantaneous output area) Note) When power supply is on, the time range, setting time and operation mode cannot be changed. Turn off the power supply or a reset signal is applied to set the new operation mode. If the position is not stable, the timer might mis-operate. Analog Timers

54 Precuations in using the PMH series Analog Timers. Superimposed surge of power supply (PMH series common) For the superimposed surge of power supply, the standard waveform is taken as the standard value for surge-proof. If external surge occurs exceeding the specified value, the internal circuit may break down. In this case, use a surge absorption element. Operation to V AC to V AC to V AC to V DC V DC, V DC V AC/DC Surge,V V The positive and negative s are applied each five times between the power pins. The typical surge absorption elements include a varistor, a capacitor, and a diode. If a surge absorption element is used, use an oscilloscope to see whether or not the foreign surge exceeding the specified value appears.. Acquisition of CE marking Please abide by the conditions below when using in applications that comply with EN-. ) Over category III, pollution level ) This timer employs a power supply without a transformer, so the power and input signal terminals are not insulated. (PMH-A only) () When a sensor is connected to the input circuit, install double insulation on the sensor side. () In the case of contact input, use dualinsulated relays, etc. ) The load connected to the output contact should have basic insulation. This timer is protected with basic insulation and can be double-insulated to meet EN/IEC requirements by using basic insulation on the load. ) Please use a power supply that is protected by an overcurrent protection device which complies with the EN/IEC standard (example: V A fuse, etc.). ) You must use a terminal socket or socket for the installation. Do not touch the terminals or other parts of the timer when it is powered. When installing or un-installing, make sure that no is being applied to any of the terminals. ) Do not use this timer as a safety circuit. For example when using a timer in a heater circuit, etc., provide a protection circuit on the machine side.

55 Installing DIN size timer Analog Timers Installations. Surface mount ) For the timers of PMH and LTH series, use the pin type timer. With the PMS and QMH series, only pin-type timers are available. ) Put the terminal socket on the board directly or put it on the DIN rail (Fig. ). ) Insert the timer into the terminal socket and fix it with clip (Fig. ) ) On DIN rail mounting, mount the timer on the DIN rail tightly to get the proper dimension (Fig. ). Terminal socket (Fig. ) (Fig. ) (Fig. ) DIN rail ) -pin type should be connected with terminal socket (AT-DFK). -pin type should be connected with terminal socket (AT-DFK). ) DIN rail (AT-DLA) is also available ( m).. Flush mount ) For the timers of PMH and LTH series, it is recommended to use the built-in screw terminal type for flush mount. (Mounting frame and rubber gasket are provided when timer is shipped.) If the pin type is used, the mounting frame (AT-DA) and rubber gasket (ATC for surface waterproofing) that are available at extra costs are necessary. If the pin connection socket is the -pin type, use the P cap (AD- RC); or if it is the -pin type, use the P cap (AT-DP). ) How to mount the timer From the panel front, pass the timer through the square hole. Fit the mounting frame from the rear, and then push it in so that the clearance between the mounting frame and the panel surface is minimized. In addition, lock the mounting frame with a screw. type Panel cover Rubber gasket Pin type Panel ) Caution in mounting the timer PMH, and LTH series a If the PMH and the LTH series are used as the waterproof types, tighten the reinforcing screws on the mounting frames so that the timers, the rubber gaskets, and the panel surfaces are tightly contacted with each other. (Tighten the two screws with uniform force and make sure that there is no rattling. If the screws are tightened too excessively, the mounting frame may come off.) b If the timer is installed with the panel cover and the rubber gasket removed, the waterproofing characteristic is lost. ) Installation Loosen the screws on the mounting frame, spread the edge of frame and remove it. Pull the mounting frame backward while spreading out its hooks with your thumbs and index fingers. Mounting frame Push in Screw Screw Push in ) Correctly connect the pins while seeing the pin connection diagram. Tighten the terminal screws with a torque of. N cm or less. The screws are M.. (screw-tightened terminal type) ) If the pin type is used, the rear terminal block (ATC) or the P cap (AD-RC) is necessary to connect the pins. For the -pin type, use the rear terminal block (ATC) or the P cap (AT-DP) and avoid directly soldering the round pins on the timer. ) Panel cutout dimensions The standard panel cutout dimensions are shown in the left figure. (Panel thickness: to +. + mm. to. inch).. ) Although the timers can be mounted adjacent to each other in this case, it is recommended to arrange the mounting holes as shown in the right figure to facilitate attaching and detaching the mounting frame. ) Adjacent mounting Although the timers can be mounted adjacent to each other, remember that the panel surface of PMH or LTH series timer will lose its waterresistant effect. (Panel thickness: to mm. to. inch) A = ( n.) + When lining up the timers horizontally, set the frames in such a position so the formed spring areas are at the top and bottom. When lining up the timers vertically, set the frames in such a position as the formed spring areas are at the right and left mm. inch or more (mm) Formed spring Formed spring mm. inch or more A

56 DIN size timers common options Terminal sockets (Unit: mm inch, Tolerance: ± ±.) Type Appearance Dimensions Terminal wiring (Top view) Mounting hole dimensions PMH-S PMH-M PMH-SD PMH-F PMH-FR PMH-W LTH LTH-W QMH (-pin type) PMH-A PMH-FR LTH LTH-W (-pin type) DIN rail socket (-pin). ATC DIN rail socket (-pin). ATC M. M. - φ. - φ. M. M. - φ. - φ Note: Terminal No. on the main body are identifical to those on the terminal socket. Note: Terminal No. on the main body are identifical to those on the terminal socket..... ±.. ±.. ±.. ±.. -M -M. screw holes ±. ±. (or.. dia. holes) The minimum distance between the holes which areparallel drilled. -M -M. screw holes ±. ±. (or.. dia. holes) The minimum distance between the holes which areparallel drilled. Options and Accessories Timers Note: The socket s numbering system matches that of the timer terminals. Sockets (Unit: mm inch, Tolerance: ± ±.) Type PMH-S PMH-M PMH-SD PMH-F PMH-FR PMH-W LTH LTH-W (-pin type) QMH PMH-A PMH-FR LTH LTH-W (-pin type) Appearance Rear terminal socket AT P cap AD-RC. φ. φ. P cap AT-DP.. Rear terminal socket. AT φ. φ..... φ φ.... φ φ. M.. M... φ. φ... φ. φ.. Dimensions φ. φ.... φ. φ... Note: The terminal socket s numbering system matches that of the timer terminals (.) (.).... (.) (.) φ φ φ. φ. φ φ φ. φ. Terminal wiring (Top view) Mounting hole dimensions

57 RESET DOWN - RESET DOWN DIN size timers common options Rubber gasket Mounting frame mm inch ATC Applicable for PMH series and LTH series The rubber gasket is enclosed in the PMH (screw terminal type) and the LTH series. AT-DA... Applicable for PMH series LTH series and QMH series Options and Accessories Timers Mounting rails (Applicable for DIN and IEC standards) AT-DLA Length: m aluminum.., ±. ± Oval hole, -.x -.x. Protective cover for DIN size: LTH, QMH series Flexible type r.r... Fastening plate ATA Protective cover for DIN size: QMH series Hard type M M. ATA UP For holding DIN rails.. AQM AQM Accessories PMH series Panel cover (Black) PMH-A POWER PMH-A OP PMH-S POWER PMH-S OP PMH-M POWER PMH-M OP Set ring When you control the fixed time range, the setting rings (a set of pcs.) make it easy to do the time setting and keep the time range all the time. (Excluding PMH-W) S S S N RANGE N RANGE N RANGE ATC MODE ATC ATC MODE PMH-W PMH-SD PMH-F PMH-W PMH-SD POWER PMH-F ATC S S S ATC L RANGE RANGE ATC L RANGE RANGE S L ATC L RANGE LTH series Panel cover (Black) LTH LTH-W TIMER TIMER LOCK UP SET/LOCK UP LTH LTH-W ATL ATL The black panel cover is also available so that you can change the appearance of the panel by changing the panel cover. The color of the standard panel cover is ash gray.

58 SDXM-A/M/SDX x common options Accessories Note: Accessories are the same as those for the SDX timer. Mounting frame Appearance Panel cutout dimensions mm inch *Note.. ADX (Titanium-gray) ADX (Gray) ADX (Black) Protective cover.... Cap block... Board thickness to mm Note: Make sure the holes area stays as right angles. Cap Socket... Options and Accessories Timers ADX.. Terminal Socket HC slim DIN terminal socket.. HC DIN high terminal socket ADX.. HC DIN high terminal socket ADX HC socket HJ terminal socket.... ADX.. HJ terminal socket HC-SFD-S HC-SFD-K Socket Leaf Holding Clip Figure HC-SFD-K AD Dimensions.... Figure.. Dimensions.. Figure HC-SS-K Dimensions.. HJ-SFD/HJ-SFD-S HJ-SFD/HJ-SFD-S Socket Line Holding Clip for SDXM-A/M ADX Dimensions.... ( pieces per set) ( pieces per set) ( pieces per set).. Type Terminal socket Application ADX ADX AD ADX HC-SFD-S For HC relay HC-SFD-K HC-SFD-K HJ-SFD For HJ relay HJ-SFD-S HJ-SFD HJ-SFD-S Note: The triangles indicate that removal will be slightly difficult when installed laterally in succession.

59 SDX timer options HC relay terminal sockets Name/Part No. Terminal socket, HC -pin Oval hole: Dimensions Terminal layout Mounting hole dimensions.. Terminal screw M.. Screw hole: -M. (or φ.±. hole) (or φ.±. hole)... Applicable timers SDX(c) SDX(c) SDXM(c) SDXM(c) Options and Accessories Timers For general rails HC-SF-K High terminal socket, HC -, - and -pin.... Note) Only wire springs can be used. (Plate springs cannot be used.) Oval hole: -... Terminal screw M Drilling size of panel holes for installing the terminal sockets parallel... Available Not available HC-HSF-K... Screw hole size Note) Only wire springs can be used. (Plate springs cannot be used.)... Screw hole: -M. (or φ.±. hole) (or φ.±. hole) Drilling size of panel holes for installing the terminal sockets parallel Available Available Slim DIN terminal socket, HC ±.. ±. ±... ±. Terminal screw M. ±.. ±. ±.. ±.. ±.. ± ±... ±. ±. ±.. ±. ±... ±. ±. ±. ±.. ±.. ±. ±.. ±. ±... ±. Screw hole: -M... (or ± φ.±. hole).. ± (or φ.±. hole) Available Not available HC-SFD-S..± ±... ±. ±.. ±.. ±... ±.. ± ±.. ±.... DIN high terminal socket, HC ±.. ±.. ±.. ±. Terminal screw M ±.. ±. For DIN rails. ±.. ±.. ±.. ±.. ±.. ±. ±.. ±. ±. ±... ±.. ±... Available Not available HC-SFD-K DIN high terminal socket, HC. ±.. ±. ±.. ±. ±... ±. ±... ±. Terminal screw M ±.. ±.... Screw hole: -M. (or φ.±. hole) (or φ.±. hole).... ±.. ±.. ±.. ±.. ±. ±.. ±.. ±. ±. ±... ±.. ± Drilling size of panel holes for installing the terminal sockets parallel Available Available HC-SFD-K. ±.. ±. mm inch

60 SDXM-A/M/SDX x common options HJ relay terminal sockets Name/Part No. HJ terminal socket -M.. mounting holes Dimensions Terminal layout Mounting hole dimensions M. terminal screw.... ±.. ±. Applicable timers SDX(c) SDX(c) SDXM(c) SDXM(c) ±. ±.. ±.. ±. ±.. ±. Available Not available HJ-SFD HJ terminal socket (Finger protect type) -M.. mounting holes. M. terminal screw ±.. ± ±.. ±. ±.. ±. Options and Accessories Timers ±. ±. ±. ±... -M. or M. or.. dia. hole Available Not available HJ-SFD-S. ±.. ±.. HJ terminal socket -M.. mounting holes M. terminal screw.... ±.. ±. ±. ±. ±. ±.. ±.. ±. ±.. ±. Available Available HJ-SFD HJ terminal socket (Finger protect type) -M.. mounting holes. M. terminal screw Lot No. ±.. ±.... ±.. ±. ±.. ±. ±. ±. ±. ±... -M. or M. or.. dia. hole Available Available HJ-SFD-S. Lot No. ±.. ±.. mm inch

61 SDXM-A/M/SDX common options Sockets Name/Order No. Socket, HC -pin Dimensions The difference between the HC and HC sockets is only the number of the pins. Their appearances and sizes are the same Mounting hole dimensions The thickness of applicable chassis plates ranges from. to. mm. To install the socket easily, insert the socket top surface into the drilled holes and press the two points on the fastening plate indicated by arrows as shown in the fig. below. Applicable timers SDX(c) SDX(c) SDXM(c) SDXM(c) Available Not available Options and Accessories Timers HC-SS-K Socket, HC -pin General tolerance: ± Available Available HC-SS-K The interval size between the sockets which are parallel installed. Dimensional tolerance of machining: ±. ±. Sockets for PC board HC Socket for PC board: APK HC Socket for PC board: APK mm inch

62 x Counters selector chart Electronic counters Appearance Name of product LCH Counter LCH Counter LCH Counter Type Total counter Preset counter Preset counter Input mode/input method Features Rated operating Number of digits (counter capacity) Flush mounting type PC board mounting type AEL. mm tall -digit display Bright -color back light Flush mounting type: Unnecessary (Built-in battery) PC board mounting type: V DC (Battery in externally installed) -digit UP type AEL. mm tall -digit display Preset function equipped in half size Display has backlight for instant recognition V DC -digit UP, DOWN type -digit display -digit display UP, DOWN, and DIR (multi-mode)/dip switch Bright and easy-to-read display Simple operation Short body Conforms to IP s weather resistant standards to V AC V AC, to V DC -digit -digit -digit display Bright and easy-to-read display Simple operation Pre-scale function Built-in power supply for high-capacity sensor ( to V AC type) Conforms to IP s weather resistant standards to V AC -digit display LCH-S Counter Preset counter UP, DOWN, and DIR (multi-mode)/dip switch -digit -digit LCH-W Counter Preset counter UP, DOWN, and DIR (multi-mode) modes selectable/dip switch Bright and easy-to-read display Simple operation Upper and lower limit settings are available. Conforms to IP s weather resistant standards to V AC V AC to V DC -digit General Information Counters, Hour Meters Counter/Indication Counting speed Input ( input specifications conform to those of counting input) Preset Zero-suppress function (LCD) Flush mounting type: khz/hz (Changeable by a switch) PC board mounting type: khz/hz (Different type) Counting (signal) input and reset input Input by short-circuiting or opening contacts Open collector input Voltage input Front reset button and external reset input terminal External reset dip terminal Zero-suppress function (LCD) Hz/kHz switchable Counting (signal) input and reset input Input by short-circuiting or opening contacts Open collector input Manual reset with and external terminal and front reset key Manual reset types inside one-short output models Counter number setting with key switches -segment LCD Counter value (backlight red LED) Setting value (backlight yellow LED) Hz/kHz -input (multi-mode) and reset input Input by short-circuiting or opening contacts. Open collector input Manual reset with and external terminal and front reset key Manual reset types inside one-short output models Operation mode setting with dip switches Counter number setting with key switches -segment LCD Counter value (backlight red LED) Setting value (backlight yellow LED) Hz/kHz -input (multi-mode) and reset input Input by short-circuiting or opening contacts. Open collector input Manual reset with and external terminal and front reset key Manual reset types inside one-short output models Operation mode setting with dip switches Counter number setting with key switches -segment LCD Counter value (backlight red LED) Setting value (backlight yellow LED) Hz/kHz -input (multi-mode) and reset input Input by short-circuiting or opening contacts. Open collector input Manual reset with and external terminal and front reset key Manual reset types inside one-short output models Output mode setting with dip switches Counter number setting with key switches Control output or or or Power supply output Options Flush mounting type (No need for easy installation type) Mounting frame, rubber gasket Mounting frame, rubber gasket pin P plug-in (terminal block, socket) pin P plug-in (terminal block, socket) External power supply V DC ma max. (AC type only) P pin plug-in (terminal block, socket) pin P plug-in (terminal block, socket) Available standards UL/C-UL UL/C-UL UL/C-UL UL/C-UL UL/C-UL Contact output ( Form C) Contact output ( Form A) Open collector output

63 Counter-related terminology General Information Counters, Hour Meters Types of counters. Electro preset counter The counter is equipped with semiconductor counting circuitry. When the counter counts up to a preset number, its output circuit sends a signal.. Electro magnetic counter A magnet is magnetized and demagnetized to drive the dial and count up numbers. Rating. Rated operating The is applied to start the counter. Countings. Pulse This is a or current signal sent at intermittent time intervals.. Count Pulses are used to count up and down.. Miss-count This happens if the number of pulses does not correspond to the number of counts.. Hertz This unit of counting speed is used to give the number of counts per one second.. Make ratio This is the ratio of time (Ta) to time (Tb). Ta. Maximum counting speed Suppose that the counter is operated with an input pulse of a make ratio of. The highest counting speed is the peak of a range in which the output circuit can send signals without mis-counting. The speed is expressed in units of Hz (cps: counts per a second). Tb Time. Recount When counting is up, the counter display resets to zero and counting restarts.. Down count Numbers are counted down one by one from a preset number.. Up count Numbers are counted up one by one from zero.. Up/down count Numbers are counted up or down depending on input conditions.. Rejection (gate) input This signal is used to keep the counter from counting. Outputs. Count up When a preset number is reached, the output circuit sends a signal.. Retained output The output is held until a reset signal is sent.. One Shot output This output has a specified width of time. tings. The counting process, display and output sections are all brought back to the initial status.. Power off reset The operating is turned off to reset the counter.. Manual reset The counter is manually reset.. Remote reset A signal is sent from a remote point to the reset terminal so as to reset the counter.. Automatic reset When counting is up, internal circuitry is activated to automatically reset the counter.. signal width This is the time during which the power is off so as to reset the counter or during which an external (manual) reset signal is sent.. time This is the time from the moment a reset signal is sent to the instant the counter is ready to start counting again. Others. Function of memorizing condition Counting data up until the operating is turned off can be stored in memory. When the power is reactivated, the data can be reproduced.. Anti-surge The strength against power surge is determined by applying a single-pole full-wave (several hundred to several thousand volt wave for ±(.x) µs) acrosss the control power terminals. Surge waveform [Single-pole full-wave for ±(.x) µs] Surge (%) Peak value. Time ( s). Noise immunity This is the strength against external noise. Relay noise tests, noise simulator tests, etc. are conducted.. Over count Counting continues beyond a preset number.

64 Precautions in using the counter Cautions for circuits. Protective circuit for counter contact In the circuit that switches an inductive load, a contact failure may occur at a contact point due to surge or inrush current resulting from that switching. Therefore, it is recommended that the following protective circuit be used to protect the contact point. CR circuit (r: resistor c: capacitor) Diode circuit Varistor circuit Counter contact Counter contacts Counter contacts Counter contacts Circuit r c Inductive load r c Inductive load Diode Inductive load ZNRvaristor Inductive load Application AC DC Features/Others Device Selection (see note.) Available Not available Available Available Available Available Available If the load is a relay or solenoid, the release time lengthens. The diode connected in parallel Effective when connected to both contacts if the power supply is causes the energy stored in the coil or V and the across the load is to V. to flow to the coil in the form of current and dissipates it as joule heat If the load is a timer, leakage current at the resistance component of the flows through the CR circuit causing inductive load. faulty operation. This circuit further delays the release Note: If used with AC, be sure time compared to the CR circuit. the impedance of the load is sufficiently ( to times the release time listed in smaller than that of the CR circuit. the catalog) As a guide in selecting r and c, Use a diode with a reverse breakdown c:. to µf per A contact current at least times the r:. to W per V contact circuit and a forward current Values vary depending on the properties of the load and variations in counter characteristics. at least as large as the load current. Capacitor c acts to suppress the discharge the moment the contacts open. Resistor r In electronic circuits where the acts to limit the current when the power is turned on the next time. Test to confirm. circuit s reverse breakdown Use a capacitor with a breakdown of to V. Use AC type capacitors of about to times the (non-polarized) for AC circuits. power supply.. Type of load and inrush current The type of load and its inrush current characteristics, together with the switching frequency, are important factors which cause contact welding. Particularly for loads with inrush currents, measure the steady state current and inrush current and use a relay or magnet switch which provides an ample margin of safety. The table below shows the relationship between typical loads and their inrush currents. Type of load Inrush current Resistive load Steady state current Solenoid load to times the steady state current Motor load to times the steady state current Incandescent lamp load to times the steady state current Mercury lamp load to times the steady state current Sodium vapor lamp load to times the steady state current Capacitive load to times the steady state current Transformer load to times the steady state current When you want large load and long life of the counter, do not control the load direct with a counter. When the counter is designed to use a relay or a magnet switch, you can acquire the longer life of the counter.. Connection of input (Except for LCH-S/AC type) The LCH series use power supply without a transformer (power and input terminals are not insulated). In connecting various kinds of input signals, therefore, use a power transformer in which the primary side is separated from the ungrounded secondary side as shown in Fig. A, for the power supply for a sensor and other input devices so that shortcircuiting can be prevented. Do not use a single coil transformer (e.g., Sly-Duck). Otherwise, the internal circuit of the counter will be short-circuited as shown in Fig. B resulting in breakdown. (Fig. A) Good (Fig. B) No good AC power supply AC power supply Insurating transformer Counter Counter Counter (+) ( ) Insurating transformer (+) ( ) Single coil transformer (+) ( ) ( ) ( ) Input equipment (sensor, etc.) Input equipment (sensor, etc.) Input equipment (sensor, etc.) ( ) AC power routing Using the rated characteristics of the varistor, this circuit prevents excessively high s from being applied across the contacts. This circuit also slightly delays the release time.. Long continuous current flow Avoid keeping the counter on for a long period of time (over one month). Otherwise heat is generated and accumulated inside the counter, which may deteriorate its electronic parts. If the counter must be kept on for a long period of time, a relay is added. See the circuit diagram below. R C R Relay R C Counter R Receive output from contact at relay R. Leakage current ) For connecting operating to the counter, a circuit should be used, which will prevent the flow of leakage current. For example, a circuit for contact protection as shown in Fig A. will permit leakage current flow through R and C, causing erroneous operation of the counter. Instead, the circuit shown in Fig. B should be used. (Fig. A) Leakage current R C C Counter (Fig. B) ) If the counter is directly switched with a non-contact element, leak current may flow into the counter and cause it to malfunction. R C General Information Counters, Hour Meters C Counter

65 PRECAUTIS IN USING THE COUNTER Counters Cautions for use (common for all models). Terminal connections Correctly connect the pins while seeing the terminal layout/wiring diagram. In particular, the DC type, which has polarities, does not operate with the polarities connected reverse. Any incorrect connection can cause abnormal heating or ignition.. Connection to operating )Apply the entire supply through a switch, relay or other contact. ) The operating for the DC type must be at the specified ripple percentage or less. The average must fall within the allowable operating range. Rectification type Ripple percentage Single-phase, full-wave Approx. % Three-phase, full-wave Approx. % Three-phase, half-wave Approx. % ) Make sure that no induced and residual are applied between the power terminals on the counter after the power switch is turned. (If the power line is wired in parallel with the high- and motor lines, induced may be produced between the power pins.). Control output ) Keep the load capacity below the counter s rated control capacity. If used above the rating, the counter s service life may shorten. With the transistor output type counters, transistors may be damaged.. Installing the counter ) To install the counter, use the dedicated pin bracket or socket (cap). Avoid connecting the pins on the counter by directly soldering them. ) In order to maintain the characteristics, do not remove the counter cover (case).. Superimposed surge of power supply For the superimposed surge of power supply, the standard waveform (±.xµs or ±xµs) is taken as the standard value for surge-proof. (The positive and negative s are applied each three or five times between the power pins.) For the standard values for the LCH type counters, see the respective items in Cautions for use. Single-pole, full-wave for surge waveform [±(.x) µs] Surge (%) Peak value. Time ( s) If external surge occurs exceeding the specified value, the internal circuit may break down. In this case, use a surge absorption element. The typical surge absorption elements include a varistor, a capacitor, and a diode. If a surge absorption element is used, use an oscilloscope to see whether or not the foreign surge exceeding the specified value appears.. Signal input The counter s signal input comes in two ways. One is by opening and closing the input terminal. The other is by applying a specified H-level or L-level to the input terminal. For an input sensor s residual, input impedance, input level and other signal input conditions, see the ratings for each type of product.. environment ) For the ambient operating temperature and humidity, see the ratings for each type of product. ) Avoid using the counter in a location where inflammable or corrosive gas is generated, the counter is exposed to much dust and other foreign matter; water or oil is splashed on the counter; or vibrations or shocks are given to the counter. ) The counter cover (case), the knobs, and the dials are made of polycarbonated resin. Therefore, prevent the counter from being exposed to organic solvents such as methyl alcohol, benzine, and thinner, strong acid substances such as caustic soda, and ammonia and avoid using the counter in atmosphere containing any of those substances. ) If the counter is used where noises are emitted frequently, separate the input signal elements (such as a sensor), the wiring for the input signal line, and the counter as far as possible from the noise source and the high power line containing noises. Counter Input line As remote as possible Power line, etc. Sensor, etc.. Checking the actual load In order to increase the reliability in the actual use, check the quality of the counter in the actual usage.. Others ) If the counter is used exceeding the ratings (operating and control capacity), the contact life, or any other specified limit, abnormal heat, smoke, or ignition may occur. ) The LCH series counter, incorporates a lithium battery. Never disassemble the lithium battery or throw it into fire because this may affect humans and facilities. The lithium battery must be disposed of as an incombustible like other used batteries. ) If any malfunction of the counter is likely to affect human life and properties, give allowance to the rated values and performance values. In addition, take appropriate safety measures such as a duplex circuit from the viewpoint of product liabilities.

66 x LCH DIN HALF SIZE LCD COUNTER LCH Panel mounting type One-touch installation type Panel mounting type Installation frame type PC board mounting type Features.. mm. inch Character Height on (previously mm) Easy-to-read character height increased from mm to. mm. inch to. inch. ght.mm.inch ased. Plenty of Digits digits mm nch. Counting Speed Switchable between khz and Hz. Panel Mounting Type Features Installation Methods Comes with very easy one-touch installation type and also installation frame type that uses the bracket on the timer/counter. Choose a method that suits the application. for the one-touch installation type, and n remove battery lid for the installation frame type. suits the application.. Battery. Screw Replacement Terminals Designed Easy on Environment Safety To Built replace in finger battery protection. simply remove bo. Panel Covers Replacable (Standard color is ash gray.) Change. Screw the Terminals panel design Designed by rep with Safety a black panel cover.. Built Conforms in finger to protection. IP Protectiv Construction. Panel Covers (Only Replacable installatio type.) (Standard (Front color panel is ash surface) gray.). Change Input Methods the panel design by rep ) with Non- a black panel input cover. method ). Voltage Conforms input to method IP Protectiv ) Construction Free (Only input method installatio. type.) Backlight (Front Type panel Added surface) to S and. Input Now Methods -color Switchable ( red) ) Non- input method Easy ) Voltage viewing input even method in dark place switchable ) Free between input green method and (Voltage. Backlight input type). Type Added to S. and Compliant Now -color with Switchable UL, c-ul a( red) Easy viewing even in dark place switchable between green and (Voltage input type). Counters Product chart Type Standard type Backligh Voltage input type Free input type Voltage inp Installation type Non- input type (. to V DC) ( to V AC/DC) (. to Panel One-touch installation type mounting type Installation frame type PC board mounting type Product types. Panel mounting type ) One-touch installation type Standard type No. digits Counting speed Front reset Input method Part N Non- input type LCH-FE-KK khz/ Hz switchable digits Yes Voltage input type (. to V DC) LCH-FE-DL-KK Hz Free input type ( to V AC/DC) LCH-FE-FV- Note) Please ask us about types without front resetting.

67 LCH ) Installation frame type Standard type No. digits Counting speed Front reset Input method Part No. Non- input type LCH-F-KK khz/ Hz switchable digits Yes Voltage input type (. to V DC) LCH-F-DL-KK Hz Free input type ( to V AC/DC) LCH-F-FV- Note) Please ask us about types without front resetting. Counters Backlight type No. digits Counting speed Front reset Input method Part No. digits khz/ Hz switchable Yes Voltage input type (. to V DC) LCH-F-DL-KK-B. PC board mounting type No. digits Counting speed Front reset Input method Part No. digits Specifications khz LCH-C-K-N No Non- input type Hz LCH-C--N. Panel mounting type Type Standard type Backlight type Standard type Item Non- input Voltage input Free type No. digits digits External power supply Not required (built-in battery) Max. counting speed khz/ Hz (Switchable by switch) Hz (Note ) Min. input signal width (: = :). ms/. ms (Switchable by switch). ms Count input input Input method (signal) Non- input using contacts or open collector connection High level:. to V DC Low level: to V DC High level: to V AC/DC Low level: to. V AC/DC Input impedance When shorted: Max. kω When open: Approx.. kω Max. kω Residual Max.. V Min. input signal width ms Input method (signal) Input impedance Non- input using contacts or open collector connection When shorted: Max. kω When open: Max. kω High level:. to V DC Low level: to V DC Appox.. kω Non- input using contacts or open collecto connection When shorted: Max. kω When open: Max. kω Residual Max. V Max.. V Display method -segment LCD -segment LCD With green/red backlight -segment LCD Between charged and Breakdown (initial) Between charged and uncharged parts:, V AC for minute. uncharged parts:, AC for minute. Insulation resistance (initial) Min. MΩ (measured at V DC) Measurement location same as for break down. Backlight power V DC (±%) Protective construction (Note ) IEC Standard IP (only panel front: when using rubber gasket) Accessories (Note ) Rubber gasket, mounting bracket Battery life years (at C F) Note years (at C F) Notes). The value given for battery life is calculated based on continuous operation (count input signal / = :), therefore, this value is not guaranteed. Also, battery life is decreased % when operation is continuous with khz count inputting in khz mode.. Operation is at Hz when using V AC.. Only for installation frame type.

68 . PC board mounting type Item Input method No. digits Rated operation Applicable standard Safety standard EN- Pollution Degree /Over Category III EMC (EMI)EN-- Radiation interference electric field strength Noise terminal (EMS)EN-- Static discharge immunity RF electromagnetic field immunity EFT/B immunity Type Allowable operation range Current consumption PC board mounting type EN Group ClassA EN Group ClassA EN-- EN-- EN-- Non DC input digits V DC. to. V DC Max. µa (max. µa during reset input) Max. counting speed khz Hz Min. input signal width (: = :). ms. ms Count Input method Non- input using contacts or open collector connection input When shorted: Max. kω Input impedance When open: Max. kω Residual Max.. V Min. input signal width ms input Input method Input impedance Residual power Break down (initial) Insulation resistance (initial) Non- input using contacts or open collector connection When shorted: Max. kω When open: Max. kω Max.. V Between charged and uncharged parts:, V AC for minute. Min. MΩ (measured at V DC) Measurement location same as for break down.. Common Type Item Panel mounting/pc board mounting types Vibration resistance Functional to Hz ( cycle/min.), single amplitude:. mm. inch ( min. on axes) Destructive to Hz ( cycle/min.), single amplitude:. mm. inch ( hr. on axes) Shock resistance Functional Min. m/s ( times on axes) Destructive Min. m/s ( times on axes) Operation temperature to + C + to + F (without frost or dew) Storage temperature to + C to + F (without frost or dew) Ambient humidity to % RH (non-condensing) kv contact kv air V/m AM modulation ( MHz to GHz) V/m pulse modulation ( MHz to MHz) kv (power supply line) Counters Conductivity noise immunity Power frequency magnetic field immunity EN-- EN-- V/m AM modulation (. MHz to MHz) A/m ( Hz)

69 LCH Part names. Front reset button This button resets the count value. It does not work when the lock switch is. Be aware that battery life will decrease if this switch is used frequently.. Lock switch (Refer to chart on right.) Disable the front reset button. Note) Turn at the LCD side (reset disabled) and at the terminal block side (reset enabled).. Count speed switch (Refer to chart on right.) Use this switch to switch the count speed between Hz and khz. (On the non and input types, Hz is on the LCD side and khz is on the terminal block side. Fixed at Hz for free input type.) Note) You must press the front reset button when you change the count speed switch setting. Confirm, however, that the Lock Switch is (front switches operable). RESET Front reset button Lock switch (Unit display ) Count speed switch (Unit display ) COUNTER LCH Count speed switch Non- input/ input (Terminal block side) (LCD side) (Terminal block side) (LCD side) k Hz Hz Lock switch Free input (Fixed at Hz) Notes). Default setting when shipped.. Make the switch setting before installing to panel. Counters Dimensions. Panel mounting type External dimensions ) One-touch installation type Panel installation diagram mm inch General tolerance: ±. ±..... Panel ( to.mm. to.inch thickness) Rubber spacer Note) When installing to a. mm. inch thick panel, remove the rubber spacer first.... () (.)... RESET. COUNTER button LCH When installing the one-touch installation type model, make sure that the installation spring does not pinch the rubber gasket. To prevent the installation spring from pinching the rubber gasket:. Set the rubber gasket on both ends of the installation spring (left and right).. Confirm that the installation spring is not pinching the rubber gasket, and then insert and fix the installation spring in place from the rear of the timer unit.

70 ) Installation frame type Panel mounting diagram.. Mounting screws (found on mounting frame) Mounting frame ATH (included)... Panel ( to.mm. to.inch thickness) Rubber gasket ATH (included)..... COUNTER.. RESET LCH. button Panel cut-out dimensions The standard panel cut-out is shown below. Use the mounting frame (ATH) and the rubber packing (ATH). (Only installation frame type.) For connected installation (sealed installation) (Only installation frame type.) min.. min A +. A=( n-.) A=(. n-.) +. Notes). Suitable installation panel thickness is to. mm. to. inch.. Waterproofing will be lost when installing repeatedly (sealed installation) Counters Terminal layout and wiring diagrams ) Standard type Non input type Voltage input type Free input type Count input input Count input +V input +V Count input input or W-R are connected internally. V V ) Backlight type Count input +V V Voltage input type Backlight <When green> <When red> input V +V +V V V +V

71 LCH. PC board mounting type External dimensions. ±.. ±.. ±.. ±.. ±.. ±.. ±.. ±... COUNTER LCH. ±.. ±. DIP switch. Terminal layout and wiring diagrams... ±.. ±.. ±.. ±.. ±.. ± dia. -. dia. General tolerance: ±. ±. mm inch PC board pattern (BOTTOM VIEW) Mounting area Connection sockets pin DIP terminal General tolerance: ±. ±. Note: The AXSK is recommended as a compatible connection socket. Count input input Q-E, }-w, e-t and S-F are connected internally. An external power supply is required. Counters Input method. Standard type Contact input Non- input type Panel mounting type PC board mounting type Transistor input Transistor input Contact input NPN transistor NPN transistor Count input input Count input input Count input input Count input input (W and R are connected internally.) V V (W and R are connected internally.) V DC V DC Notes). When using contact input, since current flow is small from terminals and on the panel mounting type and terminals e to t and S to F on the PC board mounting type, please use relays and switches with high contact reliability.. When using transistor input, use the following as a guide for which transistors (Tr) to use for inputting. (Collector withstand Q V, leakage current < µa) Contact input Voltage input type NPN transistor Transistor input PNP transistor Free input type Count input input +V +V Count input input +V +V Count input input Count input or or or input Notes). and. (The input and reset circuits are functionally insulated.). When using transistor (Tr) input, use the right as a guide. (Collector withstand Q V, leakage current < µa). Be aware that the application of that exceeds the range of the H level to the count input terminal, and the application of to the reset input terminal, can cause damage to the internal elements.

72 . Backlight type Contact input Voltage input type NPN transistor Transistor input PNP transistor Backlight connection Count input input Count input +V +V input +V +V Count input input Green V DC Red V V V DC Notes). Do not reverse the polarities when connecting the DC for the backlight.. and. (The input and reset circuits are functionally insulated.). When using transistor (Tr) input, use the right as a guide. (Collector withstand Q V, leakage current < µa). Be aware that the application of that exceeds the range of the H level to the count input terminal, and the application of to the reset inpu terminal, can cause damage to the internal elements. Explanation of operation. Counting takes place when the count input signal is.. Counting resumes again when the count value reaches (full scale value) and then returns to with a new count input.. No measurement takes place when a reset is input. ) When reset is, resetting takes place and the count becomes. ) Press the front reset button when you want to reset manually (only panel installation type). Note) Be aware that battery life will decrease if the count input or reset input are left. Count input input Count value Note) Count becomes when the reset input is turned while the count signal is being input. Counters

73 LCH Counters Cautions for use. Non- input type For both panel mounting and PC board mounting types ) Never apply to the non- input type. This will damage the internal elements. Also, since there is a possibility of erroneous operation, do not connect in parallel the inputs of a non- input type and another counter from a single input signal. ) Since the current flow is very small from the count input and reset input terminals ( and on the panel mounting type and terminals e to t and S to F on the PC board mounting type) please use relays and switches with high contact reliability. ) When inputting with an open collector of a transistor, use a transistor for small signals in which ICBO is µa or less and always input with no. ) When wiring, try to keep all the input lines to the count and reset inputs as short as possible and avoid running them together with high and power transmission lines or in a power conduit. Also, malfunctions might occur if the floating capacitance of these wires exceeds pf ( m. ft. for parallel wires of mm ). When using khz mode, use with a wiring floating capacitance of pf ( m. ft. for parallel wires of mm ). In particular, when using shielded wiring, be careful of the capacitance between wires. PC board mounting type ) For external power supply use manganese dioxide or lithium batteries (CR type: V). ) Always reset after external power is applied and confirm that the display reads. ) Make the wiring from the battery to the counter unit as short as absolutely possible. Also, be careful of polarity. ) Calculate battery life with the following formula. t = A/I t: battery life [h] I: LCH current consumption [ma] A: battery capacity until minimum operation is reached [mah] ) Hand solder to the lead terminal. Do not dip solder. With the tip of the soldering iron at C F perform soldering within seconds (for to W soldering iron).. Voltage input type ) Be aware that applying more than V DC to count input terminals and, and reset input terminals and will cause damage to the internal elements. ) For external resetting use H level (application of. to V DC) between reset terminals and of the rear terminals. In this case, connect + to terminal and to terminal. This is the valid polarity; therefore, the counter will not work if reversed. ) When wiring, try to keep all the input lines to the count and reset inputs as short as possible and avoid running them together with high and power transmission lines or in a power conduit. Also, malfunctions might occur if the floating capacitance of these wires exceeds pf ( m. ft. for parallel wires of mm ).. Free input type ) Use count input terminals and for free input and reset terminals and for non- input. ) Be aware that the application of that exceeds the range of the H level to the count input terminal, and the application of to the reset input terminal, can cause damage to the internal elements. ) Since the current flow is very small from reset input terminal, please use relays and switches with high contact reliability. ) When inputting a reset with an open collector of a transistor, use a transistor for small signals in which ICBO is µa or less and always input with no. ) To reset externally, short reset input terminals and on the rear. ) Input uses a high impedance circuit; therefore, erroneous operation may occur if the influence of induction is present. If you plan to use wiring for the input signal that is m or longer (wire capacitance pf/m at normal temperature), we recommend the use of a CR filter or the connection of a bleeder resistor.. How to reset multiple panel mounting type counters all at once (input is the same for count) Non- input type D D D Tr or Notes). Use the following as a guide for choosing transistors used for input (Tr). Leakage current < µa. Use as small a diode (D) as possible in the forward so that the between terminals and during reset input meets the standard value (. V). ( At IF = µa, forward. and higher.) Voltage input type +V +V R Tr or Note) Make sure that H (reset ) level is at least. V.. Backlight luminance To prevent varying luminance among backlights when using multiple Backlight types, please use the same backlight power supply. V DC Green. Environment for use ) Ambient conditions Over category II, pollution level Indoor use Acceptable temperature and humidity range: to + C, to %RH (with no condensation at C) Under m elevation ) Use the main unit in a location that matches the following conditions. There is minimal dust and no corrosive gas. There is no combustible or explosive gas. There is no mechanical vibration or impacts. There is no exposure to direct sunlight. Located away from large-volume electromagnetic switches and power lines with large electrical currents. ) Connect a breaker that conforms to EN- or EN- to the input section. ) Applied should be protected with an overcurrent protection device (example: T A, V AC time lag fuse) that conforms to the EN/IEC standards. (Free input type) Red V DC

74 PRESET COUNTERS LCH Features. Preset function equipped in half size ( mm.. inch).. Display has backlight for instant recognition. Counting Counting up Red or (Green) (backlight).. mm. inch Character Height (previously mm. inch) Easy-to read character height increased from mm to. mm. inch to. inch..mm.inch Green or (Red) (backlight) (Lit or Flashing). Plenty of Digits RoHS Directive compatibility information Green or Red can be selected at setup. Red or (Green) (backlight) (Lit or Flashing) Lit or Flashing can be selected at setup. digits. Counting Speed Switchable between Hz and khz. Conforms to IP Protective Construction (Front panel surface) Weatherproofing supported by using optional mounting frame and rubber gasket. Includes reassuring lock mode and lock switch to prevent erroneous operation.. s are constructed to protect fingers to ensure safety.. Compliant with UL, c-ul and CE. Counters Product types No. digits Counting speed Output mode Output Part No. digits Options Hz/ khz switchable Maintain output/hold count Maintain output/over count One shot/over count One shot/recount Mounting frame Rubber gasket Note: Mounting frame and rubber gasket are not included. Note: Mounting frame and rubber gasket are not included. Transistor (a) V DC LCHP-FEW-B-DCV Use for waterproofing (front panel surface) ATH ATH

75 LCH Counters Specifications Rating Item Rated operating Rated power consumption Rated control capacity Input mode Max. counting speed Counting input input Input signal Output mode Display method Digit Memory Contact arrangement Electrical life (contact) Allowable operating range Electrical Break down (Initial value) Insulation resistance (Initial value) Functional vibration resistance Destructive vibration resistance Mechanical Functional shock resistance Destructive shock resistance Operation temperature Storage temperature conditions Ambient humidity Protective construction * The factory default preset value is set to. Applicable standard EMC (EMI)EN-- Radiation interference electric field strength Noise terminal (EMS)EN-- Static discharge immunity RF electromagnetic field immunity EFT/B immunity Conductivity noise immunity Power frequency magnetic field immunity Descriptions V DC Max.. W ma V DC Addition/Subtraction (selectable by front switch) Hz/ khz (selectable by slide switch on side) Min. input signal width:. ms at Hz/. ms at khz, time : time = : Min. input signal width: Min. ms Non- input using contacts or open-collector connection Input impedance; when shorted: Max. kω, when open: Min. kω Residual : Max. V Maintain output/hold count Maintain output/over count One shot/over count One shot/recount (Selectable by front switch) -segment LCD (Switch between red and green for backlight, and between lit and flashing for count up.) to ( digits to + digits) ( to for preset value) EEP-ROM (Overwriting times: operations or more) Form A (Open collector) operations (at rated control ) to % of rated operating Between input and output:, V AC, for min. Between input and output: MΩ (at V DC) to Hz ( cycle/min), Single amplitude:. mm ( min. on axes) to Hz ( cycle/min), Single amplitude:. mm ( hr. on axes) Min. m/s ( times on axes) Min. m/s ( times on axes) to C + to + F (without frost or dew) to + C to + F (without frost or dew) to % RH (at C F, non-condensing) IP (front panel with mounting bracket and rubber gasket) EN Group ClassA EN Group ClassA EN-- EN-- EN-- EN-- EN-- kv contact kv air V/m AM modulation ( MHz to GHz) V/m pulse modulation ( MHz to MHz) kv (power supply line) kv (signal line) V/m AM modulation (. MHz to MHz) A/m ( Hz)

76 Part names. Front reset key This key resets the count value. It does not work when the lock switch is.. Mode key Use to switch between each mode.. Setting key Used to set digits of preset values or set each mode.. Set key Use to set preset values or to switch between modes.. Lock switch Disable the operation of the front panel reset key and the mode key. With the lock switch on, is displayed for about two seconds when the reset key or mode switch is operated.. Count speed switch Use this switch to switch the count speed between Hz and khz. COUNTER RESET MODE SET LCH Lock switch (unit display ) Count speed switch (unit display ) : Default setting when shipped. (Terminal block side) (LCD side) (Terminal block side) khz (LCD side) Hz Notes:. Make the switch setting before installing to panel.. Please turn the power off if you change the setting of the count speed switch when the power is on. The setting will become valid when the power is turned back on. Dimensions External dimensions RESET MODE SET COUNTER. mm inch General tolerance: ±. ±. When installing the one-touch installation type model, make sure that the installation spring does not pinch the rubber gasket. To prevent the installation spring from pinching the rubber gasket:. Set the rubber gasket on both ends of the installation spring (left and right).. Confirm that the installation spring is not pinching the rubber gasket, and then insert and fix the installation spring in place from the rear of the timer unit. Counters. LCH Panel cut out dimensions The standard panel cut out is shown below. Use the mounting bracket (ATH) and the rubber gasket (ATH). (Only installation frame type) When installing repeatedly (sealed installation) (Only installation frame type) min.. min A +. A=( n-.) A=(. n-.) Notes:. Suitable installation panel thickness is to. mm. to. inch.. Waterproofing will be lost when installing repeatedly (sealed installation). +.

77 LCH Counters How to set. Preset value setting mode This is the mode for setting preset values. Press the MODE key. Set the digit. Set the value. ) Pressing the MODE key takes you to the preset value setting mode. ) Pressing the setting key moves the flashing digit left by one. Following the highest digit it returns to the lowest digit and each time the digit setting key is pressed it moves one to the left. ) Pressing the set key increases the value by one. (After it returns to and then changes to,,, etc.) ) Pressing the front panel reset key sets the displayed preset value and returns you to the regular operation mode. ) In the preset value setting mode if you do not operate the digit setting key or the set key for ten seconds or more you will be returned to regular operation. In this case the preset value will not change.. Lock mode This mode prohibits everything except the preset value setting mode. + Press the SET key while pressing the MODE key. Sample display in preset value setting mode (when preset value is ) Un-Lock Lock ) Pressing the set key while holding down the mode key takes you to the lock mode. ) The display reads Un-Lock after entering the lock mode (initial setting). ) Pressing the setting key changes the display between Lock and Unlock. ) Pressing the front panel reset key sets the content displayed and returns you to regular operation mode. Note: You will not be returned to regular operation mode if you do not press the front panel reset key. ) When the lock mode display reads Lock, you will not be able to move to the backlight setting mode, the input setting mode, or the output setting mode.. Backlight setting mode This is the mode for setting the backlight during count up. + Press the SET key while pressing the MODE key. Display after entering lock mode (Example showing Un-Lock.) (Example showing Lit red Lit green Lock.) ) Pressing the SET key two times while holding down the MODE key takes you to the backlight setting mode. ) The display in the backlight setting mode reads LEd Display after entering the backlight setting mode. Flashes green Flashes red ) The LED backlight will be red (initial setting). ) The backlight changes from flashing green to flashing red to lit green and to red with each press of the setting key. ) Pressing the front panel reset key se the current backlight color and returns you to regular operation mode. Note: You will not be returned to regular operation mode if you do not press the front panel rese key.. Input setting mode This is the mode for setting addition or subtraction. + Press the SET key while pressing the MODE key. Addition Subtraction ) Pressing the SET key three times while holding down the MODE key take you to the input setting mode. ) The display after entering the input setting mode reads UP (initial setting). Display after entering input setting mode (Example showing UP ) ) Pressing the setting key changes the display to dn (subtraction) and pressin it again changes it to UP (addition). Th display alternates between dn and UP (Example showing dn ) ) Pressing the front panel reset key se the content displayed and returns you t regular operation mode. Note: You will not be returned to regular operation mode if you do not press the front panel rese key.

78 . Output setting mode This sets the operation mode. + Press the SET key while pressing the MODE key. HOLD-A SHOT-B ) Pressing the SET key four times while holding down the MODE key takes you to the output setting mode. ) The display reads HoLd-A (initial setting) after entering the output setting mode. ) Pressing the setting key causes the display to change as follows: HOLD-B (Output maintain/over count I) SHOT-A (One shot/over count) HOLD-B SHOT-A ) Lock mode + Press the SET key while pressing the MODE key. Un-Lock Lock When the lock is set, you cannot enter modes other than backlight setting mode. ) Backlight setting mode + Press the SET key while pressing the MODE key. ) Input setting mode + Press the SET key while pressing the MODE key. ) Output setting mode + Press the SET key while pressing the MODE key. Lit red Lit green Addition HOLD-A SHOT-B Flashes green Flashes red Subtraction HOLD-B SHOT-A Mode changes as follows by pressing the SET key while holding down the MODE key. Lock mode Backlight setting mode Output setting mode Input setting mode Front panel reset key Regular operation mode SHOT-B (One shot/recount I) HOLD-A (Output maintain/hold count) ) Pressing the front panel reset key sets the display content and returns you to regular operation mode. Note: You will not be returned to regular operation mode if you do not press the front panel reset key. Please be aware that after doing a front panel reset key and returning to regular operation mode, the preset values, count value and output will be as shown in this table. Lock mode Backlight setting mode Input setting mode Output setting mode Preset value Note: sign: No change Count value Output change Addition: Subtraction: Preset value Addition: Subtraction: Preset value OF OF Counters Changing the preset value. It is possible to change the preset value even during counting. However, be aware of the following points. ) If the preset value is changed to less than the count value with counting set to the addition direction, counting will continue until it reaches full scale, returns to zero, and then reaches the new preset value. If the preset value is changed to a value above the count value, counting will continue until the count value reaches the new preset value. ) Suppose that the counter is preset to count down. Whether a preset count down value is smaller or larger than the count value, the counter counts down to (zero).. If the preset value is changed to, the counter will not complete countup. It starts counting up when the counting value comes to (zero) again. ) Addition (up-count) input when counting is set to the addition direction, counting will continue until full scale is reached, return to zero, and then complete count-up. ) Subtraction (down-count) input when counting is set to the subtraction direction counting will continue until full scale is reached, and then the display will change to. Compliance with the CE marking EMC Directive (//EEC) The LCH Preset Counter conforms to the EMC Directive as a simple counter. Applicable standards: EN--, EN--

79 LCH Operation mode Output mode Operation Example when input mode is either addition or Subject:ubtraction Output maintain/ hold count HOLD-A Output control is maintained after count-up completion and until resetting. During that time, the count display does not change from that at count-up completion. Output Counting able/unable Addition Subtraction Able n n n n n n Unable n n: Preset value Output maintain/ over count I HOLD-B One shot/ over count SHOT-A One shot/ recount I SHOT-B Output control is maintained after count-up completion and until resetting. However, counting is possible despite completion of count-up. Output control is maintained after count-up completion for a fixed time (approx. sec.). Counting is possible despite completion of count-up. Output control is maintained after count-up completion for a fixed time (approx. sec.). Counting is possible despite completion of count-up. However, reset occurs simultaneous with completion of count-up. While output is being maintained, restarting of the count is not possible. Output Counting able/unable Addition Subtraction Able n n n n n n Output Counting able/unable Addition Subtraction Counting able/unable Addition Subtraction Able n n n n n n n n+ n+ n+ n: Preset value One shot pulse width: approx. sec. n n+ n+ n+ n: Preset value n n n n n One shot pulse width: approx. sec. Output Able n n n n n Counters n: Preset value

80 Precautions in using the LCH series Cautions for use. Input and output connection ) Input connection () Contact input Use highly reliable metal plated contacts. Since the contact s bounce time leads directly to error in the count value, use contacts with as short a bounce time as possible. In general, select input to have a maximum counting speed of Hz. Count input input () Non-contact input (Transistor input) Connect with an open collector. Use transistors whose characteristics satisfy the criteria given below. VCEO = Min. V IC = Min. ma ICBO = Max. µa Also, use transistors with a residual of less than V when the transistor is on. * The short-circuit impedance should be less than kω. (When the impedance is Ω, the current coming from the count input terminal is approximately ma and from the reset input terminal is approximately. ma.) Also, the open-circuit impedance should be more than kω. Count input input () Input wiring When wiring, use shielded wires or metallic wire tubes, and keep the wire lengths as short as possible. ) Output connection Since the transistor output of counter is insulated from the internal circuitry by a photo-coupler, it can be used as an NPN output or PNP (equal value) output. As NPN output Load As PNP output Load Load s power supply Load s power supply. Self-diagnosis function If a malfunction occurs, one of the following displays will appear. Display Err- Err- Contents Malfunctioning CPU Malfunctioning memory* Output condition Restoration procedure Enter front reset key or restart counter * Includes the possibility that the EEP-ROM s life has expired. Preset values after restoration The preset value at start-up before the CPU malfunction occurred.. Terminal connection ) When wiring the terminals, refer to the terminal layout and wiring diagrams and be sure to perform the wiring properly without errors. An external power supply is required in order to run the main unit. Power should be applied between terminals () and (). Terminal () acts as the positive connection and terminal () as the negative. ) After turning the counter off, make sure that any resulting induced or residual is not applied to power supply terminals () through (). (If the power supply wire is wired parallel to the high wire or power wire, an induced may be generated at the power supply terminal.) ) Have the power supply pass through a switch or relay so that it is applied at one time. Counters

81 Precautions in using the LCH series Counters Cautions for use. Insulation sheet Before using a panel mounting type, please pull and remove the insulation sheet from the side of the product in the direction of the arrow. In consideration that the product might be stored for long periods without being used, an insulation sheet is inserted before shipping. Remove the insulation sheet and press the front reset button. LCH total counter (one-touch installation type) Insulation sheet LCH total counter (installation frame type) Insulation sheet button button. Waterproof construction LCH total counter (installation frame type) The operation part of the panel installation type (installation frame type) is constructed to prevent water from entering the unit and a rubber gasket is provided to prevent water from entering the gap between the unit and the panel cutout. There must be sufficient pressure applied to the rubber gasket to prevent water from entering. Be sure to use the mounting reinforcement screws when installing the mounting frame (ATH). Note: The one-touch installation type is not waterproof. Mounting frame (ATH) LCH preset counter ) The front plate will not be waterproof when this product is installed on a panel. To make the front plate waterproof, please install the following. When using the waterproof type (IP: panel front only), install the counter to the front plate with mounting frame ATH (sold separately) and rubber gasket ATH (sold separately). Be sure to tighten using mounting screws. Mounting frame (ATH) Rubber gasket (ATH) When installing the mounting frame and rubber gasket please remove the pre-attached o-ring. ) Panel installation order () Remove o-ring. () Place rubber gasket. () Insert counter into panel. () Insert mounting frame from the rear. () Secure with mounting screws (two locations). Do not use in the following environments ) In places where the temperature changes drastically. ) In places where humidity is high and there is the possibility of dew. (When dew forms the display may vanish and other display errors may occur.). Conditions of use ) Do not use on places where there is flammable or corrosive gas, lots of dust, presence of oil, or where the unit might be subject to strong vibrations or shocks. ) Since the cover is made of polycarbonate resin, do not use in places where the unit might come into contact with or be exposed to environments that contain organic solvents such as methyl alcohol, benzene and thinner, or strong alkali substances such as ammonia and caustic soda.. Cautions regarding battery replacement ) Remove wiring before replacing the battery. You may be electrocuted if you come into contact to a part where high is applied. ) Make sure you are not carrying a static electric charge when replacing the battery. ) Battery replacement procedure For LCH total counter (one-touch installation type) () Remove the up/down hook of the case using a tool. () Pull the unit away from the case. () Remove the battery from the side of the unit. Do not touch the display or other parts. () Before inserting wipe clean the surface of the new battery. () Insert the new battery with the + and sides in the proper position. () After replacing the battery, return the unit to the case. Verify that the hook of the case has properly engaged. () Before using, press the reset button on the front. Tool

82 For LCH total counter (installation frame type) () Remove the battery cover from the case. () Remove the battery from the side of the case. The battery will come loose if you put the battery side face down and lightly shake the unit. () Before inserting wipe clean the surface of the new battery. () Insert the new battery with the + and sides in the proper position. () After replacing the battery, return the battery cover to the case. Verify that the hook of the battery cover is properly engaged. () Before using press the reset button on the front. + side side. Terminal connection Tighten the terminal screws with a torque of. N cm or less. Counters

83 LCH DIN SIZE LCD ELECTRIC COUNTER LCH Counters. -digit display -digit display Pin type. Product types.. mm inch type UL File No.: E C-UL File No.: E Features Bright and Easy-to-Read Display A brand new bright -color backlight LCD display. The easy-to-read screen in any location makes checking and setting procedures a cinch. Simple Operation Seesaw buttons make operating the unit even easier than before. Short Body of only. mm. inch (screw type) or. mm. inch (pin type) With a short body, it easily installs in even narrow control panels. Conforms to IP s Weather Resistant Standards The water-proof panel keeps out water and dirt for reliable operation even in poor environments. and Pin Type are Both Standard Options The two terminal types are standard options to support either front panel installation or embedded installation. Changeable Panel Cover Also offers a black panel cover to meet your design considerations. -digit or -digit display Two sizes of displays are offered for you to choose the one that suits your needs. Compliant with UL, c-ul and CE. Digit Count speed Output mode Output Power down insurance Terminal type Part number pins LCH-R-ACV to V AC pins LCH-R-ACV LCH-R-ACVS pins LCH-R-ACV Relay V AC pins LCH-R-ACV (c) LCH-R-ACVS pins LCH-R-DCV to V DC pins LCH-R-DCV LCH-R-DCVS pins LCH-T-ACV to V AC pins LCH-T-ACV LCH-T-ACVS pins LCH-T-ACV Transistor V AC pins LCH-T-ACV (a) LCH-T-ACVS pins LCH-T-DCV to V DC pins LCH-T-DCV Hz (cps)/ LCH-T-DCVS KHz (Kcps) Available pins LCH-R-ACV switchable to V AC pins LCH-R-ACV LCH-R-ACVS pins LCH-R-ACV Relay V AC pins LCH-R-ACV (c) LCH-R-ACVS pins LCH-R-DCV to V DC pins LCH-R-DCV LCH-R-DCVS pins LCH-T-ACV to V AC pins LCH-T-ACV LCH-T-ACVS pins LCH-T-ACV Transistor V AC pins LCH-T-ACV (a) LCH-T-ACVS to V DC pins pins LCH-T-DCV LCH-T-DCV LCH-T-DCVS * A rubber gasket (ATC) and a mounting frame (AT-DA) are included.

84 Part names -digit display type DIP switches COUNTER Counter display Controlled output indicator indicator OP. RST LOCK Set value display Lock indicator switch Lock switch RESET LOCK LCH UP DOWN Up keys Down keys (Same for screw terminal type) -digit display type DIP switches COUNTER Counter display Controlled output indicator indicator OP. RST LOCK Set value display Lock indicator switch RESET LOCK Up keys Lock switch LCH (Same for screw terminal type) Specifications Rating Contact Life Electrical Mechanical conditions Item Rated operating Rated frequency Rated power consumption Rated control capacity Input mode Max. counting speed Counting input (Input, ) input Lock input Input signal Output mode One shot output time Indication Digit Memory Contact arrangement Initial contact resistance Contact material Mechanical (contact) Electrical (contact) Allowable operating range Break down (Initial value) Insulation resistance (At V DC) (Initial value) Temperature rise Vibration resistance Shock resistance Connection Protective construction Functional Destructive Functional Destructive Ambient temperature Ambient humidity Air pressure Ripple rate Relay output type AC type DC type to V AC, V AC to V DC / Hz common Max. V A Max. W A V AC (resistive load) Addition (UP)/Subtraction (DOWN)/Direction (DIR)/Individuality (IND)/Phase (PHASE) modes selectable by DIP switch Hz/ khz (selectable by DIP switch) Min. input signal width:. ms at Hz/. ms at khz, time: time = : Min. input signal width: ms, ms (selected by DIP switch) Min. input signal width: ms Contact or Open collector input/input impedance: k or less, Input residual : V or less, Open impedance: k or more, Max. energized : V DC HOLD-A/HOLD-B/HOLD-C/SHOT-A/SHOT-B/SHOT-C/SHOT-D ( modes selectable by DIP switch) Approx. s -segment LCD, Counter value (backlight red LED), Setting value (backlight yellow LED) -digit display type to ( digits to + digits) ( to for setting) -digit display type to ( digits to digits) ( to for setting) EEP-ROM (Overwriting times: ope. or more) Form C Form A (Open collector) m (at A V DC) Ag alloy/au flush x ope. (Except for switch operation parts) ope. (At rated control ) ope. (At rated control ) to % of rated operating Between live and dead metal parts:, Vrms for min (-pin type) Between input and output:, Vrms for min Between open contacts:, Vrms for min Between live and dead metal parts: Min. M (-pin type) Between input and output: Min. M Between open contact: Min. M Transistor output type AC type DC type to V AC, V AC to V DC / Hz common Max. V A Max. W ma V DC Between live and dead metal parts:, Vrms for min (-pin type) Between input and output:, V AC for min Between live and dead metal parts: Min. M (-pin type) Between input and output: Min. M Max. C (under the flow of nominal operating current at nominal ) to Hz ( cycle/min), single amplitude:. mm ( min on axes) to Hz ( cycle/min), single amplitude:. mm ( h on axes) Min. m. ft./s ( times on axes) Min. m. ft./s ( times on axes) C to C + F to + F Max. % RH (non-condensing) to, h Pa % or less % or less -pin/-pin/screw terminal IP (front panel with a rubber gasket) Counters

85 LCH Applicable standard Safety standard EN- Pollution Degree /Over Category II EMC Dimensions -digit display type (EMI)EN-- Radiation interference electric field strength Noise terminal (EMS)EN-- Static discharge immunity RF electromagnetic field immunity EFT/B immunity Surge immunity Conductivity noise immunity Power frequency magnetic field immunity Voltage dip/instantaneous stop/voltage fluctuation immunity. COUNTER.. type: M. (Flush mount).. EN Group ClassA EN Group ClassA EN-- kv contact kv air EN-- V/m AM modulation ( MHz to GHz) V/m pulse modulation ( MHz to MHz) EN-- kv (power supply line) kv (signal line) EN-- kv (power line) EN-- V/m AM modulation (. MHz to MHz) EN-- A/m ( Hz) EN-- ms, % (rated ) ms, % (rated ), ms, % (rated ), ms, % (rated ) mm inch General tolerance: ±. ±. Pin type (Flush mount/surface mount). OP. RST LOCK.... RESET UP LOCK Counters LCH DOWN -digit display type..... type: M. (Flush mount) Pin type (Flush mount/surface mount).... COUNTER. OP. RST LOCK.... RESET LOCK LCH....

86 Dimensions for flush mounting (with adapter installed) type: M. Pin type Rubber gasket ATC (supplied) COUNTER Panel Mounting frame for flush mount AT-DA (supplied) Rubber gasket ATC (supplied) COUNTER Panel Mounting frame for flush mount AT-DA (supplied) -pin type (p cap AD-RC sold separately) -pin type (p cap AT-DP sold separately). OP. RST LOCK RESET UP..... OP. RST LOCK RESET. LOCK LOCK LCH DOWN LCH.. Dimensions for front panel installations. (.). (.) ( ) Dimensions for -pin type. DIN rail terminal block -pin type: AT-DFK (sold separately) -pin type: AT-DFK (sold separately) Device installation rail AT-DLA (sold separately)... Installation panel cut-out dimensions The standard panel cut-out dimensions are shown below. Use the mounting frame (AT-DA) and rubber gasket (ATC). min min For connected installations A = ( n.). Note : The installation panel thickness should be between and mm. and. inch. Note : For connected installations, the waterproofing ability between the unit and installation panel is lost. A Terminal layouts and wiring diagrams -pin type Relay output type Input Input ~ Transistor output type -pin type Relay output type Input Input Input NC NO NO Input Lock ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ Transistor output type Input Input Lock ~ Note) For connecting the output leads of the transistor output type, refer to ) Transistor output on page. + ~ type + ~ Relay output type Input Input Lock ~ NO NC Transistor output type + ~ Input Input Lock ~ Counters

87 LCH Counters Setting the operation mode and set value Setting procedure ) Setting the operation mode (input mode and output mode) Set the input and output modes with the DIP switches on the side of the counter. DIP switches Item DIP switch Output mode Refer to table Minimum reset input signal width ms ms Maximum counter speed Hz khz Input mode Refer to table DIP switches (See note ) (Same for -digit and screw terminal types) Setting procedure ) Setting the set value Set the set value with the UP and DOWN keys on the front of the counter. Front display section -digit display type Counter display Set value display Controlled output indicator indicator Lock indicator UP keys Changes the corresponding digit of the set value in the addition direction (upwards). -digit display type Counter display Set value display Controlled output indicator indicator Lock indicator Changing the set value. It is possible to change the set value with the up and down keys (- digit type only) even during counting. However, be aware of the following points. ) If the set value is changed to less than the count value with counting set to the addition direction, counting will continue until it reaches full scale ( with the -digit type and with the -digit type), returns to zero, and then reaches the new set value. If the set value is changed to a value above the count value, counting will continue until the count value reaches the new set value. RESET LOCK OP. RST LOCK LCH RESET LOCK OP. RST LOCK UP DOWN DIP switch No. Output mode SHOT-A SHOT-B SHOT-C SHOT-D HOLD-A HOLD-B HOLD-C (See note ) Table : Setting the input mode DIP switch No. Input mode Addition input Subtraction input Directive input Independent input Phase input Notes:) The counter and set value displays will display DIP Err. Notes:) Set the DIP switches before installing the counter on the panel. Notes:) When the DIP SW setting is changed, turn off the power once. Notes:) The DIP switches are set as before shipping. COUNTER COUNTER LCH ) Suppose that the counter is preset to count down. Whether a preset countdown value is smaller or larger than the count value, the counter counts down to (Zero).. If the set value is changed to, the unit will not complete count-up. It starts counting up when the counting value comes to (Zero) again. ) Up-count (addition) input when counting is set to the addition direction, counting will continue until full scale is reached ( with the -digit type and with the -digit type), return to zero, and then complete count-up. Table : Setting the output mode (See note ) (See note ) (See note ) DOWN keys Changes the corresponding digit of the set value in the subtraction direction (downwards). RESET switch s the counting value and the output. LOCK switch Locks the operation of all keys on the counter. UP keys Changes the corresponding digit of the set value in the addition direction (upwards). RESET switch s the counting value and the output. LOCK switch Locks the operation of all keys on the counter. ) Down-count (subtraction) input when counting is set to the subtraction direction, counting will continue until full scale is reached (- with the -digit type and - with the -digit type), and then the display will change to with the -digit type and with the -digit type. The counting value does not become and so the counter does not count up. ) For directive, independent, and phase input, when the counting value increases or decreases from the value and then returns back to the value, count-up is completed.

88 Operation modes. Input mode: For the input mode, you can choose one of the following five modes UP DOWN DIR IND PHASE Input mode Operation *Minimum input signal width Hz:. ms; khz:. ms IN or IN works as an input block (gate) for the other input. IN H L A A A A Addition UP H IN L Counting (addition) Blocked n- n- n- n Counting (subtraction) n n- n- n- Count-up completed IN H L Blocked Blocked A A A A Subtraction DOWN H IN L Counting (addition) Counting (subtraction) n- n n n- n- n- n- Count-up completed Directive IN is the counting input and IN is the addition or subtraction directive input. IN adds at L level and subtracts at H level. * A must be more than the minimum input signal width. IN IN H L H L A A A A Addition Subtraction Addition Counters DIR Counting * A must be more than the minimum input signal width. IN is addition input and IN is subtraction input. IN H L Independent IN H L IND Counting * IN and IN are completely independent, so there is no restriction on signal timing. Addition when the IN phase advances beyond IN, and subtraction when the IN phase advances beyond IN. IN IN H L H L Phase advance B B Phase retard Phase PHASE Counting * B must be more than the minimum input signal width.

89 LCH. Output mode For the output mode, you can choose one of the following seven modes HOLD-A HOLD-B HOLD-C SHOT-A SHOT-B SHOT-C SHOT-D Output mode Operation (Example when input mode is either addition or subtraction) Maintain output Hold count HOLD-A Output control is maintained after count-up completion and until resetting. During that time, the count display does not change from that at count-up completion. Counting (addition) Counting (subtraction) Counting able/unable Output control n- n- n- n Able Unable * n: Set value Maintain output Over count I HOLD-B Output control is maintained after count-up completion and until resetting. However, counting is possible despite completion of count-up. Counting (addition) Counting (subtraction) Counting able/unable Output control n- n- n n+ n+ - - Able * n: Set value Maintain output Over count II HOLD-C Output control is maintained after count-up completion and until the next signal enters. However, counting is possible despite completion of countup. Counting (addition) Counting (subtraction) Counting able/unable n- n- n n+ n+ - - Able Output control Counters One shot Over count SHOT-A Output control is maintained after count-up completion for a fixed time (approx. sec). Counting is possible despite completion of count-up. * n: Set value Counting (addition) Counting (subtraction) Counting able/unable n- n- n n+ n+ - - Able Output control * n: Set value Approx. s One shot Recount I SHOT-B Output control is maintained after count-up completion for a fixed time (approx. sec). Counting is possible despite completion of count-up. However, reset occurs simultaneous with completion of count-up. While output is being maintained, restarting of the count is not possible. Counting (addition) Counting (subtraction) Counting able/unable * n: Set value n- n- n n- n- (automatic) Able Output control Approx. s One shot Recount II SHOT-C Output control is maintained after count-up completion for a fixed time (approx. sec). Counting is possible despite completion of count-up. However, reset occurs simultaneous with output. Counting (addition) Counting (subtraction) Counting able/unable Output control * n: Set value n- n n+ - n n- Able Approx. s (automatic) One shot Hold count SHOT-D Output control is maintained after count-up completion for a fixed time (approx. sec). During that time, the count display does not change from that at count-up completion. occurs simultaneous with output. Counting (addition) Counting (subtraction) Counting able/unable Output control * n: Set value Able n- n n n- Unable Approx. s (automatic) Able

90 LCH-S DIN SIZE LCD ELECTRIC COUNTER LCH-S -digit type -digit type pin type type Product types UL File No.: E C-UL File No.: E Features Bright and Easy-to-Read Display A brand new bright -color backlight LCD display. The easy-to-read screen in any location makes checking and setting procedures a cinch. Easy to use, simple operation, simple settings Operation modes (input/output modes) can be set easily, using DIP switches on the side panel. Values can be set easily, using key switches on the front panel. Pre-scaling function provided A pre-scaling function enables conversion of lengths and volumes to any desired values, and displays the results. Built-in power supply for highcapacitance sensor An internal power supply drives a VDC, ma high-capacitance sensor. (AC power supply types only) Photoelectric switches, proximity switches and encoders can be directly connected. Dual-path AC sensor can be connected. Basic insulation between the power supply and the input terminal (only for the sensor type model with power supply) There is no need for caution when connecting between terminals. Conforms to IP s Weather Resistant Standards The water-proof panel keeps out water and dirt for reliable operation even in poor environments. -digit or -digit display Two sizes of displays are offered for you to choose the one that suits your needs. and Pin Type are Both Standard Options The two terminal types are standard options to support either front panel installation or embedded installation. Compliant with UL, c-ul and CE. Counters Digit Count speed Output Operation Power down Additional function Terminal P/N insurane Relay - V AC Scale Factor Scale Factor Pin Screw LCH-PS-R-ACV LCH-PS-R-ACVS with V DC power supply Scale Factor / Voltage Signal Input Pin LCH-PSV-R-ACV Scale Factor / Voltage Signal Input Scale Factor Screw Pin LCH-PSV-R-ACVS LCH-S-R-V Scale Factor Screw LCH-S-R-VS Hz (cps) khz (kcps) switchable Transistor Relay - V DC / V AC - V AC Available Scale Factor / Voltage Signal Input Pin LCH-SV-R-V Scale Factor / Voltage Signal Input Scale Factor Scale Factor Scale Factor / Voltage Signal Input Scale Factor / Voltage Signal Input Scale Factor Scale Factor Screw Pin Screw Pin Screw Pin Screw LCH-SV-R-VS LCH-S-T-V LCH-S-T-VS LCH-SV-T-V LCH-SV-T-VS LCH-PS-R-ACV LCH-PS-R-ACVS with V DC power supply Scale Factor / Voltage Signal Input Pin LCH-PSV-R-ACV Scale Factor / Voltage Signal Input Scale Factor Scale Factor Screw Pin Screw LCH-PSV-R-ACVS LCH-S-R-V LCH-S-R-VS Scale Factor / Voltage Signal Input Pin LCH-SV-R-V Transistor - V DC / V AC Scale Factor / Voltage Signal Input Scale Factor Scale Factor Screw Pin Screw LCH-SV-R-VS LCH-S-T-V LCH-S-T-VS Scale Factor / Voltage Signal Input Pin LCH-SV-T-V Scale Factor / Voltage Signal Input Screw LCH-SV-T-VS

91 LCH-S Part names -digit display type DIP switches Controlled output indicator indicator OP. RST LOCK COUNTER Counter display Set value display Lock indicator switch Set/lock switch RESET SET/ LOCK LCH UP DOWN Up keys Down keys (Same for screw terminal type) -digit display type DIP switches Controlled output indicator indicator OP. RST LOCK COUNTER Counter display Set value display Lock indicator switch RESET SET/ LOCK Up keys Counters Specifications Rating Contact Life Electrical Mechanical conditions Set/lock switch Item Rated operating Rated frequency Rated power consumption Rated control capacity Input mode Max. counting speed Counting input (input, input ) input Lock input Input signal Output mode One shot output time Indication Digit Decimal point Pre-scaling Memory Power for senser Contact arrangement Initial contact resistance Contact material Mechanical (contact) Electrical (contact) range Initial withstand Initial insulation resistance (At V DC) Temperature rise Vibration resistance Shock resistance Connection Protective construction Functional Destructive Functional Destructive Ambient temperature Ambient humidity Air pressure LCH AC type to V Relay output type DC/AC type to V DC/ V AC / Hz common (Same for screw terminal type) Max. V A Max. W A V AC (resistive load) ma, V DC Addition (UP)/Subtraction (DOWN)/Direction (DIR)/Individuality (IND)/Phase (PHASE) modes selectable by DIP switches Hz, khz (selectable by DIP switches). ms at Hz/. ms at khz time: time = : Min. input signal width: ms, ms (selected by DIP switches) Min. input signal width: ms Contact, Open collector input/dc two-wire system sensor Input impedance: k or less, Input residual : V or less, Open impedance: k or less, Max. energized : V DC HOLD-A, HOLD-B, HOLD-C, SHOT-A, SHOT-B, SHOT-C, SHOT-D, modes selectable by DIP switches s,.s,.s,.s,.,.s -segment LCD, Counter value (backlight red LED), Setting value (backlight yellow LED) -digit display type to ( to for setting) -digit display type to ( to for setting) Can be set to three digits. to. (-digit type),. to. (-digit type) EEP-ROM (Overwriting times: ope. or more) V DC (±%) ma Max. Form C Form A (Open collector) m (at A V DC) Ag alloy/au flush x ope. (Except for switch operation parts) ope. (At rated control ) ope. (At rated control ) to V AC. to. V DC,. to. V AC Between live and dead metal parts:, Vrms for min (pin type) Between input and output:, Vrms for min Between live and dead metal parts: Min. M (pin type) Between input and output: Min. M Max. C (under the flow of nominal operating current at nominal ) to Hz ( cycle/min), single amplitude:. mm ( min on axes) to Hz ( cycle/min), single amplitude:. mm ( h on axes) Min. m/s ( times on axes) Min. m/s ( times on axes) C to C + F to + F Max. % RH (non-condensing) to, h Pa -pin/screw terminal IP (front panel with a rubber gasket) Transistor output type DC/AC type to V DC/ V AC

92 Applicable standard Safety standard EN- Pollution Degree /Over Category II EMC Dimensions (EMI)EN-- Radiation interference electric field strength Noise terminal (EMS)EN-- Static discharge immunity RF electromagnetic field immunity EFT/B immunity Surge immunity Conductivity noise immunity Power frequency magnetic field immunity Voltage dip/instantaneous stop/voltage fluctuation immunity EN Group ClassA EN Group ClassA EN-- kv contact kv air EN-- V/m AM modulation ( MHz to GHz) V/m pulse modulation ( MHz to MHz) EN-- kv (power supply line) kv (signal line) EN-- kv (power line) EN-- V/m AM modulation (. MHz to MHz) EN-- A/m ( Hz) EN-- ms, % (rated ) ms, % (rated ), ms, % (rated ), ms, % (rated ) mm inch General tolerance: ±. ±. Pin type (Flush mount/surface mount) type: M. (Flush mount) COUNTER. OP. RESET UP s (.) (.) (.) (.) SET/LOCK LCH DOWN.. (* -digit display type has the same dimensions.) Dimensions for flush mounting (with adapter installed) type Rubber gasket ATC (supplied) Panel Mounting frame for flush mount AT-DA (supplied) *.*.*.*.*.* * With power supply for sensor * With power supply for sensor Pin type Rubber gasket ATC (supplied) Panel Mounting frame for flush mount AT-DA (supplied) Counters COUNTER COUNTER pin type pins cap: ATA (sold separately). OP. RST LOCK.. (. (.. OP. RST LOCK.. RESET SET/LOCK UP RESET SET/LOCK LCH DOWN LCH * With power supply for sensor * With power supply for sensor Dimensions for front panel installations DIN rail terminal block -pin type: AT-DFK (sold separately) Installation panel cut-out dimensions The standard panel cut-out dimensions are shown below. Use the mounting frame (AT-DA) and rubber gasket (ATC). Min For connected installations Device installation rail ATA (sold separately). (.). (.) * With power supply for sensor Min A When n units are attached in a continuous series, the dimension of (A) is: A = ( n.). Note : The installation panel thickness should be between and mm. and. inch. Note : For connected installations, the waterproofing ability between the unit and installation panel is lost.

93 LCH-S Terminal layouts and wiring diagrams Pin type * With power supply for sensor Relay output type Transistor output type Relay output type Transistor output type Input NC Input Input NC Input Input NO Input Input NO Input Lock Lock Lock Lock ~ + ~ ~ + ~ V DC V ma Max. type * With power supply for sensor Relay output type Transistor output type Relay output type Transistor output type Input Input Lock NC NO Input Input Lock V ~ ~ DC V ma Max. ~ ~ Input Input Input Input Lock NO Lock NC V DC V ma Max. V DC V ma Max. + ~ ~ + ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ Note) For connecting the output leads of the transistor output type, refer to ) Transistor output on page. Counters

94 Setting the operation mode and counter Setting procedure ) Setting the operation mode (input mode and output mode) Set the input and output modes with the DIP switches on the side of the counter. DIP switches Item DIP switch Output mode Refer to table Minimum reset input signal width ms ms Maximum counter setting Hz khz Input mode Refer to table Table : Setting the output mode DIP switch No. Output mode SHOT-A SHOT-B SHOT-C SHOT-D HOLD-A HOLD-B HOLD-C (See note ) DIP switches (See note ) (Same for -digit, screw-down terminal type) Table : Setting the input mode DIP switch No. Input mode Addition input Subtraction input Directive input Independent input Phase input (See note ) (See note ) (See note ) Notes:) The counter and set value displays will display DIP Err. Notes:) Set the DIP switches before installing the counter on the panel. Notes:) When the DIP SW setting is changed, turn off the power once. Notes:) The DIP switches are set as before shipping. Setting procedure ) Setting the set value Set the set value with the UP and DOWN keys on the front of the counter. Front display section -digit display type Counter display Set value display Controlled output indicator indicator Lock indicator UP keys Changes the corresponding digit of the set value in the addition direction (upwards) OP. RST LOCK RESET SET/LOCK LCH COUNTER UP DOWN DOWN keys Changes the corresponding digit of the set value in the subtraction direction (downwards) RESET switch s the counting value and the output SET/LOCK switch This is used to handle pre-scaling values, one-shot times, decimal point position settings, and key lock operations (to disable Up key, Down key, and key operations). Counters -digit display type Counter display Set value display Controlled output indicator indicator Lock indicator OP. RST LOCK RESET SET/LOCK COUNTER LCH UP keys Changes the corresponding digit of the set value in the addition direction (upwards) RESET switch s the counting value and the output SET/LOCK switch This is used to handle pre-scaling values, one-shot times, decimal point position settings, and key lock operations (to disable Up key, Down key, and key operations). Setting procedure ) Setting the input mode The input mode is set using the key switch in the [Display] section on the front of the counter. Decimal point position setting mode Holding down the [SET/LOCK] key, press the key for the second digit to access the decimal point position setting mode. Example -digit type Decimal point position setting mode display (Example shows default value displayed) When the setting mode has been accessed, release the [SET/LOCK] key.

95 LCH-S The decimal point is set using the [UP] and [DOWN] keys to specify the nd, rd, and th digits (this applies only to -digit models).(the st digit is set using the [UP] key or [DOWN] key in settings where there is no decimal point (this applies only to -digit models).) Example -digit type Example shows nd digit displayed using [UP] key Press the [RESET] key to set the displayed decimal point position and return to normal operation. Setting the pre-scaling value Holding down the [SET/LOCK] key, press the key for the first digit to access the pre-scaling value setting mode. Example) -digit type Example) -digit type Pre-scaling value setting mode displayed (Example shows default values displayed) When the setting mode has been accessed, release the [SET/LOCK] key. Use the [UP] or [DOWN] key to set the pre-scaling value (this applies only to -digit models). Select either:. to. (-digit) or. to. (-digit) Press the [RESET] key to set the displayed pre-scaling value and return to normal operation. Setting the one-shot output time Holding down the [SET/LOCK] key, press the key for the third digit to access the one-shot output time setting mode. Example -digit type One-shot output time setting mode displayed (Example shows default value displayed) Counters When the setting mode has been accessed, release the [SET/LOCK] key. Each time the st-digit [UP] key is pressed, the one-shot output time changes in the following sequence, moving to the right: s. s. s. s. s. s (With a -digit type, the [DOWN] key can also be used to move to the left.) Press the [RESET] key to set the displayed one-shot output time and return to normal operation. Changing the set value. It is possible to change the set value with the up and down keys (-digit type only) even during counting. However, be aware of the following points. ) If the set value is changed to less than the count value with counting set to the addition direction, counting will continue until it reaches full scale ( with the -digit type and with the -digit type), returns to zero, and then reaches the new set value. If the set value is changed to a value above the count value, counting will continue until the count value reaches the new set value. ) Suppose that thew counter is preset to count down. Whether a preset countdown value is smaller or larger than the count value, the counter counts down to (zero).. If the set value is changed to, the unit will not complete count-up. It starts counting up when the counting value comes to (zero) again. ) Up-count (addition) input When counting is set to the addition direction, counting will continue until full scale is reached ( with the -digit type and with the -digit type), return to zero, and then complete count-up. ) Down-count (subtraction) input When counting is set to the subtraction direction, counting will continue until full scale is reached (- with the -digit type and - with the -digit type), and then the display will change to with the -digit type and with the - digit type. The counting value does not become (zero) and so the counter does not count up. ) Directive, independent, and phase inputs. The counting value is counted up or down to any number other than once. When it comes to (zero) again, the counter starts counting up. Cautions for use For more information regarding the cautions for use of LCH series counter, refer to page PRECAUTIS IN USING THE LCH SERIES.

96 Operation mode. Input mode For the input mode, you can choose one of the following five modes UP DOWN DIR IND PHASE Input mode Addition UP Operation IN or IN works as an input block (gate) for the other input. *Minimum input signal width Hz:. ms; khz:. ms IN H L A A A A Blocked IN H L Counting (addition) n- n- n- n Counting (subtraction) n n- n- n- Count-up completed IN H L Blocked Blocked A A A A Subtraction DOWN H IN L Counting (addition) Counting (subtraction) n- n n n- n- n- n- Count-up completed Directive DIR IN is the counting input and IN is the addition or subtraction directive input. IN adds at L level and subtracts at H level. * A must be more than the minimum input signal width. IN IN Counting H L H L A A A A Addition Subtraction Addition Counters * A must be more than the minimum input signal width. IN is addition input and IN is subtraction input. IN H L Independent IND IN Counting H L * IN and IN are completely independent, so there is no restriction on signal timing. Addition when the IN phase advances beyond IN, and subtraction when the IN phase advances beyond IN. IN H L Phase PHASE IN Counting H L B B Phase advance Phase retard * B must be more than the minimum input signal width.

97 LCH-S. Output mode For the output mode, you can choose one of the following seven modes HOLD-A HOLD-B HOLD-C SHOT-A SHOT-B SHOT-C SHOT-D Output mode Operation (Example when input mode is either addition or subtraction) Maintain output Hold count HOLD-A Output control is maintained after count-up completion and until resetting. During that time, the count display does not change from that at count-up completion. Counting (addition) Counting (subtraction) Counting able/unable Output control n- n- n- n Able Unable * n: Set value Maintain output Over count I HOLD-B Output control is maintained after count-up completion and until resetting. However, counting is possible despite completion of count-up. Counting (addition) Counting (subtraction) Counting able/unable Output control n- n- n n+ n+ - - Able * n: Set value Maintain output Over count II HOLD-C Output control is maintained after count-up completion and until the next signal enters. However, counting is possible despite completion of countup. Counting (addition) Counting (subtraction) Counting able/unable n- n- n n+ n+ - - Able Output control Counters One shot Over count SHOT-A Output control is maintained after count-up completion for one shot output time. Counting is possible despite completion of count-up. * n: Set value Counting (addition) Counting (subtraction) Counting able/unable n- n- n n+ n+ - - Able Output control * n: Set value Approx. s One shot Recount I SHOT-B Output control is maintained after count-up completion for one shot output time. Counting is possible despite completion of count-up. However, reset occurs simultaneous with completion of count-up. While output is being maintained, restarting of the count is not possible Counting (addition) Counting (subtraction) Counting able/unable * n: Set value n- n- n n- n- (automatic) Able Output control Approx. s One shot Recount II SHOT-C Output control is maintained after count-up completion for one shot output time. Counting is possible despite completion of count-up. However, reset occurs simultaneous with output. Counting (addition) Counting (subtraction) Counting able/unable Output control * n: Set value n- n n+ - n n- Able Approx. s (automatic) One shot Hold count SHOT-D Output control is maintained after count-up completion for one shot output time. During that time, the count display does not change from that at count-up completion. occurs simultaneous with output. Counting (addition) Counting (subtraction) Counting able/unable Output control * n: Set value Able n- n n n- Unable Approx. s (automatic) Able

98 Input connections Signal input type ) Open collector ) For output (PC, sensor etc.) + V DC (Photoelectric sensor, proximity sensor, etc.) + V DC Output Output V V -pin type Screw-down terminal type V Lock Input input Input input V DC output -pin type Screw-down terminal type V Lock Input input Input V DC input output ) Contact input ) For a rotary encoder Relay, switches etc. V B phase A phase V DC -pin type Screw-down terminal type V Lock Input input Input input -pin type Screw-down terminal type V Input Input V DC output Counters * There is no V DC with - V DC/ V AC types. ) For a dual-line sensor + V -pin type Screw-down terminal type V Input Input input What is the prescale function? The prescale function converts the count into an actual value (amount) and displays it. Example For a device that outputs pulses when m has been fed:. Set decimal position to the last rd place.. Set the prescale value to. (/). m.ft COUNTER pulse RESET SET/LOCK LCH UP DOWN Can be set to easy-to-understand unit. Encoder COUNTER Prescale value:. * If a dual-line sensor is connected to a - VDC/ VAC type, VDC (. to. VDC) and VAC (. to. VAC) should be applied to the power supply of the counter. pulses RESET SET/LOCK LCH UP DOWN

99 LCH-W DIN SIZE LCD ELECTRIC COUNTER LCH-W Counters Product types Digit. -pin type Count speed Hz (cps)/ KHz (Kcps) switchable Output mode Output Output * A rubber gasket (ATC) and a mounting frame (AT-DA) are included. Part names... mm inch type UL File No.: E C-UL File No.: E Features Two-stage presetting (upper and lower limits) Count Output Output SET SET Bright and Easy-to-Read Display A brand new bright -color backlight LCD display. The easy-to-read screen in any location makes checking and setting procedures a cinch. Simple Operation Seesaw buttons make operating the unit even easier than before. Short Body of only. mm. inch (screw type) or. mm. inch (pin type) Output Relay (a+a) Transistor (a+a) to V AC V AC to V DC to V AC V AC to V DC With a short body, it easily installs in even narrow control panels. Conforms to IP s Weather Resistant Standards The water-proof panel keeps out water and dirt for reliable operation even in poor environments. and Pin Type are Both Standard Options The two terminal types are standard options to support either front panel installation or embedded installation. Changeable Panel Cover Also offers a black panel cover to meet your design considerations. Compliant with UL, c-ul and CE. Power down insurance Available Terminal type pins pins pins pins pins pins Part number LCH-W-R-ACV LCH-W-R-ACVS LCH-W-R-ACV LCH-W-R-ACVS LCH-W-R-DCV LCH-W-R-DCVS LCH-W-T-ACV LCH-W-T-ACVS LCH-W-T-ACV LCH-W-T-ACVS LCH-W-T-DCV LCH-W-T-DCVS Setting value / selector COUNTER Counter display : Used to set the corresponding digits for the count-up mode. Controlled output indicator Lock indicator switch Set/lock switch OP LOCK RESET SET/LOCK Sixth digit LCH-W First digit Set value display Up keys : Used to reset counting and its output. SET/LOCK key : Used to select between the Setting display and Setting display and to lock the keys (UP and RESET keys not responsive to touch). Used also to set and confirm the input mode.

100 Specifications Rating Contact Life Electrical Item Rated operating Rated frequency Rated power consumption Rated control capacity Input mode Counting speed Counting input (Input, ) input Input signal Output mode One shot output time Indication Digit Memory Contact arrangement Contact resistance (Intial value) Contact material Mechanical (contact) Electrical (contact) Allowable operating range Break down (Initial value) Insulation resistance (At V DC) (Initial value) Temperature rise Vibration Functional resistance Destructive Mechanical Shock Functional resistance Destructive Ambient temperature Ambient humidity conditions Air pressure Ripple rate Connection Protective construction Applicable standard AC type to V AC V AC Relay output type DC type to V DC AC type to V AC V AC Transistor output type DC type to V DC / Hz common / Hz common Max. V A Max. W Max. V A Max. W A, V AC (resistive load) ma, V DC Addition (UP)/Subtraction (DOWN)/Direction (DIR)/Individuality (IND)/Phase (PHASE) ( modes selectable by DIP switch) Hz(cps)/ KHz(cps) (selectable by DIP switch) Min. input signal width:. ms at Hz(cps)/. ms at KHz(cps) time: time = : Min. input signal width: ms, ms (selected by DIP switch) Contact or Open collector input/input impedance: k or less, Input residual : V or less, Open impedance: k or more, Max. energized : V DC Output. HOLD-B, C, D SHOT-A ( modes) Output. HOLD-A, B, C SHOT-A, B, C, D ( modes) (selectable by DIP switch) Approx. s -segment LCD, Counter value (backlight red LED), Setting value (backlight yellow LED) to ( digits to digits) ( to for setting) EEP-ROM (Overwriting times: ope. or more) Form A + Form A Form A + Form A (Open collector) m (at A V DC) Ag alloy/au flush Min. x ope. Min. ope. (At rated control ) Between live and dead metal parts:, Vrms for min (pin type) Between input and output:, Vrms for min Between open contacts:, Vrms for min Between live and dead metal parts: Min. M (pin type) Between input and output: Min. M Between open contact: Min. M to % of rated operating Min. ope. (At rated control ) Between live and dead metal parts:, Vrms for min Between input and output:, V AC for min Between live and dead metal parts: Min. M (pin type) Between input and output: Min. M Max. C (under the flow of nominal operating current at nominal ) to Hz ( cycle/min), single amplitude:. mm ( min on axes) to Hz ( cycle/min), single amplitude:. mm ( h on axes) Min. m/s ( times on axes) Min. m/s ( times on axes) C to C + F to + F Max. % RH (non-condensing) to, h Pa % or less % or less -pin/screw terminal IP (front panel with a rubber gasket) Counters Safety standard EN- Pollution Degree /Over Category II EMC (EMI)EN-- Radiation interference electric field strength Noise terminal (EMS)EN-- Static discharge immunity RF electromagnetic field immunity EFT/B immunity Surge immunity Conductivity noise immunity Power frequency magnetic field immunity Voltage dip/instantaneous stop/voltage fluctuation immunity EN Group ClassA EN Group ClassA EN-- kv contact kv air EN-- V/m AM modulation ( MHz to GHz) V/m pulse modulation ( MHz to MHz) EN-- kv (power supply line) kv (signal line) EN-- kv (power line) EN-- V/m AM modulation (. MHz to MHz) EN-- A/m ( Hz) EN-- ms, % (rated ) ms, % (rated ), ms, % (rated ), ms, % (rated )

101 LCH-W Dimensions LCH-W electrical counter. COUNTER.. type Pin type (Flush mount): M. Screw-down terminal type (Flush mount/surface mount)... Rubber. gasket ATC (supplied) COUNTER Panel mm inch General tolerance: ±. ±..... Mounting frame for flush mount AT-DA (supplied) OP. LOCK RESET. OP.. LOCK. RESET SET/LOCK SET/LOCK LCH-W LCH-W Dimensions for flush mounting (with adapter installed) type Pin type Rubber gasket ATC (supplied) COUNTER Panel Mounting frame for flush mount AT-DA (supplied) Rubber gasket ATC (supplied) COUNTER Panel Mounting frame for flush mount AT-DA (supplied) P cap AT-DP sold separately. OP. LOCK RESET..... OP. LOCK RESET.. SET/LOCK SET/LOCK LCH-W LCH-W Counters Dimensions for front panel installations DIN rail terminal block AT-DFK (sold separately) Installation panel cut-out dimensions The standard panel cut-out dimensions are shown below. Use the mounting frame (AT-DA) and rubber gasket (ATC). min.. For connected installations OP. LOCK RESET SET/LOCK.. COUNTER LCH-W Device installation rail AT-DLA (sold separately) min When n units are attached in a continuous series, the dimension of (A) is: A = ( n.) +. Note ): The installation panel thickness should be between and mm. and. inch. Note ): For connected installations, the waterproofing ability between the unit and installation panel is lost. A Terminal layouts and wiring diagrams Pin type Relay output type Transistor output type Input Input NO Input NO Input ~ + ~ ~ + ~ type Relay output type Input Input NO NO Transistor output type Input Input + ~ ~ + ~ ~ Note) For connecting the output leads of the transistor output type, refer to ) Transistor output on page.

102 Setting the operation mode and counter Setting procedure ) Setting the output mode (output, ) Set the output and output with the DIP switches on the side of the counter. The minimum input signal width and maximum counting speed for the reset are set at the same time. Table DIP switches DIP swith No. Output mode Item (Output ) (See note ) Output mode Refer to table HOLD B Output HOLD C Minimum reset input signal width ms ms HOLD D Maximum counter setting Hz khz SHOT A (See note ) Output mode Refer to table (See note ) Output (See note ) Setting procedure ) Setting the set value Set the set value with the UP keys on the front of the counter. (Same for screw terminal type) Counter display Set value display Controlled output indicator Setting / selection display (*Note) Lock indicator *Note: Pressing the [SET/LOCK] key switches the display between the set value and displays. Display either set value [] or [], and set the value. DIP switches (see note ) Sixth digit First digit Procedure ) Setting the input mode Set the input mode using the key and switch in the front display section on the counter front. () Hold down the SET/LOCK key and press the UP key for the first digit. The setting mode is accessed. () Now release the SET/LOCK key. () Press the UP key for the first digit and the input position changes counterclockwise. OP. LOCK RESET SET/LOCK COUNTER LCH-W Table DIP swith No. Output mode (Output ) HOLD A HOLD B HOLD C HOLD D SHOT A SHOT B SHOT C SHOT D Notes:) The counter and set value displays will display DIP Err. Notes:) Set the DIP switches before installing the counter on the panel. Notes:) When the DIP SW setting is changed, turn off the power once. Notes:) The DIP switches are set as before shipping. UP keys [Changes the corresponding digit of the set value in the addition direction (upwards)] RESET switch s the counting value and the output SET/LOCK switch Used to select between the Setting display and Setting display, to set and confirm the input mode, and to lock the keys (UP and RESET keys not responsive to touch). Example) Input mode displayed (UP: addition mode) Counters Addition subtraction Directive Independent Phase difference () Press the RESET key and the input mode being displayed is set. The display then goes back to normal. Checking the input mode Hold down the SET/LOCK key and press the UP key for the second digit. The input mode is displayed for about seconds and then the display goes back to normal. (During these seconds, all operations other than the display are being performed.) Locking the keys Hold down the SET/LOCK key and press the UP key for the sixth digit. The keys will lock. This means that the UP and RESET keys do not respond to touch. To unlock the keys,hold down the SET/LOCK key and press the UP key for the sixth digit again. * The input mode, maximum counting speed and minimum reset signal width cannot be preset independently for Setting and Setting. Selecting the Setting or Setting display Press the SET/LOCK key and the display changes between Setting and Setting. (This operation does not affect overall operation.) Changing the setting. While the counter is working, the UP key can be used to change the setting. Keep the following points in mind, however. ) Suppose that a preset count-up value is smaller than the displayed count value. The counter counts up to the full scale mark (), goes back to, and counts up again to the preset number. When the preset count-up value is larger than the displayed count value, the counter counts up to the preset value. ) Suppose that the counter is preset to count down. Whether a preset count-down value is smaller or larger than the count value, the counter counts down to.. When the preset value is, the counter does not start in the count-up mode. It starts counting up when the count value comes to again. ) Up-count input The counter counts up to the full scale mark (), goes back to and starts counting up again. ) Down-count input The counter counts down to the full scale mark ( ) and the display reads. The count value does not become and so the counter does not count up. ) Direction input, individual input, and phase input The preset value is counted up or down to any number other than once. When it comes to again, the counter starts counting up.

103 LCH-W Operation modes. Input mode ) For the input mode, you can choose one of the following five modes. UP DOWN DIR IND PHASE ) After the counter has been reset, setting is displayed in the count-down mode. appears instead in all other modes. Input mode Addition UP Operation IN or IN works as an input block (gate) for the other input. IN IN Counting (addition) *Minimum input signal width Hz:. ms; khz:. ms H L H L A A A A Blocked n- n- n- n Counting (subtraction) n n- n- n- Count UP IN H L Blocked A A Blocked A A Subtraction DOWN IN Counting (addition) H L Counting (subtraction) n n- n- n- n- n- n Count UP * A must be more than the minimum input signal width. *n: Set value Counters Directive DIR IN is the counting input and IN is the addition or subtraction directive input. IN adds at L level and subtracts at H level. IN IN Counting H L H L Addition A A A A Subtraction Addition * A must be more than the minimum input signal width. *n: Set value IN is addition input and IN is subtraction input. IN H L Independent IND IN H L Counting * IN and IN are completely independent, so there is no restriction on signal timing. Phase PHASE Addition when the IN phase advances beyond IN, and subtraction when the IN phase advances beyond IN. IN IN Counting H L H L B B Phase advance Phase retard * B must be more than the minimum input signal width.

104 . Output mode For the set value, you can choose one of the following four modes. HOLD-B HOLD-C HOLD-D SHOT-A For the set value, you can choose one of the following eight modes. HOLD-A HOLD-B HOLD-C HOLD-D SHOT-A SHOT-B SHOT-C SHOT-D Output mode for set value Output mode Operation (Example when input mode is either addition or subtraction) Maintain output Over count I HOLD-B Output control is maintained after count-up completion and until resetting. However, counting is possible despite completion of count-up. Counting (addition) n- Counting (subtraction) n+ Counting able/unable Output control n- n n+ n+ n n- Able n+ n- * n: Set value Maintain output Over count II HOLD-C Output control is maintained after count-up completion and until the next signal enters. However, counting is possible despite completion of countup. Counting (addition) Counting (subtraction) Counting able/unable Output control O F F n- n+ n- n n+ n Able n+ n- n+ n- Counters * n: Set value Maintain output Over count III If the count value is greater than or equal to the preset value when counting up, the control output is held. The count operation is possible anyway. Counting (addition) Counting (subtraction) Counting able/unable n- n- n n+ n+ n+ n+ n n- n- Able HOLD-D Output control (addition) Output control (subtraction) * n: Set value One shot Over count SHOT-A Output control is maintained after count-up completion for a fixed time (approx. sec). Counting is possible despite completion of count-up. Counting (addition) Counting (subtraction) Counting able/unable Output control O F F n- n- n n+ n+ n+ n+ n Able n- n- Approx. s * n: Set value

105 LCH-W Output mode Operation (Example when input mode is either addition or subtraction) Maintain output Hold count HOLD-A Output control is maintained after count-up completion and until resetting. During that time, the count display does not change from that at count-up completion. Counting (addition) n- n- n- n Counting (subtraction) Counting able/unable Able Unable Output control * n: Set value Maintain output Over count I HOLD-B Output control is maintained after count-up completion and until resetting. However, counting is possible despite completion of count-up. Counting (addition) Counting (subtraction) Counting able/unable Output control O F F n- n- n n+ - Able n+ - * n: Set value Maintain output Over count II HOLD-C Output control is maintained after count-up completion and until the next signal enters. However, counting is possible despite completion of countup. Counting (addition) n- n- n n+ Counting (subtraction) - Counting able/unable Able Output control n+ - Counters Maintain output Over count III HOLD-D If the count value is greater than or equal to the preset value when counting up, the counter starts counting up again. The count operation is possible anyway. * n: Set value Counting (addition) n- n- n n+ Counting (subtraction) - Counting able/unable Able Output control (addition) Output control (subtraction) n+ - * n: Set value One shot Over count Output control is maintained after count-up completion for a fixed time (approx. sec). Counting is possible despite completion of count-up. Counting (addition) Counting (subtraction) Counting able/unable n- n- n n+ - Able n+ - SHOT-A Output control Approx. s * n: Set value One shot Recount I SHOT-B Output control is maintained after count-up completion for a fixed time (approx. sec). Counting is possible despite completion of count-up. However, reset occurs simultaneous with completion of count-up. While output is being maintained, restarting of the count is not possible. Counting (addition) Counting (subtraction) Counting able/unable Output control n- n- n n- (automatic) Able n- Approx. s * n: Set value

106 Output mode Operation (Example when input mode is either addition or subtraction) One shot Recount II SHOT-C Output control is maintained after count-up completion for a fixed time (approx. sec). Counting is possible despite completion of count-up. However, reset occurs simultaneous with output. Counting (addition) n- n n+ Counting (subtraction) Counting able/unable Output control * n: Set value O F F - n n- Able Approx. s (automatic) One shot Hold count SHOT-D Output control is maintained after count-up completion for a fixed time (approx. sec). During that time, the count display does not change from that at count-up completion. occurs simultaneous with output. Counting (addition) Counting (subtraction) Counting able/unable Output control O F F Able n- n Unable Approx. s n n- (automatic) Able * n: Set value SHOT-A HOLD-C HOLD-D As usual (this combination unchanged) Output mode for set value HOLD-B SHOT-A As usual (this combination unchanged) Output mode for set value SHOT-B Output Output Output Approx. s Output Output Counters Approx. s Output Approx. s SHOT-C SHOT-D Note) When control output is on, the output mode of setting (SHOT-A, B, C, D) is also on and output changes as shown in the above table.. Count-up () In control output, when the count value is equal to the preset value, it is counted. (However, if the output mode of the preset value is HOLD-D, it is counted when the count value is greater than or equal to the preset value, regardless of the input mode.) () In control output, when the count value is equal to in the count-down input mode, it is counted. In the other modes, when the count value is equal to the preset value, it is counted. (However, if the output mode of the preset value is HOLD-D, it is counted when the count value is greater than or equal to the preset value, regardless of the input mode.) () It is not counted even when the counting conditions are satisfied right after resetting. It can be counted from when the count value changes.

107 Precautions in using the LCH series Counters Precautions during usage. Terminal wiring ) When wiring the terminals, refer to the terminal layout and wiring diagrams and be sure to perform the wiring properly without errors. ) When using the instrument with an flush mounting, the screw-down terminal type is recommended. For the pin type, use either the rear terminal block (AT) or the P cap (AD-RC) for the -pin type, and the rear terminal block (AT) or the P cap (AT- DP) for the -pin type. Avoid soldering directly to the round pins on the unit. When using the instrument with a front panel installation, use the DIN rail terminal block (AT-DFK) for the -pin type and the DIN rail terminal block (AT- DFK) for the -pin type. ) After turning the counter off, make sure that any resulting induced or residual is not applied to power supply terminals through (-pin type), through (-pin type) or and (screw terminal type). (If the power supply wire is wired parallel to the high wire or power wire, an induced may be generated between the power supply terminals.) ) Have the power supply pass through a switch or relay so that it is applied at one time. If the power supply is applied gradually, the counting may malfunction regardless of the settings, the power supply reset may not function, or other such unpredictable occurrence may result.. Input connections (except LCH-S/ AC type) The power circuit has no transformer without a transformer (power and input terminals are not insulated). When an input signal is fed to two or more counters at once, do not arrange the power circuit in an independent way. If the counter is powered on and off independently as shown in Fig. A, the counter s internal circuitry may get damaged. Be careful never to allow such circuitry. (Figs. A, B and C show the circuitry for the -pin type.) (Fig. A) Input contact or transistor Input terminal Input terminal Power supply If independent power circuitry must be used, keep the input contacts or transistors separate from each other, as shown in Fig. B. (Fig. B) Input contact or transistor Input contact or transistor When power circuitry is not independent, one input signal can be fed to two or more counters at once, as shown in Fig. C. (Fig. C) Input contact or transistor Input terminal Input terminal Input terminal Input terminal. Input and output ) Signal input type () Contact point input Use highly reliable metal plated contacts. Since the contact point s bounce time leads directly to error in the count value, use contacts with as short a bounce time as possible. In general, select Input and Input to have a maximum counting speed of Hz and to be reset with a minimum input signal width of ms. input Input Input Lock input Power supply Power supply -pin type -pin type type Note: The LCH-W does not have the lock input,. () Non-contact point input Connect with an open collector. Use transistors whose characteristics satisfy the criteria given below. VCEO = V min. IC = ma min. ICBO = µa max. Also, use transistors with a residual of less than V when the transistor is on. input Input Input Lock input -pin type -pin type type Note: The LCH-W does not have the lock input,. * The short-circuit impedance should be less than k. [When the impedance is, the current coming from the input and input terminals is approximately ma, and from the reset input and lock input terminals is approximately. ma.] Also, the open-circuit impedance should be more than k. * As shown in the diagram below, from a non-contact point circuit (proximity switches, photoelectric switches, etc.) with a power supply of between and V, the signal can be input without using an open collector transistor. In the case of the diagram below, when the non-contact point transistor Q switches from off to on (when the signal goes from high to low), the signal is input. to V DC Q input -pin type -pin type type (The above example is for reset input) ) The input mode and output mode change depending on the DIP switch settings. Therefore, before making any connections, be sure to confirm the operation mode and operation conditions currently set.

108 ) The LCH series use power supply without a transformer (power and input terminals are not insulated). In connecting various kinds of input signals, therefore, use a power transformer in which the primary side is separated from the ungrounded secondary side as shown in Fig. A, for the power supply for a sensor and other input devices so that short-circuiting can be prevented. Once the wiring to be used is completely installed and prior to installing this counter, confirm that there is complete insulation between the wires connected to the power terminals ( each) and the wires connected to each input terminal. If the power and input lines are not insulated, a short-circuit may occur inside the counter and result in internal damage. In addition, when moving your equipment to a new installation location, confirm that there is no difference in environmental conditions as compared to the previous location. (except LCH-S/AC type) (Fig. A) Good example AC power supply AC power supply Insulation transformer Counter (Fig. B) Bad example AC power supply Counter Counter ) The input signal is applied by the shorting of each input terminal with the common terminal (terminal Q for -pin type, terminal E for -pin type and terminal for screw terminal types). Never connect other terminals or s higher than V DC, because it may destroy the internal circuitry. ) Transistor output () Since the transistor output is insulated from the internal circuitry by a photocoupler, it can be used as an NPN output or PNP (equal value) output. (The above example is -pin type) (+) ( ) Insulation transformer (+) ( ) Single coil transformer (+) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ) Input device (e.g., sensor) Input device (e.g., sensor) Input device (e.g., sensor) Alternative current flow As NPN output As PNP output Diode rating: IF (forward current): A VR (reverse ): V LCH counter { O I LCH counter Load Load s power supply LCH counter { O I Load Load s power supply Note: With the LCH -pin type and the LCH-W, there is no diode between points I and O. () Use the diode connected to the output transistor s collector for absorbing the reverse from induced loads. (LCH only) Load s power supply Inductive load ) When wiring, use shielded wires or metallic wire tubes, and keep the wire lengths as short as possible.. Output mode setting The output mode can be set with the DIP switches on the side of the counter. Make the DIP switch settings before installing the counter on the panel.. Conditions of usage ) Avoid locations subject to flammable or corrosive gases, excessive dust, oil, vibrations, or excessive shocks. ) Since the cover of the unit is made of polycarbonate resin, avoid contact with or use in environments containing methyl alcohol, benzene, thinners, and other organic solvents; and ammonia, caustic sodas, and other alkaline substances. ) If power supply surges exceed the values given below, the internal circuits may become damaged. Be sure to use surge absorbing element to prevent this from happening. ) Regarding external noise, the values Surge (peak value) AC type,v DC type V AC type,v Surge (%) below are considered the noise-resista s. If s rise above these values, malfunctions or damage to the internal circuitry may result, so take the necessary precautions. Noise wave form (noise simulator) Noise Peak value. Time (µs) Power supply terminals DC type AC type V AC type Input termina,v,v V Rise time: ns Pulse width: µs, ns Polarity: ± Cycle: cycles/second ) When connecting the operation pow supply, make sure that no leakage current enters the counter. For example, when performing contact protection, if set up like that of diagram A, leaking cu rent will pass through C and R, enter th unit, and cause incorrect operation. Diagram B shows the correct setup. Operation power supply Operation power supply Leakage current R (Fig. A) (Fig. B) ) Long periods of continuous operation in the count-up completed condition (on month or more) will result in the weaken ing of the internal electrical components from the generated heat and, therefore should be avoided. If you do plan to use the unit for such continuous operation, use in conjunction with a relay as show in the circuit in the diagram below. R C R C R C R C C Counters R Relay C Counter Receive outpu from contact at relay R

109 Precautions using the LCH series. Self-diagnosis function If a malfunction occurs, one of the following displays will appear. Display or Contents Minimum value went below or. See note. Incorrect DIP switch setting. Malfunctioning CPU. Output condition Restoration procedure Preset values after restoration No change Enter reset or RESET key. Restart unit (correct DIP switch settings) No change Enter reset, RESET key, or restart unit. Malfunctioning memory. See note. Note : When the counter value goes below the minimum value during any of the subtraction, directive, independent, or phase input modes. Note : Includes the possibility that the EEPROM s life has expired. The values at start-up before the CPU malfunction occurred.. Compliance with the CE marking When using in applications to which EN- applies, abide by the following conditions. Over category II, pollution level (for sensor type model with power supply). Connections between the power supply and input/output have basic insulation. Use a device with basic insulation to connect to the I/O terminals. (for sensor type model without power supply) ) This counter employs a power supply without a transformer, so the power and input signal terminals are not insulated. () When a sensor is connected to the input circuit, install double insulation on the sensor side. () In the case of contact input, use dualinsulated relays, etc. The load connected to the output contact should have basic insulation. This counter is protected with basic insulation and can be double-insulated to meet EN/IEC requirements by using basic insulation on the load. Applied should be protected with an overcurrent protection device (example: V A fuse, etc.) that conforms to the EN/IEC standards. ) You must use a terminal block or socket for installing the pin-type counter. Do not touch the terminal section or other parts of the timer unit while an electric current is applied. Before installation or removal, confirm that there is no being applied to any of the terminals. ) Do not use this timer with a safety circuit. For example, when using a timer in a heater circuit, etc., provide a protection circuit on the machine side. Counters

110 Installing the DIN size counter (common) Installation methods. Surface mount ) For the counters of LCH series, use the pin type counter. ) Put the terminal socket on the board directly or put it on the DIN rail (Fig. ). ) Insert the counter into the terminal socket and fix it with clip (Fig. ) ) On DIN rail mounting, mount the counter on the DIN rail tightly to get the proper dimension (Fig. ). Terminal socket (Fig. ) (Fig. ) (Fig. ) DIN rail ) -pin type should be connected with terminal socket AT-DFK. -pin type should be connected with terminal socket AT-DFK. ) DIN rail (AT-DLA) is also available ( m).. Flush mount ) For the counters of LCH series, it is recommended to use the built-in screw terminal type for flush mount. (Mounting frame and rubber gasket are provided when counter is shipped.) ) How to mount the counter From the panel front, pass the counter through the square hole. Fit the mounting frame from the rear, and then push it in so that the clearance between the mounting frame and the panel surface is minimized. In addition, lock the mounting frame with a screw. Panel cover Rubber gasket ) Caution in mounting the counter ) If the LCH series are used as the waterproof types (IEC IP), tighten the reinforcing screws on the mounting frames so that the counters, the rubber gaskets, and the panel surfaces are tightly contacted with each other. (Tighten the two screws with uniform force and make sure that there is no rattling. If the screws are tightened too excessively, the mounting frame may come off.) ) If the counter is installed with the panel cover and the rubber gasket removed, the waterproofing characteristic is lost. ) Removal Loosen the screws on the mounting frame, spread the edge of frame and remove it. Pull the mounting frame backward while spreading out its hooks with your thumbs and index fingers. Mounting flame Screw PUSH ) Correctly connect the terminals while seeing the terminal layout and wiring diagram. ) If the pin type is used, the rear pinbracket (AT-RR) or the P cap (AD- RC) is necessary to connect the pins. For the -pin type, use the P cap (AT-DP) and avoid directly soldering the round pins on the counter. ) Panel cutout dimensions The standard panel ) Although the counters can be mounted adjacent to each other in this case, it is recommended to arrange the mounting holes as shown in the figure to facilitate attaching and detaching the mounting frame. cutout dimensions are shown in the left figure. (Panel thickness: to mm. to. inch) ) Adjacent mounting Although the counters can be mounted adjacent to each other, remember that the panel surface of LCH series counter will lose its water-resistant effect. (Panel thickness: to mm. to. inch) A = (xn.) +. + When lining up the counters horizontally, set the frames in such a position so the formed spring areas are at the top and bottom. When lining up the counters vertically, set the frames in such a position as the formed spring areas are at the right and left Min Formed spring Formed spring Min A Hour Meters LCD

111 Hour meters selector chart Types DIN size Hour Meters Name of product TH Hour Meters TH Hour Meters TH Hour Meters TH Hour Meters TH Hour Meters Appearance Counting range Features Driving method Counting direction Power Voltage Counting integral/ Counting max. speed Min. counting unit TH series TH series TH series TH series TH series side to. hours to. hours to. hours Without reset side to. min to. hours to. hours For controlling total integrated hours AC motor Addition (UP) V AC, V AC, V AC, V AC, V AC, to V AC, V AC, V AC, V AC Synchronizing with power supply frequency. h input Max. power consumption Approx.. W Weight g. oz With zero reset function For controlling measured integrated hours AC motor AC motor AC motor DC quartz motor Addition (UP) Addition (UP) Addition (UP) Addition (UP) V AC, V AC, V AC, V AC, V AC, to V AC, V AC, V AC, V AC Composite function for total accumulated hours monitoring and measuring each zero reset V AC, V AC, V AC, V AC, V AC, to V AC, V AC, V AC, V AC Zero reset for minute unit time monitoring V AC, V AC, V AC, V AC, V AC, to V AC, V AC, V AC, V AC For monitoring accumulated hours on DC line V DC, V DC Frequency /Hz (common) /Hz (common) /Hz (common) /Hz (common) Synchronizing with power supply frequency Synchronizing with power supply frequency Synchronizing with power supply frequency According to quartz oscillation frequency. h. h. min. h Manual reset Manual reset Manual reset Approx.. W Approx.. W Approx.. W Approx.. W g. oz g. oz g. oz g. oz The unit with a reset The TH series displays function is also available. time in minute. (Manufacturing after Remarks receiving an order) The TH,,,,, and series have numbers at the end of the part number that indicate the required as follows: : V, : V, : V, : V, : V, : V, : to V, : V, : V, Ex.) The part number of the TH series with V is TH. When S is specified at the end of the part number, a silver panel is equipped at the front. Page P. P. P. P. P. Types DIN size Hour Meters DIN size Hour Meters Name of product TH Hour Meters TH Hour Meters LHH Hour Meters LHH Preset Hour Meters Hour Meters LCD Appearance Front section of part Panel PC board number TH series TH series mounting type mounting type ATH Counting range Features to. hours For controlling total integrated hours to. hours With zero reset function For controlling measured integrated hours Flush mounting type: to. hours/ to days. hours (selectable) to hours min sec/ to hours. min (selectable) PC board mounting type: to. hours/ hours. min (different type) Big -digit display,. mm tall display Bright, -color back light ( input type) Plenty of input methods Non- input, Voltage input, free input Driving method AC motor AC motor Quartz oscillation type Counting direction Addition (UP) Addition (UP) Addition (UP) V AC, V AC, V AC, V AC, Flush mounting type: Unnecessary V AC, V AC, V AC, V AC, (Built-in battery) Voltage Power V AC, to V AC, V AC, to V AC, PC board mounting type: V DC V AC, V AC, V AC V AC, V AC, V AC (Battery is externally installed.) Frequency /Hz (common) /Hz (common) Counting integral/ Synchronizing with power supply Synchronizing with power supply Counting max. speed frequency frequency ± ppm ( C) Min. counting unit. h. h. h,. min, s input Manual reset Push button and external reset input terminal Max. power consumption Approx.. W Approx.. W to. hours/ to days. hours (selectable) to hours min sec/ to hours. min (selectable) Preset function equipped in half size Quartz oscillation type Addition or subtraction Flush mounting type: g. oz Weight g. oz g. oz g. oz PC board mounting type: g. oz The numbers at the end of the part number indicate. Remarks (See the remarks above.) Page P. P. P. P. V DC ±.% ± ms in case of power on start ±.% ± ms in case of input signal start. h,. min, s Push button and external reset input terminal Max.. W

112 Types DIN size Hour Meters TH Hour Meter: Round type Name of product TH Hour Meter TH Hour Meter DC Hour Meter Appearance TH series TH series Counting range to. hours to. hours Features For controlling total integrated hours With zero reset function For controlling measured integrated hours Driving method AC motor AC motor Counting direction Addition (UP) Addition (UP) V AC, V AC, V AC, V AC, V AC, V AC, Voltage to V AC, V AC, V AC to V AC, V AC, V AC Power Frequency Hz or Hz Hz or Hz Counting integral/ Counting max. speed Synchronizing with power supply frequency Synchronizing with power supply frequency Min. counting unit. h. h input Manual reset Max. power consumption Approx.. W Approx.. W Weight g. oz g. oz Both the TH and series have numbers at the end of the part number that indicate the and frequency required. Remarks The third number from the front of the part number indicates the required as follows: : V, : V, : V, : V (for Hz only) or V to V (for Hz only), : V, : V The fourth number from the front of the part number indicates the required frequency as follows: : Hz, : Hz Ex.) The part number for the TH series of V & Hz specification is TH. TH series to. hours Driven on DC power Ceramic oscillation + AC motor Addition (UP) V DC, V DC ±.% ( C). h Approx.. W g. oz Hour Meters LCD

113 LHH DIN HALF SIZE HOUR METER LHH Hour Meters LCD Panel mounting type One-touch installation type Panel mounting type Installation frame type PC board mounting type RoHS Directive compatibility information Features.. mm Character Height (previously mm. inch) Easy-to-read character height increased from mm to. mm. inch to. inch.. Plenty of Digits digits.mm.inch. Select by switch between two time ranges in a single meter. to.h/ to d.h switchable to hms/ to h.m switchable. Panel Mounting Type Features Installation Methods Comes with very easy one-touch installation type and also installation frame type that uses the frame on the timer/counter. Choose a method that suits the application.. Battery Replacement Easy on Environment To replace battery simply remove body for the one-touch installation type, and remove battery lid for the installation frame type.. Screw Terminals Designed for Safety Built in finger protection.. Panel Covers Replacable (Standard color is ash gray.) Change the panel design by replacing with a black panel cover.. Conforms to IP Protective Construction (Only installation frame type.) (Front panel surface). Input Methods ) Non- input method ) Voltage input method ) Free input method. Backlight Type Added to Series and Now -color Switchable (green/ red) Easy viewing even in dark places and switchable between green and red (Voltage input type).. Compliant with UL, c-ul and CE marking. Product chart Type Standard type Backlight type Voltage input type Free input type Voltage input type Installation type Non- input type (. to V DC) ( to V AC/DC) (. to V DC) Panel One-touch installation type mounting type Installation frame type PC board mounting type Product types No. digits Measurement time range Front reset Input method Part No. to.h/ to d.h switchable LHH-FE-DHK Non- input type to hms/ to h.m switchable LHH-FE-HMK to.h/ to d.h switchable LHH-FE-DHK-DL digits Yes Voltage input type (. to V DC) to hms/ to h.m switchable LHH-FE-HMK-DL to.h/ to d.h switchable LHH-FE-DHK-FV Free input type ( to V AC/DC) to hms/ to h.m switchable LHH-FE-HMK-FV

114 Backlight type No. digits Measurement time range Front reset Input method Part No. digits ) Installation frame type Standard type Backlight type. PC board mounting type Specifications to.h/ to d.h switchable LHH-FE-DHK-DL-B Yes Voltage input type (. to V DC) to hms/ to h.m switchable LHH-FE-HMK-DL-B No. digits Measurement time range Front reset Input method Part No. digits to.h/ to d.h switchable LHH-F-DHK Non- input type to hms/ to h.m switchable LHH-F-HMK to.h/ to d.h switchable LHH-F-DHK-DL Yes Voltage input type (. to V DC) to hms/ to h.m switchable LHH-F-HMK-DL to.h/ to d.h switchable LHH-F-DHK-FV Free input type ( to V AC/DC) to hms/ to h.m switchable LHH-F-HMK-FV No. digits Measurement time range Front reset Input method Part No. digits to.h/ to d.h switchable LHH-F-DHK-DL-B Yes Voltage input type (. to V DC) to hms/ to h.m switchable LHH-F-HMK-DL-B No. digits Measurement time range Front reset Input method Part No. digits. Panel mounting type Item No. digits External power supply Measurement time range input input to.h LHH-C-H-N No Non- input type to h.m LHH-C-HM-N Type Min. input signal width Input method (signal) Note) Only for installation frame type. Standard type Backlight type Standard type Non- input Voltage input Free type Non- input using contacts or open collector connection digits Not required (built-in battery) to.h/ to d.h (Switchable by switch) to hms/ to h.m (Switchable by switch) Separate product type ms High level:. to V DC Low level: to V DC High level: to V AC/DC Low level: to. V AC/DC Input impedance When shorted: Max. kω When open: Approx.. kω Max. kω Residual Max.. V Min. input signal width ms Input method (signal) Input impedance Non- input using contacts or open collector connection When shorted: Max. kω When open: Max. kω High level:. to V DC Low level: to V DC Appox.. kω Non- input using contacts or open collecto connection When shorted: Max. kω When open: Max. kω Residual Max. V Max.. V Display method -segment LCD -segment LCD With green/red backlight -segment LCD Between charged and Breakdown (initial) Between charged and uncharged parts:, V AC for minute. uncharged parts:, V AC for minute Insulation resistance (initial) Min. MΩ (measured at V DC) Measurement location same as for break down. Backlight power V DC (±%) Protective construction (Note) IEC Standard IP (only panel front: when using rubber gasket) Accessories (Note) Rubber gasket, mounting bracket Battery life years (at C F) Hour Meters LCD

115 LHH Hour Meters LCD. PC board mounting type Item Input method No. digits Rated operation. Common Applicable standard Safety standard EN- Pollution Degree /Over Category III EMC Type Allowable operation range Current consumption (EMI)EN-- Radiation interference electric field strength Noise terminal (EMS)EN-- Static discharge immunity RF electromagnetic field immunity EFT/B immunity Conductivity noise immunity Power frequency magnetic field immunity PC board mounting type EN Group ClassA EN Group ClassA EN-- EN-- EN-- EN-- EN-- Non DC input digits V DC. to. V DC Max. µa (max. µa during reset input) Measurement time range to.h to h.m input input Min. input signal width Input method Input impedance Residual Min. input signal width Input method Input impedance Residual power Break down (initial) Insulation resistance (initial) Item Time accuracy Vibration resistance Shock resistance Operation temperature Storage temperature Ambient humidity Functional Type Destructive Functional Destructive ms Non- input using contacts or open collector connection When shorted: Max. kω When open: Max. kω Max.. V ms Non- input using contacts or open collector connection When shorted: Max. kω When open: Max. kω Max.. V Between charged and uncharged parts:, V AC for minute. Min. MΩ (measured at V DC) Measurement location same as for break down. Panel mounting/pc board mounting types ± ppm ( C F) to Hz ( cycle/min.), single amplitude:. mm ( min. on axes) to Hz ( cycle/min.), single amplitude:. mm ( hr. on axes) Min. m/s ( times on axes) Min. m/s ( times on axes) to + C + to + F (without frost or dew) to + C to + F (without frost or dew) to % RH (non-condensing) kv contact kv air V/m AM modulation ( MHz to GHz) V/m pulse modulation ( MHz) kv (power supply line) V/m AM modulation (. MHz to MHz) A/m ( Hz)

116 Part names. Front reset button the elapsed time. It does not work when the lock switch is. Be aware that battery life will decrease if this switch is used frequently.. Lock switch (Refer to chart on right.) Disable the front reset button. Note) Turn at the LCD side (reset disabled) and at the terminal block side (reset enabled).. Time range switch (See chart on right). Switch the time range. Note) Always press the front reset button when operating the time range switch.. Time unit sticker Unit seals are included in the package. Affix them in accordance with the time range. RESET h m s LHH Front reset button Lock switch (Unit display ) HOUR METER Time unit seal Time range switch Lock switch to.h/ to d.h to hms/ to h.m (Terminal block side) (LCD side) Count speed switch (Unit display ) (Terminal block side) (LCD side) to.h to d.h (Terminal block side) (LCD side) to h.m to hms Notes). Default setting when shipped.. Make the switch setting before installing to panel. Dimensions. Panel mounting type External dimensions ) One-touch installation type Panel installation diagram mm inch General tolerance: ±. ±... M. M... Panel ( to.mm. to.inch thickness) Rubber spacer Note) When installing to a. mm. inch thick panel, remove the rubber spacer first. Hour Meters LCD... () (.)... RESET. HOUR METER button LHH When installing the one-touch installation type model, make sure that the installation spring does not pinch the rubber gasket. To prevent the installation spring from pinching the rubber gasket:. Set the rubber gasket on both ends of the installation spring (left and right).. Confirm that the installation spring is not pinching the rubber gasket, and then insert and fix the installation spring in place from the rear of the timer unit.

117 LHH ) Installation frame type Panel mounting diagram.. M. M. Mounting screws (found on mounting bracket) Mounting frame ATH (included)... Panel ( to.mm. to.inch thickness) Rubber gasket ATH (included)..... HOUR METER.. RESET LHH. button Panel cut-out dimensions The standard panel cut-out is shown below. Use the mounting frame (ATH) and the rubber packing (ATH). (Only installation frame type.) For connected installation (sealed installation) (Only installation frame type.) min.. min A +. A=( n-.) A=(. n-.) Notes). Suitable installation panel thickness is to. mm. to. inch.. Waterproofing will be lost when installing repeatedly (sealed installation). +. Hour Meters LCD Terminal layout and wiring diagrams ) Standard type input Non input type Voltage input type Free input type input input +V input +V input input or W-R are connected internally. V V ) Backlight type input +V V Voltage input type Backlight <When green> <When red> input V +V +V V V +V

118 . PC board mounting type External dimensions. ±.. ±.. ±.. ±.. ±.. ±.. ±.. ±... HOUR METER LHH. ±.. ±. DIP switch. Terminal layout and wiring diagrams... ±.. ±.. ±.. ±.. ±.. ± dia. -. dia. General tolerance: ±. ±. mm inch PC board pattern (BOTTOM VIEW) Mounting area Connection sockets pin DIP terminal General tolerance: ±. ±. Note: The AXSK is recommended as a compatible connection socket. input input Q-E, }-w, e-t and S-F are connected internally. An external power supply is required. Input method. Standard type Contact input Non- input type Panel mounting type PC board mounting type Transistor input Transistor input Contact input NPN transistor NPN transistor input input input input input input input input (W and R are connected internally.) V V (W and R are connected internally.) V DC V DC Notes). When using contact input, since current flow is small from terminals and on the panel mounting type and terminals e to t and S to F on the PC board mounting type, please use relays and switches with high contact reliability.. When using transistor input, use the following as a guide for which transistors (Tr) to use for inputting. (Collector withstand Q V, leakage current < µa) Contact input Voltage input type NPN transistor Transistor input PNP transistor Free input type Hour Meters LCD input input +V +V input input +V +V input input input or or or input Notes). and. (The input and reset circuits are functionally insulated.). When using transistor (Tr) input, use the right as a guide. (Collector withstand Q V, leakage current < µa). Be aware that the application of that exceeds the range of the H level to the count input terminal, and the application of to the reset input terminal, can cause damage to the internal elements.

119 LHH. Backlight type Contact input Voltage input type NPN transistor Transistor input PNP transistor Backlight connection input input +V +V input input +V +V input input Green V DC Red V DC Notes). Do not reverse the polarities when connecting the DC for the backlight.. and. (The input and reset circuits are functionally insulated.). When using transistor (Tr) input, use the right as a guide. (Collector withstand Q V, leakage current < µa). Be aware that the application of that exceeds the range of the H level to the count input terminal, and the application of to the reset input terminal, can cause damage to the internal elements. Explanation of operation. Time measuring takes place when the start input is.. When the elapsed (measured) time reaches full scale it returns to, and then measuring starts again from.. When reset input is, the display becomes. You cannot measure during reset input. For PC board mounting type the display disappears while the reset input is ; however, the display reads when the reset input turns.. Press the front reset button if you want to perform a manual reset (for panel installation type) input input Full scale Elapsed time PC board type Hour Meters LCD

120 Cautions for use. Non- input type For both panel mounting and PC board mounting types ) Never apply to the non- input type. This will damage the internal elements. ) Since the current flow is very small from the start input and reset input terminals ( and on the panel mounting type and terminals e to t and S to F on the PC board mounting type) please use relays and switches with high contact reliability. When inputting with an open collector of a transistor, use a transistor for small signals in which ICBO is µa or less and always input with no. ) When wiring, try to keep all the input lines to the start and reset inputs as short as possible and avoid running them together with high and power transmission lines or in a power conduit. Also, malfunctions might occur if the floating capacitance of these wires exceeds pf ( m. ft. for parallel wires of mm ). In particular, when using shielded wiring, be careful of the capacitance between wires. PC board mounting type ) For external power supply use manganese dioxide or lithium batteries (CR type: V). ) Always reset after external power is applied and confirm that the display reads. ) Make the wiring from the battery to the hour meter unit as short as absolutely possible. Also, be careful of polarity. ) Calculate battery life with the following formula. t = A/I t: battery life [h] I: LHH current consumption [ma] A: battery capacity until minimum operation is reached [mah] ) Hand solder to the lead terminal. Do not dip solder. With the tip of the soldering iron at C F perform soldering within seconds (for to W soldering iron).. Voltage input type ) Be aware that applying more than V DC to start input terminals and, and reset input terminals and will cause damage to the internal elements. ) For external resetting use H level (application of. to V DC) between reset terminals and of the rear terminals. In this case, connect + to terminal and to terminal. This is the valid polarity; therefore, the hour meter will not work if reversed. ) When wiring, try to keep all the input lines to the start and reset inputs as short as possible and avoid running them together with high and power transmission lines or in a power conduit. Also, malfunctions might occur if the floating capacitance of these wires exceeds pf ( m. ft. for parallel wires of mm ).. Free input type ) Use start input terminals and for free input and reset terminals and for non- input. ) Be aware that the application of that exceeds the range of the H level to the start input terminal, and the application of to the reset input terminal, can cause damage to the internal elements. ) Since the current flow is very small from reset input terminal, please use relays and switches with high contact reliability. ) When inputting a reset with an open collector of a transistor, use a transistor for small signals in which ICBO is µa or less and always input with no. ) To reset externally, short reset input terminals and on the rear. ) Input uses a high impedance circuit; therefore, erroneous operation may occur if the influence of induction is present. If you plan to use wiring for the input signal that is m or longer (wire capacitance pf/m at normal temperature), we recommend the use of a CR filter or the connection of a bleeder resistor.. How to reset multiple panel mounting type counters all at once (input is the same for count) Non- input type D D D Tr or Notes). Use the following as a guide for choosing transistors used for input (Tr). Leakage current < µa. Use as small a diode (D) as possible in the forward so that the between terminals and during reset input meets the standard value (. V). ( At IF = µa, forward. and higher.) Voltage input type +V +V R Tr or Note) Make sure that H (reset ) level is at least. V.. Backlight luminance To prevent varying luminance among backlights when using multiple Backlight types, please use the same backlight power supply. V DC Green. Acquisition of CE marking Please abide by the conditions below when using in applications that comply with EN -/IEC - ) Ambient conditions Over category II, pollution level Indoor use Acceptable temperature and humidity range: to + C, to %RH (with no condensation at C) Under m elevation ) Use the main unit in a location that matches the following conditions. There is minimal dust and no corrosive gas. There is no combustible or explosive gas. There is no mechanical vibration or impacts. There is no exposure to direct sunlight. Located away from large-volume electromagnetic switches and power lines with large electrical currents. ) Connect a breaker that conforms to EN- or EN- to the input section. ) Applied should be protected with an overcurrent protection device (example: T A, V AC time lag fuse) that conforms to the EN/IEC standards. (Free input type). Terminal connection Tighten the terminal screws with a torque of. N cm or less. Red V DC Hour Meters LCD

121 LHH PRESET HOUR METERS LHH Features Preset function equipped in half size ( mm.. inch). Display has backlight for instant recognition. Time counting Timing up Red or (Green) (backlight). mm. inch Character Height (previously mm. inch) Easy-to read character height increased from mm to. mm. inch to. inch..mm.inch Green or (Red) (backlight) (Lit or Flashing) Plenty of Digits Hour Meters LCD RoHS Directive compatibility information Green or Red can be selected at setup. Red or (Green) (backlight) (Lit or Flashing) Lit or Flashing can be selected at setup. digits Select by switch between two time ranges in a single meter. to.h/ to d.h Selectable to hms/ to h.m Selectable Conforms to IP Protective Construction (Front panel surface) Weatherproofing supported by using optional mounting bracket and rubber gasket Includes reassuring lock mode and lock switch to prevent erroneous operation. s are constructed to protect fingers to ensure safety. Compliant with UL, c-ul and CE marking. Product types No. digits digits Measurement time range to.h/ to d.h selectable to hms/ to h.m selectable Options Note: Mounting frame and gasket are not included. Note: Mounting frame and rubber gasket are not included. Operation mode Output Part No. G (Totalizing delay) B (Signal delay) F (Signal flicker) E (Pulse delay) Mounting frame Rubber gasket Transistor (a) V DC LHHP-FEW-DHK-B-DCV LHHP-FEW-HMK-B-DCV Use for waterproofing (front panel surface) ATH ATH

122 Specifications Rating Item Rated operating Rated power consumption Rated control output Time counting direction Measurement time range input input Input signal Operation mode Display method Power failure emory time fluctuation Time Voltage error accuracy Temperature error Setting error Contact arrangement Electrical life (contact) Allowable operating range Electrical Break down (Initial value) Insulation resistance (Initial value) Functional vibration resistance Destructive vibration resistance Mechanical Functional shock resistance Destructive shock resistance Operation temperature Storage temperature conditions Ambient humidity Protective construction * The factory default preset value is set to.. Applicable standard EMC (EMI)EN-- Radiation interference electric field strength Noise terminal (EMS)EN-- Static discharge immunity RF electromagnetic field immunity EFT/B immunity Conductivity noise immunity Power frequency magnetic field immunity Descriptions V DC Max.. W ma V DC Addition or Subtraction (selectable by front switch) to.h/ to d.h (selectable by slide switch on side) to hms/ to h.m (selectable by slide switch on side) Min. input signal width: Min. ms Min. input signal width: Min. ms Non- input using contacts or open-collector connection Input impedance; when shorted: Max. kω, when open: Min. kω Residual : Max. V Totalizing delay, Signal delay, Signal flicker, Pulse delay (selectable by front switch) -segment LCD (Switch between red and green for backlight, and between lit and flashing for time up.) EEP-ROM (Overwriting times: operations or more) ±.% ± ms in case of power on start ±.% ± ms in case of input signal start Rated operating : to % Ambient temperature: to + C + to + F Form A (Open collector) operations (at rated control ) to % of rated operating Between input and output:, V AC, for min. Between input and output: MΩ (at V DC) to Hz ( cycle/min), Single amplitude:. mm ( min. on axes) to Hz ( cycle/min), Single amplitude:. mm ( hr. on axes) Min. m/s ( times on axes) Min. m/s ( times on axes) to C + to + F (without frost or dew) to + C to + F (without frost or dew) to % RH (non-condensing) IP (front panel with mounting bracket and rubber gasket) EN Group ClassA EN Group ClassA EN-- EN-- EN-- EN-- EN-- kv contact kv air V/m AM modulation ( MHz to GHz) V/m pulse modulation ( MHz to MHz) kv (power supply line) kv (signal line) V/m AM modulation (. MHz to MHz) A/m ( Hz) Hour Meters LCD

123 LHH Part names. Front reset key This key resets the elapsed value. It does not work when the lock switch is.. Mode key Use to set preset values or to switch between each mode.. Setting key Used to set digits of preset values or set each mode.. Set key Use to set preset values or to switch between modes.. Time unit seal Unit seals are included in the package. Affix them in accordance with the time range.. Lock switch Disable the operation of the front panel reset key and the mode key. With the lock switch on, is displayed for about two seconds when the reset key or mode switch is operated.. Time range switch Switch the time range. Lock switch (unit display ) Time range switch (unit display ) HOUR METER RESET MODE SET LHH : Default setting when LHHP-FEW-DHK-B-DCV LHHP-FEW-HMK-B-DCV (Terminal block side) to.h (LCD side) to d.h (Terminal block side) (LCD side) (Terminal block side) (LCD side) to to Notes:. Make the switch setting before installing to panel.. Please turn the power off if you change the setting of the time range switch when the powe setting will become valid when the power is turned back on. Dimensions External dimensions General tolerance: ± Hour Meters LCD RESET... M. M. HOUR METER. When installing the one-touch installation type model, m that the installation spring does not pinch the rubber ga To prevent the installation spring from pinching the rubber gasket:. Set the rubber gasket on both ends of the installation spring (left and right).. Confirm that the installation spring is not pinching the rubber gasket, and then insert and fix the installation spring in place from the rear of the timer unit.. MODE SET LHH Panel cut out dimensions The standard panel cut out is shown below. Use the mounting frame (ATH) and the rubber gasket (ATH). (Only installation frame type) For connected installation (sealed installation) (Only installation frame type) min.. min A +. A=( n-.) A=(. n-.) +. Notes:. Suitable installation panel thickness is to. mm. to.. Waterproofing will be lost when installing repeatedly (sealed i

124 How to set. Preset value setting mode This is the mode for setting preset values. Press the MODE key. Set the digit. Set the value. ) Pressing the MODE key takes you to the preset value setting mode. Sample display in preset value setting mode (when preset value is.h) * The factory default preset value is set to.. ) Pressing the setting key moves the flashing digit left by one. Following the highest digit it returns to the lowest digit and each time the digit setting key is pressed it moves one to the left. ) Pressing the set key increases the value by one. (After it returns to and then changes to,,, etc.) ) Pressing the front panel reset key sets the displayed preset value and returns you to the regular operation mode. ) In the preset value setting mode if you do not operate the digit setting key or the set key for ten seconds or more you will be returned to regular operation. In this case the preset value will not change.. Lock mode This mode prohibits everything except the preset value setting mode. + Press the SET key while pressing Un-Lock Lock the MODE key. ) Pressing the set key while holding down the mode key takes you to the lock mode. ) The display reads Un-Lock after entering the lock mode (initial setting). Display after entering lock mode (Example showing Un-Lock.) ) Pressing the setting key changes the display between Lock and Unlock. (Example showing Lock.) ) Pressing the front panel reset key sets the content displayed and returns you to regular operation mode. Note: You will not be returned to regular operation mode if you do not press the front panel reset key. ) When the lock mode display reads Lock, you will not be able to move to the backlight setting mode, the time counting direction setting mode, or the operation setting mode.. Backlight setting mode This is the mode for setting the backlight during time up. + Press the SET key while pressing Lit red Flashes green the MODE key. Lit green Flashes red ) Pressing the SET key two times while holding down the MODE key takes you to the backlight setting mode. ) The display in the backlight setting mode reads LEd Display after entering the backlight setting mode. ) The LED backlight will be red (initial setting). ) The backlight changes from flashing green to flashing red to lit green and to lit red with each press of the setting key. ) Pressing the front panel reset key sets the current backlight color and returns you to regular operation mode. Note: You will not be returned to regular operation mode if you do not press the front panel reset key.. Time counting direction setting mode This is the mode for setting addition or subtraction. + Press the SET key while pressing Addition Subtraction the MODE key. ) Pressing the SET key three times while holding down the MODE key takes you to the time counting direction setting mode. ) The display after entering the time counting direction setting mode reads UP (initial setting). Display after entering time counting direction setting mode (Example showing UP ) ) Pressing the setting key changes the display to dn (subtraction) and pressing it again changes it to UP (addition). The display alternates between dn and UP. (Example showing dn ) ) Pressing the front panel reset key sets the content displayed and returns you to regular operation mode. Note: You will not be returned to regular operation mode if you do not press the front panel reset key. Hour Meters LCD

125 LHH. Operation mode This sets the operation mode. + Press the SET key while pressing the MODE key. ) Pressing the SET key four times while holding down the MODE key takes you to the operation setting mode. ) The display reads OP-G (Totalizing delay) after entering the operation setting mode. ) Pressing the setting key causes the display to change as follows: OP-B (Signal delay) OP-F (Signal flicker) OP-G OP-E OP-B OP-F ) Lock mode + Press the SET key while pressing the MODE key. Un-Lock Lock When the lock is set, you cannot enter modes other than backlight setting mode. ) Backlight setting mode + Press the SET key while pressing the MODE key. ) Time counting direction setting mode + Press the SET key while pressing the MODE key. ) Operation setting mode + Press the SET key while pressing the MODE key. Lit red Lit green Addition OP-G OP-E Flashes green Flashes red Subtraction OP-B OP-F Mode changes as follows by pressing the SET key while holding down the MODE key. Lock mode Backlight setting mode Operation setting mode Time counting direction setting mode Front panel reset key Regular operation mode OP-E (Pulse delay) OP-G (Totalizing delay) ) Pressing the front panel reset key sets the display content and returns you to regular operation mode. Note: You will not be returned to regular operation mode if you do not press the front panel reset key. Please be aware that after doing a front panel reset key and returning to regular operation mode, the preset values, elapsed value and output will be as shown in this table. Preset value Note: sign: No change Elapsed value Output change Lock mode Backlight setting mode Time counting direction setting mode Operation setting mode Addition: Subtraction: Preset value Addition: Subtraction: Preset value Hour Meters LCD Changing the set time (preset value). It is possible to change the set time even during time delay with the timer. However, be aware of the following points. ) If the set time is changed to less than the elapsed time (elapsed value) with the time delay set to the addition direction, time delay will continue until the elapsed time reaches full scale, returns to (zero), and then reaches the new set time. If the set time is changed to a time above the elapsed time, the time delay will continue until the elapsed time reaches the new set time. ) If the time delay is set to the subtraction direction, time delay will continue until (zero) regardless of the new set time.. If the set time is changed to (zero), the hour meter will operate differently depending on the operation mode. In the G (Totalizing delay), B (Signal delay), and E (Pulse delay) modes, the output turns when the start input is. However, the output will be while reset is being input. In the F (Signal flicker) mode, the flicker operation will not work even if start input is turned.

126 Precautions in using the LHH series Operation mode Operation mode Explanation Time chart Totalizing delay G Elapsed value does not clear at power. (Power outage countermeasure function) The output remains even after the power is and restarted. Power supply Output T T=t+t t t T>ta ta Signal delay B Clears elapsed value at power. Time delay starts at start and output resets at start. Time delay starts at reset and power while start is. Power supply Output T T Signal Flicker F Clears elapsed value at power. Time delay starts at start. After timer completion, control output reverses, elapsed value clears, and time delay starts. Ignores start input during time delay. Power supply Output T T T ta T>ta Pulse delay E Clears elapsed value at power. Time delay starts at start. After timer completion, control output is. Ignores start input during time delay. Power supply Output T T T Hour Meters LCD

127 Precautions in using the LHH series Cautions for use. Input and output connection ) Input connection () Contact input Use highly reliable metal plated contacts. Since the contact s bounce time leads directly to error in the timer operating time, use contacts with as short a bounce time as possible. input input Also, use transistors with a residual of less than V when the transistor is on. * The short-circuit impedance should be less than kω. (When the impedance is Ω, the current coming from the start input terminal is approximately ma and from the reset input terminal is approximately. ma.) Also, the open-circuit impedance should be more than kω. ) Output connection Since the transistor output of hour meter is insulated from the internal circuitry by a photo-coupler, it can be used as an NPN output or PNP (equal value) output. As NPN output Load As PNP output Load s power supply () Non-contact input (Transistor input) Connect with an open collector. Use transistors whose characteristics satisfy the criteria given below. VCEO = Min. V IC = Min. ma ICBO = Max. µa input input () Input wiring When wiring, use shielded wires or metallic wire tubes, and keep the wire lengths as short as possible. Load Load s power supply Hour Meters LCD. Self-diagnosis function If a malfunction occurs, one of the following displays will appear. Display Err- Err- Contents Malfunctioning CPU Malfunctioning memory* Output condition Restoration procedure Enter front reset key or restart hour meter Preset values after restoration Preset value at start-up before the CPU malfunction occurred * Includes the possibility that the EEP-ROM s life has expired.. Power failure memory The EEP-ROM is overwriting with the following timing. Operation mode Overwrite timing G (Totalizing delay) mode Other modes Change of preset value or when power is after start and reset input turns When power is after changing preset value. Terminal connection ) When wiring the terminals, refer to the terminal layout and wiring diagrams and be sure to perform the wiring properly without errors. Tighten the terminal screws with a torque of. N cm or less. The screws are M.. An external power supply is required in order to run the main unit. Power should be applied between terminals () and (). Terminal () acts as the positive connection and terminal () as the negative. ) After turning the hour meter off, make sure that any resulting induced or residual is not applied to power supply terminals () through (). (If the power supply wire is wired parallel to the high wire or power wire, an induced may be generated at the power supply terminal.) ) Have the power supply pass through a switch or relay so that it is applied at one time. Compliance with the CE marking EMC Directive (//EEC) The LHH Preset Hour Meter conforms to the EMC Directive as a simple hour meter. Applicable standards: EN--, EN--

128 x Cautions for use. Insulation sheet Before using a panel mounting type, please pull and remove the insulation sheet in the direction of the arrow. In consideration that the product might be stored for long periods without being used, an insulation sheet is inserted before shipping. Remove the insulation sheet and press the front reset button. LHH hour meter (one-touch installation type) Insulation sheet LHH hour meter (installation frame type) Insulation sheet button button. Waterproof construction LHH hour meter (installation frame type) The operation part of the panel installation type (installation frame type) is constructed to prevent water from entering the unit and a rubber gasket is provided to prevent water from entering the gap between the unit and the panel cutout. There must be sufficient pressure applied to the rubber gasket to prevent water from entering. Be sure to use the mounting screws when installing the mounting frame (ATH). Note: The one-touch installation type is not waterproof. Mounting frame (ATH) LHH preset hour meter ) When using the waterproof type (IP: panel front only), install the hour meter to the front plate with mounting frame ATH (sold separately) and rubber gasket ATH (sold separately). Be sure to tighten using mounting screws. Mounting frame (ATH) Rubber gasket (ATH) When installing the mounting frame and rubber gasket please remove the pre-attached o-ring. ) Panel installation order () Remove o-ring. () Place rubber gasket. () Insert hour meter into panel. () Insert mounting frame from the rear. () Secure with mounting screws (two locations). Do not use in the following environments ) In places where the temperature changes drastically. ) In places where humidity is high and there is the possibility of dew. (When dew forms the display may vanish and other display errors may occur.). Conditions of use ) Do not use on places where there is flammable or corrosive gas, lots of dust, presence of oil, or where the unit might be subject to strong vibrations or shocks. ) Since the cover is made of polycarbonate resin, do not use in places where the unit might come into contact with or be exposed to environments that contain organic solvents such as methyl alcohol, benzene and thinner, or strong alkali substances such as ammonia and caustic soda.. Cautions regarding battery replacement ) Remove wiring before replacing the battery. You may be electrocuted if you come into contact to a part where high is applied. ) Make sure you are not carrying a static electric charge when replacing the battery. ) Battery replacement procedure For LHH hour meter (one-touch installation type) () Remove the up/down hook of the case using a tool. () Pull the unit away from the case. () Remove the battery from the side of the unit. Do not touch the display or other parts. () Before inserting wipe clean the surface of the new battery. () Insert the new battery with the + and sides in the proper position. () After replacing the battery, return the unit to the case. Verify that the hook of the case has properly engaged. () Before using, press the reset button on the front. Tool Hour Meters LCD

129 Precautions in using the LHH series For LHH hour meter (installation frame type) () Remove the battery cover from the case. () Remove the battery from the side of the case. The battery will come loose if you put the battery side face down and lightly shake the unit. () Before inserting wipe clean the surface of the new battery. () Insert the new battery with the + and sides in the proper position. () After replacing the battery, return the battery cover to the case. Verify that the hook of the battery cover is properly engaged. () Before using press the reset button on the front. + side side Hour Meters LCD

130 TH / TH HOUR METER TH / TH... TH series (with reset function) mm inch UL File No.: E CSA File No.: LR Features High-performance compact synchronous motor The accurately turning motor is employed to provide for longer period of measurement. Compact and stylish Easier wiring The flat terminals (#) are quick and easy to connect. Rotary indicator The rotary indicator makes one turn every minutes for monitoring. Compliant with UL, CSA and CE. Typical applications Maintenance management of machine tools, automated machines, control panels, forming machines, medical equipment, generators, compressors, water treatment facilities, presses, motors, etc. TH series (without reset function) Product types Type TH types (without reset button) TH types (with reset button) Part number Part number Hz Hz Hz Hz V AC TH TH V AC ( to V AC) TH TH V AC TH TH V AC TH TH V AC TH TH V AC TH TH V AC TH TH V AC ( to V AC) TH TH V AC TH TH V AC TH TH V AC TH TH V AC TH TH Note) The to V AC, V AC and V AC types are UL-recognized and CSA-certified. For those products, specify U at the end of the part number when ordering. Hour Meters LCD Specifications Rated operating V AC, V AC, V AC, to V AC, V AC, V AC Allowable operating range to % of rated operating Rated frequency Hz, Hz (other model) Counting range to. hours (TH series) to. hours (TH series) Minimum time display. hours ( min) Rated power consumption Approx.. W Insulation resistance (Initial value) Min. M, Between live and dead metal parts (at V DC) Breakdown (Initial value), Vrms, Between live and dead metal parts Max. temperature rise C F Vibration resistance Functional to Hz: cycle/min double amplitude of. mm ( min on axes) Shock resistance Functional Min. m/s { G} ( times on axes) Destructive Min. m/s { G} ( times on axes) Ambient temperature to + C + to F Ambient humidity Max. % RH (non-condensing) Weight g. oz g. oz

131 TH / TH Applicable standard Safety standard EN- Pollution Degree /Over Category II EMC Dimensions (EMI)EN-- Radiation interference electric field strength Noise terminal (EMS)EN-- Static discharge immunity RF electromagnetic field immunity EFT/B immunity Surge immunity Conductivity noise immunity Power frequency magnetic field immunity Voltage dip/instantaneous stop/voltage fluctuation immunity EN Group ClassA EN Group ClassA EN-- kv contact kv air EN-- V/m AM modulation ( MHz to GHz) V/m pulse modulation ( MHz to MHz) EN-- kv (power supply line) EN-- kv (power line) EN-- V/m AM modulation (. MHz to MHz) EN-- A/m ( Hz) EN-- ms, % (rated ) ms, % (rated ), ms, % (rated ), ms, % (rated ) mm inch General tolerance: ±. ±. TH series TH series Case Mounting bracket (supplied) button Decorative nut... Rotary indicator. RESET. Rotary indicator..... No. quick connect terminal (...) (...) (TH and TH series common) Wiring diagram M Panel mounting Panel Case Mounting bracket (supplied) Decorative nut Panel cutout dimensions Hour Meters, electromechanical power supply.. Replacing the TH/ series with the TH/ series The TH/TH series hour meter are interchangeable with the TH/ series hour meter. Use the specified mounting frame because of a different setup method. It is advisable to introduce the TH/ series hour meters for the first time. DIN size and mounting frame setup Panel Mounting frame (sold separately): TH Mounting flame

132 TH / TH DIN SIZE HOUR METER TH / TH.... Silver panel Silver panel mm inch TH series (with reset button) TH series (without reset button) Black panel Black panel UL File No.: E CSA File No.: LR Features High-performance compact syncronous motor The accurately turning motor is employed to provide for longer period of measurement.. Common for / Hz power frequency A lever is used to select Hz or Hz. There is no need to rearrange the control panel and other signal destinations.. Dimensions as per DIN standard The units are in the x DIN standard size. They can be fitted in panels and give refined metallic appearance.. Easier wiring The flat terminals (#) are quick and easy to connect.. Rotary indicator The rotary indicator makes one turn every minutes for monitoring.. Compliant with UL, CSA and CE. Typical applications Maintenance management of machine tools, automated machines, control panels, forming machines, medical equipment, generators, compressors, water treatment facilities, presses, motors, etc. Product types Type Part number Part number Part number Silver panel Black panel Silver panel Black panel Silver panel Black panel TH series (without reset button) TH series (with reset button) V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC THS THS THS THS THS THS TH TH TH TH TH TH V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC THS THS THS THS THS THS TH TH TH TH TH TH to V AC V AC V AC to V AC V AC V AC THS THS THS THS THS THS TH TH TH TH TH TH Note) Only the black-panel type is UL-recognized and CSA-certified. For this type, specify U at the end of the part number when ordering. Specifications Rated operating V AC, V AC, V AC, V AC, V AC, to V AC, V AC, V AC, V AC Allowable operating range to % of rated operating Rated frequency / Hz (selectable by switch) Counting range to. hours (TH series) to. hours (TH series) Minimum time display. hours ( min) Rated power consumption Approx.. W Insulation resistance (Initial value) Min. M ; Between live and dead metal parts (At V DC) Breakdown (Initial value), Vrms Between live and dead metal parts Max. temperature rise C F Vibration resistance Functional to Hz: cycle/min double amplitude of. mm ( min on axes) Shock resistance Functional Min m/s { G} ( times on axes) Destructive Min m/s { G} ( times on axes) Ambient temperature to + C + to + F Ambient humidity Max. % RH (non-condensing) Weight g. oz (TH series) g. oz (TH series) Hour Meters, electromechanical

133 TH / TH Applicable standard Safety standard EN- Pollution Degree /Over Category II EMC (EMI)EN-- Radiation interference electric field strength Noise terminal (EMS)EN-- Static discharge immunity RF electromagnetic field immunity EFT/B immunity Surge immunity Conductivity noise immunity Power frequency magnetic field immunity Voltage dip/instantaneous stop/voltage fluctuation immunity Dimensions (TH and TH series common) EN Group ClassA EN Group ClassA EN-- kv contact kv air EN-- V/m AM modulation ( MHz to GHz) V/m pulse modulation ( MHz to MHz) EN-- kv (power supply line) EN-- kv (power line) EN-- V/m AM modulation (. MHz to MHz) EN-- A/m ( Hz) EN-- ms, % (rated ) ms, % (rated ), ms, % (rated ), ms, % (rated ) mm inch General tolerance: ±. ±. Case Mounting bracket (supplied) Decorative nut No. quick connect terminal (...) (...).. Hz.. Rotary indicator.... Hz Frequency setting switch Wiring diagram Panel mounting Panel Case Mounting bracket (supplied) Decorative nut Panel cutout dimensions mm inch M power supply.... Hour Meters, electromechanical

134 TH DIN DUAL INDICATOR HOUR METER TH.... Silver panel Black panel mm inch Features Upgraded composite function Specified-period measurement and total-time measurement can be monitored on a single hour meter. High-performance compact syncronous motor The accurately turning motor is employed to provide for longer period of measurement. Common for / Hz power frequency A lever is used to select Hz or Hz. There is no need to rearrange the control panel and other signal destinations. Dimensions as per DIN standard The units are in the x DIN standard size. They can be fitted in panels and give refined metallic appearance. Easier wiring The flat terminals (#) are quick and easy to connect. Rotary indicator The rotary indicator makes one turn every minutes for monitoring. Compliant with CE. Product types Type TH series Part number Silver panel Black panel Part number Silver panel Black panel Part number Silver panel Black panel V AC THS TH V AC THS TH to V AC THS TH V AC THS TH V AC THS TH V AC THS TH V AC THS TH V AC THS TH V AC THS TH Specifications Rated operating V AC, V AC, V AC, V AC, V AC, to V AC, V AC, V AC, V AC Allowable operating range to % of rated operating Rated frequency / Hz (selectable by switch) Counting range to. hours (upper side)... with reset indicator to. hours (lower side)... without reset indicator Minimum time display. hours ( min) Rated power consumption Approx.. W Insulation resistance (Initial value) Min. MW; Between live and dead metal parts (At V DC) Breakdown (Initial value), Vrms Between live and dead metal parts Max. temperature rise C F Vibration resistance Functional to Hz: cycle/min double amplitude of. mm ( min on axes) Shock resistance Functional Min m/s { G} ( times on axes) Destructive Min m/s { G} ( times on axes) Ambient temperature to + C + to + F Ambient humidity Max. % RH (non-condensing) Weight g. oz Hour Meters, electromechanical

135 TH Applicable standard Safety standard EN- Pollution Degree /Over Category II EMC Dimensions (EMI)EN-- Radiation interference electric field strength Noise terminal (EMS)EN-- Static discharge immunity RF electromagnetic field immunity EFT/B immunity Surge immunity Conductivity noise immunity Power frequency magnetic field immunity Voltage dip/instantaneous stop/voltage fluctuation immunity EN Group ClassA EN Group ClassA EN-- kv contact kv air EN-- V/m AM modulation ( MHz to GHz) V/m pulse modulation ( MHz to MHz) EN-- kv (power supply line) EN-- kv (power line) EN-- V/m AM modulation (. MHz to MHz) EN-- A/m ( Hz) EN-- ms, % (rated ) ms, % (rated ), ms, % (rated ), ms, % (rated ) mm inch General tolerance: ±. ±.. button Accumulated hours indicator (with reset indicator) Total accmulated hours indicator (without reset indicator) Case Mounting bracket (supplied) No. quick connect terminal (...) (...) Decorative nut. Hz.. Rotary indicator.... Hz Frequency setting switch Wiring diagram Panel mounting Panel cutout dimensions mm inch Panel Case Mounting bracket (supplied) Decorative nut M power supply.... Hour Meters, electromechanical

136 TH DIN MINUTES INDICATOR HOUR METER TH.... Silver panel Black panel mm inch Features Measurement and management in units of minutes Unlike conventional hour meters, the time can be measured and managed in minutes. button The hour meters can be reset to zero for repeated measurement. High-performance compact syncronous motor The accurately turning motor is employed to provide for longer period of measurement. Common for / Hz power frequency A lever is used to select Hz or Hz. There is no need to rearrange the control panel and other signal destinations. Dimensions as per DIN standard The units are in the x DIN standard size. They can be fitted in panels and give refined metallic appearance. Easier wiring The flat terminals (#) are quick and easy to connect. Rotary indicator The rotary indicator makes one turn every seconds for monitoring. Compliant with CE. Product types Type TH series Part number Silver panel Black panel Part number Silver panel Black panel Part number Silver panel Black panel V AC THS TH V AC THS TH to V AC THS TH V AC THS TH V AC THS TH V AC THS TH V AC THS TH V AC THS TH V AC THS TH Specifications Rated operating V AC, V AC, V AC, V AC, V AC, to V AC, V AC, V AC, V AC Allowable operating range to % of rated operating Rated frequency / Hz (selectable by switch) Counting range to. min Minimum time display. min ( sec) Rated power consumption Approx.. W Insulation resistance (Initial value) Min. M, Between live and dead metal parts (At V DC) Breakdown (Initial value), Vrms, Between live and dead metal parts Max. temperature rise C F Vibration resistance Functional to Hz: cycle/min double amplitude of. mm ( min on axes) Shock resistance Functional Min. m/s { G} ( times on axes) Destructive Min. m/s { G} ( times on axes) Ambient temperature to + C + to + F Ambient humidity Max. % RH (non-condensing) Weight g. oz Hour Meters, electromechanical

137 TH Applicable standard Safety standard EN- Pollution Degree /Over Category II EMC Dimensions (EMI)EN-- Radiation interference electric field strength Noise terminal (EMS)EN-- Static discharge immunity RF electromagnetic field immunity EFT/B immunity Surge immunity Conductivity noise immunity Power frequency magnetic field immunity Voltage dip/instantaneous stop/voltage fluctuation immunity EN Group ClassA EN Group ClassA EN-- kv contact kv air EN-- V/m AM modulation ( MHz to GHz) V/m pulse modulation ( MHz to MHz) EN-- kv (power supply line) EN-- kv (power line) EN-- V/m AM modulation (. MHz to MHz) EN-- A/m ( Hz) EN-- ms, % (rated ) ms, % (rated ), ms, % (rated ), ms, % (rated ) mm inch General tolerance: ±. ±. button Case Mounting bracket (supplied) Decorative nut No. quick connect terminal (...) (...).. Hz.. Rotary indicator.... Hz Frequency setting switch Wiring diagram Panel mounting Panel cutout dimensions mm inch Panel Case Mounting bracket (supplied) Decorative nut M power supply.... Hour Meters, electromechanical

138 TH/ DIN HALF SIZE HOUR METER TH / TH.... TH series (with reset button) mm inch TH series (without reset button) Typical applications Management of small generators and food processing machines; hour counting for leased equipment; maintenance management of various equipment, etc. UL File No.: E CSA File No.: LR Features Compact to save panel space The x mm hour meters are just half the DIN x standard size. They help save the panel space. button The hour meters can be reset to zero (TH series). Wide-ranging measurement display The measurement can be displayed from. hour up to. hours (TH series). The dial size is the same as that of x DIN size hour meters (TH and TH series). Easy to install The flat terminals (#) are used for easier wiring. There is no need to undo the lock spring. High-performance sync motor with / Hz selector The noise-resistant, accurately turning motor is employed to provide for longer period of measurement. The power frequency can be selected for or Hz. Rotary indicator The rotary indicator makes one turn every seconds for monitoring. Compliant with UL, CSA and CE. Product types Type Part number V AC TH TH series V AC TH (without reset button) V AC TH V AC TH TH series V AC TH (with reset button) V AC TH V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC V AC Part number TH TH TH TH TH TH Part number to V AC TH V AC TH V AC TH to V AC TH V AC TH V AC TH Specifications Rated operating V AC, V AC, V AC, V AC, V AC, to V AC, V AC, V AC, V AC Allowable operating range to % of rated operating Rated frequency / Hz (selectable by switch) Counting range to. hours (TH series) to. hours (TH series) Minimum time display. hours ( min) Rated power consumption Approx.. W Insulation resistance (Initial value) Min. M, Between live and dead metal parts (At V DC) Breakdown (Initial value), Vrms, Between live and dead metal parts Max. temperature rise C F Vibration resistance Functional to Hz: cycle/min double amplitude of. mm ( min on axes) Shock resistance Functional Min m/s { G} ( times on axes) Destructive Min m/s { G} ( times on axes) Ambient temperature to + C + to + F Ambient humidity Max. % RH (non-condensing) Weight Approx. g. oz Hour Meters, electromechanical

139 TH/ Applicable standard Safety standard EN- Pollution Degree /Over Category II EMC Dimensions (EMI)EN-- Radiation interference electric field strength Noise terminal (EMS)EN-- Static discharge immunity RF electromagnetic field immunity EFT/B immunity Surge immunity Conductivity noise immunity Power frequency magnetic field immunity Voltage dip/instantaneous stop/voltage fluctuation immunity EN Group ClassA EN Group ClassA EN-- kv contact kv air EN-- V/m AM modulation ( MHz to GHz) V/m pulse modulation ( MHz to MHz) EN-- kv (power supply line) EN-- kv (power line) EN-- V/m AM modulation (. MHz to MHz) EN-- A/m ( Hz) EN-- ms, % (rated ) ms, % (rated ), ms, % (rated ), ms, % (rated ) mm inch General tolerance: ±. ±. button (only for TH type) Rotary indicator Frequency selector lever. HOUR METER No. quick connect terminal..... Wiring diagram Panel cutout dimensions mm inch M Panel (thickness: to mm. to. inch) For panel thickness of to mm. to. inch) R. or less power supply Mounting spring (included) Hour Meters, electromechanical Mounting Cut a. mm (.. Swing the mounting spring to the front +.. inch) opening in the panel. of the hour meter to secure the hour. Swing the mounting spring to the rear meter to the panel. of the hour meter and fit the hour. Wire the supplied quick connectors meter into the panel opening. (There and connect to the hour meter. Be is no need to detach the mounting sure to use the supplied insulating spring from the hour meter.) If the sleeves to cover the connectors. panel is to mm. to. inch thick, move the mounting spring to the other hole toward the rear of the hour meter. Fasten Unfasten

140 TH DIN HALF SIZE HOUR METER TH Features. IP waterproof construction The front panel surface keeps water and dust out. Perfect for use in rough conditions.. Includes operation light (LED) The operation LED illuminates so you can quickly verify operation status.. Compliant with UL, c-ul and CE. RoHS Directive compatibility information Product type Installation Measurement time Operation light Rated Part No. V DC THC Panel installation to. hours LED illuminates while operating. V DC THC Note: Products are UL and c-ul certified as standard. (Suffix U is not required part numbers when ordering.) Specifications Type Item THC THC Rated V DC V DC Usage range. to. V DC. to. V DC Rating Measurement time to. hours Min. measurement time. hour ( min.) Power consumption Approx.. W (With rated applied at C F) Insulation resistance (initial) Min. MΩ between charged and uncharged parts (measured at V DC) Electrical characteristics Breakdown (initial) Between charged and uncharged parts:, V AC for minute. Temperature rise Max. C F (measured at rated and resistance law) to Hz ( cycle/min.) Functional vibration resistance Mechanical Single amplitude:. mm ( min. axes) characteristics Functional shock resistance Min. m/s ( times axes) Destructive vibration resistance Min. m/s ( times axes) Operation temperature C to + C F to + F (Without due and frost) Usage conditions Ambient humidity to % RH (relative humidity) (non-condensing) Power supply ripple Approx. % or less (single phase, all-wave rectification) Protective construction IP (front panel with a rubber gasket) Applicable standard EMC (EMI)EN-- Radiation interference electric field strength Noise terminal (EMS)EN-- Static discharge immunity RF electromagnetic field immunity EFT/B immunity Conductivity noise immunity Power frequency magnetic field immunity EN Group ClassA EN Group ClassA EN-- EN-- EN-- EN-- EN-- kv contact kv air V/m AM modulation ( MHz to GHz) kv (power supply line) V/m AM modulation (. MHz to MHz) A/m ( Hz) Hour Meters, electromechanical

141 TH Dimensions and part names (unit: mm inch) Tolerance: ±. ±. Wiring diagram Mounting bracket. R. R. M HOUR METER. h.. Red Black Operation Power supply LED display When the power is turned the green lamp illuminates Installation screw Unit Spring washer. Panel installation diagram Panel cutout dimensions Lead wire.n m to.n m screw torque φ φ. Rubber gasket Installation panel ±. φ. φ ±. (Unit: mm inch) Hour Meters, electromechanical

142 Precautions in using the hour meters. Frequency setting Frequency is specified for AC motor-driven hour meters. Before installing, be sure to check your local power frequency.. Connections TH,,,,,,, Single phase Three phases For measuring energized time of load Hour meter Hour meter Note) Make the connection with the accompanying flat connector first and then with the hour meter's terminal (#). In such case, be sure to cover the connection with the accompanying insulating sleeve. TH, TH DC power source Load Load Lead wire Note) Solder the lead wires in position. For measuring operation time of load Hour meter Hour meter DC motor type hour meter Load Switch (Linked with clutch) Switch (Linked with clutch). Safety precautions Do not use the hour meters in the following places. Where ambient temperature is below or above + C In wet, dusty or gaseous environments Where exposed to vibrations and shocks Outdoors, or where exposed to rain or direct sunlight. Compliant with CE. LHH Ambient conditions: Over category III, contamination factor, indoor use. Ambient temperature and humidity and + C and % to %RH respectively. TH,,,,,,, Ambient conditions: Over category II, contamination factor, indoor use. Ambient temperature and humidity and + C and below %RH respectively. Load Load. -type hour meter Precautions for use If the number indications are off before use, press the reset button and confirm that all zeroes ("") are displayed. ting caution Exercise due caution as an insufficient amount of pressure on the reset button may result in abnormal readings.. Acquisition of CE marking Please abide by the conditions below when using in applications that comply with EN -/IEC - ) Ambient conditions Over category II, pollution level Indoor use Acceptable temperature and humidity range: - to + C, to %RH (with no condensation at C) Under m elevation ) Use the main unit in a location that matches the following conditions. There is minimal dust and no corrosive gas. There is no combustible or explosive gas. There is no mechanical vibration or impacts. There is no exposure to direct sunlight. Located away from large-volume electromagnetic switches and power lines with large electrical currents. ) Connect a breaker that conforms to EN- or EN- to the input section. ) Applied should be protected with an overcurrent protection device (example: T A, V AC time lag fuse) that conforms to the EN/IEC standards. (Free input type) Hour Meters, electromechanical

143 Options and accessories Options. Accessories for (for LCH LCH total counter) Panel cover (black) COUNTER LCH. Lithium battery ( V) Panasonic CR V JAPAN. Installation parts Mounting frame (Suitable for installation frame type LCH total counter and LCH preset counter) RESET Part No.: AEL You can change the design of the front panel by replacing it with this black panel cover. The counter comes with an ash gray panel cover as standard. Note: No panel cover accessory (black) is available for the LCH preset counter. Part No.: ATH Packaged with the LCH (excluding the PC board mounting type). Warning Make sure the + and polarities are positioned correctly. Do not throw the old battery into a fire, short circuit it, take it apart, or allow it to come into contact with heat. The battery is not rechargeable. Part No.: ATH Packaged with the mounting bracket type LCH total counter Rubber gasket (Suitable for installation bracket type LCH total counter and LCH preset counter) Part No.: ATH Packaged with the mounting bracket type LCH total counter Options. Accessories for (for LHH LHH hour meter) Panel cover (black) HOUR METER LHH. Lithium battery ( V) Panasonic CR V JAPAN. Installation parts Mounting frame Suitable for installation frame type LHH hour meter and LHH preset hour meter Options and Accessories for Counters, Hour Meters RESET Part No.: ATH You can change the design of the front panel by replacing it with this black panel cover. The counter comes with an ash gray panel cover as standard. Note: No panel cover option (black) is available for the LHH preset hour meter. Part No.: ATH Packaged with the LHH (excluding the PC board mounting type). Warning Make sure the + and polarities are positioned correctly. Do not throw the old battery into a fire, short circuit it, take it apart, or allow it to come into contact with heat. The battery is not rechargeable. Part No.: ATH Packaged with the mounting bracket type LHH hour meter Rubber gasket Suitable for installation frame type LHH hour meter and LHH preset hour meter Part No.: ATH Packaged with the mounting bracket type LHH hour meter

144 DIN size counters common options Terminal sockets (Unit: mm inch, Tolerance: ± ±.) Type Appearance Dimensions Terminal wiring (Top view) Mounting hole dimensions DIN rail socket (-pin)..... LCH (-pin type). ATC.... φ. φ.... Note: Terminal No. on the main body are identifical to those on the terminal socket... ±.. ±. -M -M. screw holes ±. ±. (or.. dia. holes) The minimum distance between the holes which areparallel drilled. LCH LCH-S LCH-W (-pin type) DIN rail socket (-pin). ATC Note: The terminal numbers on the counter are identifical to those on the terminal socket. φ. φ Note: Terminal No. on the main body are identifical to those on the terminal socket.... ±.. ±. -M -M. screw holes ±. ±. (or.. dia. holes) The minimum distance between the holes which areparallel drilled. Sockets (Unit: mm inch, Tolerance: ± ±.) Type Appearance Dimensions Terminal wiring (Top view) Mounting hole dimensions Rear terminal socket.... LCH (-pin type) AT P cap AD-RC. φ. φ.... φ φ.. φ. φ. φ. φ..... (.) (.) φ φ φ. φ. LCH LCH-S LCH-W (-pin type) Rear terminal socket AT. P cap φ. φ.... φ. φ φ. φ... φ... (.) AT-DP φ. (.) Note: The terminal numbers on the counter are identifical to those on the socket. φ φ φ. φ. Options and Accessories for Counters, Hour Meters

145 DIN size counters common options Rubber gasket Mounting frame.. Applicable for LCH series. Applicable for LCH series ATC.... The rubber gasket is enclosed in the LCH series. AT-DA.. Mounting rails (Applicable for DIN and IEC standards).., ±. ±..R.R Oval hole, Fastening plate.. M M.. AT-DLA Length: m aluminum ATA ATA UP For holding DIN rails. Protective cover for DIN size Hard type Flexible type... AQM AQM Panel cover (Black) LCH Panel cover ( digits) LCH Panel cover ( digits) LCH-S Panel cover ( digits) LCH-S Panel cover ( digits) LCH-W Panel cover ( digits) COUNTER COUNTER COUNTER COUNTER COUNTER RESET LOCK UP RESET LOCK RESET SET/LOCK UP RESET SET/LOCK RESET SET/LOCK LCH LCH DOWN LCH DOWN LCH LCH-W AEL AEL AEL AEL The black panel cover is also available so that you can change the appearance of the panel by changing the panel cover. The color of the standard panel cover is ash gray. AEL Options and Accessories for Counters, Hour Meters

146 Applications The highly accurate, reliable counters can be controlled from the front panel and are suitable for a wide range of applications. Typical Counter Applications DOWN and HOLD-A modes for shipment quantity counting IND and HOLD-C modes for parking lots FULL VACANT PHASE and HOLD-A modes for valve control Rotary encoder To valve Photoelectric switch Motor IN (up count) IN (down count) (stop/start) Entrance Photoelectric switch Exit Shipment quantities are counted to control the conveyor line flow. Incoming and outgoing cars are counted to switch the FULL and VACANT signs. Rotary encoder signals are counted to control a valve aperture. UP and SHOT-A modes for packing a specified number of copies Electric counter Motor Photoelectric switch Printing machine UP and SHOT-B modes for packing medicine tablets Film Marking Cutter UP and SHOT-C modes for counting acceptables Labeling machine IN (up count) Sorting machine Acceptables Mark sensor Mark sensor Rejectables IN (down count) Printed matter is counted to package a specified number of copies. Medicine tablets are packed in specified quantities. Labeled cans alone are counted up. Rejected cans are not counted. UP and SHOT-D modes for winding leader sheet DIR input mode for controlling part stocks PHASE input mode for sizing Mark sensor Electric counter Cutter Leader sheet IN (down count) Rotary encoder IN (counting) Rotary encoder (single-phase) IN (up count) IN (up/down count selection) Pipe Extra leader sheet that is now wound is counted by a rotary encoder and a color detecting sensor. Incoming and outgoing parts are counted to keep parts feeders well-stocked. Teamed up with a rotary encoder, the counter is used to control the cutting length of pipes. Options and Accessories for Counters, Hour Meters

147 Power supplies Power Supplies FP-PS Features High power density with minimal losses Up to.% efficiency (FP-PS-E) Wide ambient temperature range from - C to + C, without performance loss Safety approvals (IEC,UL,C SA.-, EN) Protection class II, without grounding Easy mounting and wiring Extremely compact with optimal air cooling Item FP-PS-E FP-PS-E FP-PS-E Ambient temperature - C to + C, without needing cooling fans Storage temperature - to + C Humidity Max. %, no condensation Vibration IEC --, g - ms, g - ms; shocks/axis, shocks total Shock IEC --, -.Hz: ±.mm;. - Hz: g hours/axis Rated input V AC, Hz Power supply -V DC, -Hz (DC -V), wide range power supply, switching ranges unnecessary Input current Fulfills the requirements of EN-- (limits for harmonic current emissions) Fuse Internal in power supply TAH/V, not accessible Output V DC nominal Accuracy, output ±% over the complete load and input range Adjustable range with potentiometer V V Primary side Secondary side Output capacity (max.) A continuous at V.A (% above nominal load) Dynamic for s, max..a ( % above nominal load) dynamic for.s, max..a continuous at V.A (% above nominal load) Dynamic for s, max..a ( % above nominal load) dynamic for.s, max..a continuous at V.A ( % above nominal load) dynamic for s, max.sec..a ( % above nominal load) dynamic for s, max.x. sec Output capacity (min.) A Current limiting (typ.) A continuous, A dynamic.a continuous, A dynamic.a continuous,.a dynamic Ripple (< MHz) = mvss measured at MHz, Ohms terminated VAC = V.%.%.% VAC = V.%.%.% VAC = V.%.%.% Lifetime of the capacitors All capacitors used are special C long-life-types with a minimum lifetime of, Tu = C (power supply-air flow temperature) Safety and function tests % testing up duration Depends on the load, typically -ms Output Safety extra low (SELV) EN Class of protection Class II (with additional constructive measures) Degree of protection IP Leakage current <,ma (-Hz Netzfrequenz und UEin-max.) Dimensions (WxHxD). x x mm. x. x mm. x x mm Weight Approx. g Approx. g Approx. g Efficiency Safety WB DT Dimensions H Applications, Power Supplies International Standards

148 x International standards International Standards IEC standard International Electrotechnical Commission By promoting international cooperation toward all problems and related issues regarding standardization in the electrical and electronic technology fields, the IEC, a non-governmental organization, was started in October,, for the purpose of realizing mutual understanding on an international level. To this end, the IEC standard was enacted for the purpose of promoting international standardization. Europe EN standard European Standards/Norme Europeennee (France)/Europaishe Norm (Germany) Abbreviation for European Standards. A unified standard enacted by CEN/CENELEC (European Standards Committee/European Electrical Standards Committee). EU and EFTA member nations employ the content of the EN standards into their own national standards and are obligated to abolish those national standards that do not agree with the EN standards. North America UL (Underwiters Laboratories Inc.) LISTING MARK Fig. RECOGNITI MARK Fig. Certification Fig. Component Acceptance Fig. Fig. Fig. This is a non-profit testing organization formed in by a coalition of U.S. fire insurance firms, which tests and approves industrial products (finished products). When electrical products are marketed in the U.S., UL approval is mandated in many states, by state law and city ordinances. In order to obtain UL approval, the principal parts contained in industrial products must also be ULapproved parts. UL approval is divided into two general types. One is called listing (Fig. ), and applies to industrial products (finished products). Under this type of approval, products must be approved unconditionally. The other type is called recognition (Fig. ), and is a conditional approval which applies to parts and materials. CSA (Canadian Standards Association) This was established in as a non-profit, nongovernmental organization aimed at promoting standards. It sets standards for industrial products, parts, and materials, and has the authority to judge electrical products to determine whether they conform to those standards. The CSA is the ultimate authority in the eyes of both the government and the people in terms of credibility and respect. Almost all states and provinces in Canada require CSA approval by law, in order to sell electrical products. As a result, electrical products exported from Japan to Canada are not approved under Canadian laws unless they have received CSA approval and display the CSA mark. Approval is called certification, and products and parts which have been approved are called certified equipment, and display the mark shown in Fig.. The mark shown in Fig. is called the Component Acceptance mark, and indicates conditional approval which is applicable to parts. The C-UL mark shown in Fig. (finished products) and Fig. (parts) indicates that the product has been tested and approved in UL laboratories, based on UL and CSA standards, through mutual approval activities. ENEC mark Germany The ENEC mark, approved by certifying authorities in Europe, is for electronic products. It can be displayed when a product is compliant with the European safety standard (EN standard). Device switches that display the ENEC mark can be freely distributed in the European Economic Area. VDE (Verband Deutscher Elektrotechniker) The VDE laboratory was established mainly by the German Electric Technology Alliance, which was formed in. It carries out safety experiments and passes approval for electrical devices and parts. Although VDE certification is not enforced under German law, punishment is severe should electrical shock or fire occur; therefore, it is, in fact, like an enforcement. TÜV (Technischer Überwachungs-Verein) TÜV is a civilian, non-profit, independent organization that has its roots in the German Boiler Surveillance Association, which was started in for the purpose of preventing boiler accidents. A major characteristic of TÜV is that it exists as a combination of independent organizations (TÜV Rheinland, TÜV Bayern, etc.) throughout Germany. TÜV carries out inspection on a wide variety of industrial devices and equipment, and has been entrusted to handle electrical products, as well, by the government. TÜV inspection and certification is based mainly on the VDE standard. TÜV certification can be obtained from any of the TÜVs throughout Germany and has the same effectiveness as obtaining VDE certification. Shipping Standards Lloyd s Register of Shipping Standards from the Lloyd s Register shipping association based in England. These standards are safety standards for environmental testing of the temperature and vibration tolerances of electrical components used for UMS (unmanned machine rooms in marine vessels) applications. These standards have become international standards for control equipment in all marine vessel applications. No particular action is taken to display the conformation to these standards on the products. Applications, Power Supplies International Standards

149 International standards. Pilot Duty One of the specifications in the UL Industrial Control Equipment regulations at UL (Underwriters Laboratories Inc.), has to do with the grade of contact control capacity by NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) standards. By obtaining both UL and CSA approval for this grade, the product becomes authorized publicly. Pilot Duty A AC applied Electrification Input Breaker [VA] [V] current [A] power [A] power [A] During input During breaker,, Pilot Duty B AC applied Electrification Input Breaker [VA] [V] current [A] power [A] power [A] During input During breaker,., Pilot Duty C AC applied Electrification Input Breaker [VA] [V] current [A] power [A] power [A] During input During breaker.,..., Timers Products name PMS-A/S/M PMS PMH-A PMH-S PMH-M PMH-SD/SDM PMH-W PMH-F LTH LTH-L LTH-W UL (Recognized) CSA (Certified) Lloyd s Register Standards File No. (Standard Rating No.) E AVAC PILOT DUTY C E AVAC PILOT DUTY C E E AVAC PILOT DUTY C AVAC PILOT DUTY C mavdc File No. (Standard No.) E (C-UL) LR LR E (C-UL) Rating AVAC PILOT DUTY C AVAC PILOT DUTY C AVAC PILOT DUTY C AVAC PILOT DUTY C mavdc File No. (Standard No.) Rating / A V AC (resistive) / A V AC (resistive) Remarks QMH PMH SDXM- A/M (Relay output) SDX (Relay output) C C C C E E E E E E AVAC PILOT DUTY C A/HPVAC A/HPVAC AVDC PILOT DUTY C AVAC AVAC /HP, VAC PILOT DUTY C AVAC /HP, VAC PILOT DUTY C AVAC AVAC /HP, VAC PILOT DUTY C AVAC /HP, VAC PILOT DUTY C E (C-UL) LR LR LR LR LR AVAC PILOT DUTY C A/HPVAC A/HPVAC AVDC PILOT DUTY C AVAC AVAC /HP, VAC PILOT DUTY C AVAC /HP, VAC PILOT DUTY C AVAC AVAC /HP, VAC PILOT DUTY C AVAC /HP, VAC PILOT DUTY C / V.A (COSφ.) VA (COSφ.) VA(COSφ.) / A V AC (resistive) / A V AC (resistive) / A V AC (resistive) / A V AC (resistive) Products complying with UL and CSA standards have model numbers ending with. Applications, Power Supplies International Standards

150 Counters LCH LCH-L LCH-S LCH-W LCH Products name UL (Recognized) File No. (Standard Rating No.) E AV AC PILOT DUTY C ma V DC E AV AC PILOT DUTY C ma V DC E to V AC/DC.- V DC V DC File No. (Standard No.) E (C-UL) E (C-UL) E (C-UL) CSA (Certified) Rating AV AC PILOT DUTY C ma V DC AV AC PILOT DUTY C ma V DC to V AC/DC.- V DC V DC Remarks Hour Meters Products name TH and TH series TH and TH series TH and TH series LHH TH series UL (Recognized) File No. (Standard Rating No.) E to,, V AC E,,,,, to,,, V AC E,,,,, to,,, V AC E to V AC/DC. to V DC V DC E V DC V DC CSA (Certified) File No. (Standard Rating No.) LR to,, V AC LR,,,,, to,,, V AC LR,,,,, to,,, V AC E (C-UL) E (C-UL) to V AC/DC. to V DC V DC V DC V DC Remarks For UL-recognized and CSA-certified products, specify U at the end of the model No. Only black panel-mounting type: UL-recognized and CSAcertified For UL-recognized and CSA-certified products, specify U at the end of the model No. Panel-mounting silver type: Not UL-recognized nor CSA-certified Standard products are UL-recognized and CSA-certified. Standard products are UL-recognized and CSA-certified. Standard products are UL-recognized and CSA-certified. Accessories Products name Common mounting parts for timers Common mounting parts for counter UL (Recognized) CSA (Certified) File No. File No. (Standard Rating (Standard Rating No.) No.) E AVAC LR AT-RFDUL (AT) AVAC AT-DFL (ATA) P cap was an approved as an option. AD-RC (AD) E AT-DFK (ATC) E AT-DFK (ATC) (C-UL) AT-RK (AT) AT- RK (AT) E E AV AC AT-RFD (AT) AV AC AT-DFL (ATA) P cap was an approved as an option. AD-RC (AD) AT-DFK (ATC) AT-DFK (ATC) AT-RK (AT) AT- RK (AT) LR E (C-UL) AVAC AT-RFDUL (AT) AVAC AT-DFL (ATA) P cap was an approved as an option. AD-RC (AD) AT-DFK (ATC) AT-DFK (ATC) AT-RK (AT) AT- RK (AT) AV AC AT-RFD (AT) AV AC AT-DFL (ATA) P cap was an approved as an option. AD-RC (AD) AT-DFK (ATC) AT-DFK (ATC) AT-RK (AT) AT- RK (AT) Remarks Applications, Power Supplies International Standards

151 International standards Timer, Time switch, Counter and Hour meter Product classification Timers Time Switch Counters Hour Meters Product name EMC directives Low- directives LTH LTH-L LTH-W PMH EN- SDX EN--/EN-- SDXM-AM PMS-A/S/M PMS QMH EN- A-TB A-TBQ EN--/EN-- EN- LCH LCH-L EN- LCH-S EN--/EN-- LCH-W LCH EN- LCH preset TH TH TH TH TH EN- TH EN--/EN-- TH TH LHH LHH preset TH Note: For detailed information about the compliance conditions, see CE marking under PERCAUTIS IN USING (Common). Applications, Power Supplies International Standards

152 Global Network North America Europe Asia Pacific China Japan Panasonic Electric Works Please contact our Global Sales Companies in: Europe Headquarters Panasonic Electric Works Europe AG Rudolf-Diesel-Ring, Holzkirchen, Tel. + () -, Fax + () -, Austria Panasonic Electric Works Austria GmbH Josef Madersperger Str., Biedermannsdorf, Tel. + () -, Fax + () - PEW Electronic Materials Europe GmbH Ennshafenstraße, Enns, Tel. + (), Fax + (), Benelux Panasonic Electric Works Sales Western Europe B.V. De Rijn, (Postbus ), PJ Best, ( AE Best), Netherlands, Tel. + (), Fax + (), Czech Republic Panasonic Electric Works Czech s.r.o. Sales Offi ce Brno, Administrative centre PLATINIUM, Veveri, Brno, Tel. +, Fax +, France Panasonic Electric Works Sales Western Europe B.V. Succursale française,, rue des petits ruisseaux, Verrières Le Buisson, Tél. + (), Fax + (), Germany Panasonic Electric Works Europe AG Rudolf-Diesel-Ring, Holzkirchen, Tel. + () -, Fax + () -, Hungary Panasonic Electric Works Europe AG Magyarországi Közvetlen Kereskedelmi Képviselet, Budapest, Neumann János u.., Tel. + Ireland Panasonic Electric Works UK Ltd. Irish Branch Offi ce, Dublin, Tel. + (), Fax + (), Italy Panasonic Electric Works Italia srl Via del Commercio - (Z.I. Ferlina), Bussolengo (VR), Tel. +, Fax +, Nordic Countries Panasonic Electric Works Nordic AB Knarrarnäsgatan, Kista, Sweden, Tel. +, Fax +, Jungmansgatan, Malmö, Tel. +, Fax +, re-security.com Poland Panasonic Electric Works Polska sp. z o.o ul. Wołoska A, - Warszawa, Tel. + () --, Fax + () --, Portugal Panasonic Electric Works España S.A. Portuguese Branch Offi ce, Avda Adelino Amaro da Costa R/C J, - Cascais, Tel. +, Fax + Spain Panasonic Electric Works España S.A. Barajas Park, San Severo, Madrid, Tel. +, Fax +, Switzerland Panasonic Electric Works Schweiz AG Grundstrasse, Rotkreuz, Tel. + (), Fax + (), United Kingdom Panasonic Electric Works UK Ltd. Sunrise Parkway, Linford Wood, Milton Keynes, MK LF, Tel. + (), Fax + (), North & South America USA PEW Corporation of America Central Avenue, New Providence, N.J., Tel. ---, Fax ---, Asia Pacifi c / China / Japan China Panasonic Electric Works (China) Co., Ltd. Level, Tower W, The Towers Oriental Plaza, No., East Chang An Ave., Dong Cheng District, Beijing, Tel. () -, Fax () - Hong Kong Panasonic Electric Works RM-, /F, Tower, The Gateway, Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong, Tel. () -, Fax () - (Hong Kong) Co., Ltd. Japan Panasonic Electric Works Co., Ltd. Kadoma, Kadoma-shi, Osaka -, Japan, Tel. () -, Fax () -, Singapore Panasonic Electric Works Asia Pacific Pte. Ltd. Thomson Road, #-/, United Square, Singapore, Tel. (), Fax () Copyright Printed in Germany euen /

DIN48 SIZE ANALOG MULTI-RANGE CYCLIC TWIN TIMERS

DIN48 SIZE ANALOG MULTI-RANGE CYCLIC TWIN TIMERS DIN SIZE ANALOG MULI-ANGE CYCLIC WIN IMES UL File No.: E122222 CSA File No.: L39291 FEAUES A single twin timer unit that repeats (variable) ON/OFF. Multiple ranges with a.1 s to 5 h time specification

More information

Timers/Time Switches/Counters/Hour Meters

Timers/Time Switches/Counters/Hour Meters 0 0 imers/ime Switches/Counters/Hour Meters imers/ime Switches/Counters/Hour Meters CBE 0.0 Matsushita Electric Works, td. MUI-NGE NOG IME SDXM-/M SDXM-/M imers ohs Directive compatibility information

More information

COMPACT SIZE HIGH PRECISION TIMERS VARIOUS OUTPUT & OPERATION MODE TYPES. UL File No.: E CSA File No.: LR39291

COMPACT SIZE HIGH PRECISION TIMERS VARIOUS OUTPUT & OPERATION MODE TYPES. UL File No.: E CSA File No.: LR39291 COMP SIZE HIGH PRECISI IMERS VARIOUS OUPU & OPERAI MODE YPES SDX (one) SDX imers Features UL File No.: E22222 CSA File No.: LR3929 3 operation modes added for fuller lineup Now, operation modes include

More information

Model Number Structure. Ordering Information. Solid-state Power OFF-delay Timer H3DE-H. Model Number Legend. List of Models

Model Number Structure. Ordering Information. Solid-state Power OFF-delay Timer H3DE-H. Model Number Legend. List of Models Solid-state Power OFF-delay Timer H3DE-H Timers Two delay-time models available. 0.1 to 12 seconds (S Series) 1 to 120 seconds (L Series) Covers wide range of supply voltage. Model Number Structure Model

More information

1 T max. T min. = ± 100 (%) time. time T = T 1 + T 2 T 3 T 1. T: Final time-up time T 1 : Time elapsed T 2 : New setting T 3 : Previous setting

1 T max. T min. = ± 100 (%) time. time T = T 1 + T 2 T 3 T 1. T: Final time-up time T 1 : Time elapsed T 2 : New setting T 3 : Previous setting r Glossary Term Definitions ON The period of during which a required is being applied to the operating circuit. OFF The period of between the moment that begins and the moment that the operating is applied

More information

DIN48 SIZE MULTI-RANGE ANALOG TIMER. Protective construction. Time range IP65 IP50 IP selectable ranges 1s to 500h IP50 IP65 IP50

DIN48 SIZE MULTI-RANGE ANALOG TIMER. Protective construction. Time range IP65 IP50 IP selectable ranges 1s to 500h IP50 IP65 IP50 12 Socket mount PRODUC YPE ype 62.5 2.461 Operation mode DIN SIZE MULI-RANGE ANALOG IMER mm inch Flush mount 8 operation modes Pulse -delay Pulse Flicker Pulse -flicker Differential /-delay (1) (2) Signal

More information

Contents H3CR. DIN 48 x 48-mm Multifunctional Timer Series. Broad Line-up of H3CR Series H3CR-A. Solid-state Timer. Common to ALL Timers

Contents H3CR. DIN 48 x 48-mm Multifunctional Timer Series. Broad Line-up of H3CR Series H3CR-A. Solid-state Timer. Common to ALL Timers Solid-state Timer H3CR DIN 48 x 48-mm Multifunctional Timer Series Conforms to EN61812-1 and EN60664-1 (VDE0110) 4 kv/2 for Low Voltage, and EMC Directives. Approved by UL and CSA. Lloyds/NK approvals.

More information

Solid-state Timer H3DE

Solid-state Timer H3DE Solid-state Timer H3DE DIN-rail Mounted, Standard 22.5-mm Width Timer Range A wide AC/DC power supply range (24 to 230 VAC/DC) reduces the number of timer models kept in stock. (except for H3DE-H) 12-VDC

More information

MULTI-RANGE ANALOG TIMER

MULTI-RANGE ANALOG TIMER MULI-RANGE ANALOG IMER PM4S imers PM4S RoHS Directive compatibility information http://www.nais-e.com/ Features 1. Economic pricing that promptly reflects market demands Remarkable economic pricing is

More information

Technical Information General Purpose Relays

Technical Information General Purpose Relays Glossary CONTACTS Contact Form The contact mechanism of the Relay. Number of Contact Poles The number of contact circuits. Rated Load The rated load of the contact of the Relay, which determines the characteristic

More information

Solid-state Timer H3DS

Solid-state Timer H3DS Solid-state Timer H3DS DIN Track Mounted, Standard 17.5-mm Width Timer Range A wide AC/DC power supply range (24 to 230 VAC/ 24 to 48 VDC) reduces the number of timer models kept in stock. (24 to 230 VAC/VDC

More information

Solid-state Timer H3CR. DIN 48 x 48-mm Multifunctional Timer Series. Broad Line-up of H3CR Series H3CR-A

Solid-state Timer H3CR. DIN 48 x 48-mm Multifunctional Timer Series. Broad Line-up of H3CR Series H3CR-A Solid-state Timer H3CR DIN 48 x 48-mm Multifunctional Timer Series Conforms to EN61812-1 and EN60664-1 (VDE0110) 4 kv/2. Conforms to EMC standards (EN50081-2 and EN50082-2). Approved by UL and CSA. Lloyds/NK

More information

Solid-State Digital Counter H7AN

Solid-State Digital Counter H7AN Solid-State Digital Counter Preset and Totalizing Counters with Up to 8-Digit LED Displays Draw-out construction allows setting, servicing without disconnecting wiring Choose from selectable UP/DOWN or

More information

Analog Timer TTL Series

Analog Timer TTL Series Analog r TTL Series Part Number Description TTL - ❶ ❷ ❸ ❶ Pin Type 8 : 8Pin Socket and Panel mounted ❷ Timing Mode A : A, A1, F1, I B : A, A1, B, F ❸ Supply Voltage 110/220VAC 24VDC 110VDC General Specification

More information

Solid-state Twin Timer

Solid-state Twin Timer Solid-state Twin Timer -F Operates in flicker- or flicker- start mode with one Unit. Independent - and -time settings. Combinations of long - or -time and short - or -time setting are possible. Long time

More information

TYPICAL COUNTER APPLICATIONS

TYPICAL COUNTER APPLICATIONS TYPIAL OUNTE APPLIATIONS The highly accurate, reliable counters can be controlled from the front panel and are suitable for a wide range of applications. TYPIAL OUNTE APPLIATIONS DOWN and HOLD-A modes

More information

Timers GT3F. GT3F Series True Power OFF Delay Timers. Phone: Fax: Web: -

Timers GT3F. GT3F Series True Power OFF Delay Timers. Phone: Fax: Web:  - Key features: True power OFF-delay up to minutes No external control switch necessary Available with reset inputs Mountable in sockets or flush panel Specifications Operation UL, c-ul Listed File No. E55996

More information

DIN 48 SIZE DIGITAL TIMER. UL File No.: E C-UL File No.: E122222

DIN 48 SIZE DIGITAL TIMER. UL File No.: E C-UL File No.: E122222 DIN SIZE DIGITAL TIME 4..9 mm inch 8-pin type -pin type Screw type Product types UL File No.: E C-UL File No.: E Features Wide time range The operation time range covers from 0.0 sec. to 9999 hours. The

More information

Relays & Sockets. RF1V Force Guided Relays/SF1V Relay Sockets. Certification Organization/ File Number. UL/c-UL File No.

Relays & Sockets. RF1V Force Guided Relays/SF1V Relay Sockets. Certification Organization/ File Number. UL/c-UL File No. RFV Key features: Compact and EN compliant RFV force guided relays Force guided contact mechanism (EN00 Type A TÜV approved) Contact configuration -pole (NO-NC, 3NO-NC) 6-pole (NO-NC, NO-NC, 3NO-3NC) Built-in

More information

Solid-state Timer H3DE

Solid-state Timer H3DE Solid-state Timer H3DE CSM_H3DE_DS_E_3_2 DIN Track Mounted, Standard 22.5-mm Width Timer Range A wide AC/DC power supply range (24 to 230 VAC/DC) reduces the number of timer models kept in stock. (except

More information

No mark Time-limit SPDT (1c) A Time-limit DPDT (2c) B Time-limit SPDT (1c), Instantaneous SPDT (1c) S DIN W48 H48mm.

No mark Time-limit SPDT (1c) A Time-limit DPDT (2c) B Time-limit SPDT (1c), Instantaneous SPDT (1c) S DIN W48 H48mm. Series Digital LCD Timer DIN W48 H48mm Features Power supply : 4-4VAC 5/6Hz, 4-4VDC universal Easy to switch Up/Down mode programmable output modes and timing ranges () Selectable function by front digital

More information

Solid-state Timer H3DS

Solid-state Timer H3DS Solid-state Timer H3DS Timers DIN Track Mounted, Standard 17.5-mm Width Timer Range A wide AC/DC power supply range (24 to 230 VAC/ 24 to 48 VDC) reduces the number of timer models kept in stock. (24 to

More information

22 Series Relays. Technical Data...1. Specifications...2. Model Number Structure - Relays...3. Model Number Selection

22 Series Relays. Technical Data...1. Specifications...2. Model Number Structure - Relays...3. Model Number Selection Relays 22 Technical Data...1 Specifications...2 Model Number Structure - Relays...3 Model Number Selection... 4-5 Electrical Characteristics...6 Accessories...7 Dimensions...8 Instructions...10 Safety

More information

Solid-state Timer H3DS

Solid-state Timer H3DS Solid-state Timer H3DS CSM_H3DS_DS_E_2_1 DIN Track Mounted, Standard 17.5-mm Width Timer Range A wide AC/DC power supply range (24 to 230 VAC/ 24 to 48 VDC) reduces the number of timer models kept in stock.

More information

OMRON. H3DE - Standard Timer. H3DE-G - Star-Delta Timer. H3DE-F - Twin Timer. H3DE-H - Power OFF- Delay Timer

OMRON. H3DE - Standard Timer. H3DE-G - Star-Delta Timer. H3DE-F - Twin Timer. H3DE-H - Power OFF- Delay Timer OMRON Analog Set Multifunction Timers Series To view data sheets, click on any link below: - Standard Timer -G - Star-Delta Timer -F - Twin Timer -H - Power OFF- Delay Timer Multifunction Timer Analog

More information

Timers. GT3A Series Analog Timers. GT3A-1 GT3A-2 GT3A-3 GT3A-4,-5,-6 Operation Multi-mode Multi-mode with inputs (11 pins) Time Range

Timers. GT3A Series Analog Timers. GT3A-1 GT3A-2 GT3A-3 GT3A-4,-5,-6 Operation Multi-mode Multi-mode with inputs (11 pins) Time Range GT3A Key features: 4 selectable operation modes on each model External start, reset, and gate inputs Panel mount or socket mount Large variety of timing functions and output status indicating LEDs UL,

More information

IDEC RJ22 Series Slim Power Relays (Bifurcated Contacts)

IDEC RJ22 Series Slim Power Relays (Bifurcated Contacts) IDEC RJ22 Series Slim Relays (Bifurcated Contacts) Phone: 00.94.042 - Fax:.723.4773 - Web: www.clrwtr.com - Email: info@clrwtr.com RJ Series Slim Relay Plug-in Terminal (Bifurcated Contacts) High contact

More information

Timers/Time Switches/Counters/Hour Meters

Timers/Time Switches/Counters/Hour Meters 0 0 imers/ime Switches/Counters/Hour Meters MUI-RANGE ANAOG IMER PMS imers PMS Features. Economic pricing that promptly reflects market demands Remarkable economic pricing is implemented in pursuit of

More information

20 Series Power Relays

20 Series Power Relays Power Relays 0 Technical Data... Specification... Model Number Structure - Power Relays...3 Model Number Selection... - 7 Accessories... Mounting Clips... Electrical Characteristics... Dimensions... Instructions...3

More information

AC/DC DIGITAL CLAMP METER OPERATION MANUAL

AC/DC DIGITAL CLAMP METER OPERATION MANUAL AC/DC DIGITAL CLAMP METER OPERATION MANUAL HYS005661 A0 ACCESSORIES 6. ACCESSORIES 1) Test Leads: Electric Ratings 1000V 10A 1 pair (set) 2) Operating Manual 1 copy 3) 1.5V AAA Battery 3 piece - - 55 -

More information

Suitable for lighting and motor load, 1 Form A 50A latching relays

Suitable for lighting and motor load, 1 Form A 50A latching relays Suitable for lighting and motor load, 50A latching relays DJ-H RELAYS (ADJH) 9.0 5 1 0.2 9.0 5 New 1 FEATURES 1. High inrush capability Tungsten load (TV-20 class) Electronic ballast load (NEMA10) Capacitive

More information

DATASHEET - ETR4-51-A. Delivery program. Technical data General. Timing relay, star-delta, 50 ms, 1W, 3-60s, VAC/DC

DATASHEET - ETR4-51-A. Delivery program. Technical data General. Timing relay, star-delta, 50 ms, 1W, 3-60s, VAC/DC DATASHEET - ETR4-51-A Timing relay, star-delta, 50 ms, 1W, 3-60s, 24-240VAC/DC Part no. ETR4-51-A Catalog No. 031884 Eaton Catalog No. XTTR6A60S51B EL-Nummer 0004133308 (Norway) Delivery program Product

More information

Contents H3DS. DIN Track Mounted, Standard 17.5-mm Width Timer Range. Broad Line-up of H3DS Series. Solid-state Timer. Common to ALL Timers H3DS-X

Contents H3DS. DIN Track Mounted, Standard 17.5-mm Width Timer Range. Broad Line-up of H3DS Series. Solid-state Timer. Common to ALL Timers H3DS-X Solid-state Timer H3DS DIN Track Mounted, Standard 17.5-mm Width Timer Range A wide AC/DC power supply range (24 to 230 VAC/ 24 to 48 VDC) reduces the number of timer models kept in stock. (24 to 230 VAC/VDC

More information

Timers/Time Switches/Counters/Hour Meters

Timers/Time Switches/Counters/Hour Meters 06 07 Timers/Time Switches/Counters/Hour Meters HOUR METER TH13 TH23 Hour Meters 52 2.047 52 2.047 54 2.126 TH23 series (with reset function) UL File No.: E42876 CSA File No.: LR39291 Features 1. High-performance

More information

Multi-voltage Multi-function. BE: Off-delay with control signal BE: Off-delay with control signal CE: On- and off-delay with control signal

Multi-voltage Multi-function. BE: Off-delay with control signal BE: Off-delay with control signal CE: On- and off-delay with control signal 83 Modular timers 12-16 A 83 Multi-function timer range 83.01 - Multi-function & multi-voltage, 1 Pole 83.02 - Multi-function & multi-voltage, 2 Pole (timed + instantaneous options), external time setting

More information

TA8435H/HQ TA8435H/HQ PWM CHOPPER-TYPE BIPOLAR STEPPING MOTOR DRIVER. FEATURES TOSHIBA BIPOLAR LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT SILICON MONOLITHIC

TA8435H/HQ TA8435H/HQ PWM CHOPPER-TYPE BIPOLAR STEPPING MOTOR DRIVER. FEATURES TOSHIBA BIPOLAR LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT SILICON MONOLITHIC TOSHIBA BIPOLAR LINEAR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT SILICON MONOLITHIC TA8435H/HQ TA8435H/HQ PWM CHOPPER-TYPE BIPOLAR STEPPING MOTOR DRIVER. The TA8435H/HQ is a PWM chopper-type sinusoidal micro-step bipolar stepping

More information

Section. Timers. Selection Guide... G-2. Timing Diagrams Overview... G-4. W G RTE Series Analog Timers... G-8 Accessories... G-11 Dimensions...

Section. Timers. Selection Guide... G-2. Timing Diagrams Overview... G-4. W G RTE Series Analog Timers... G-8 Accessories... G-11 Dimensions... Selection uide............. - iming Diagrams Overview....... - N! W RE Series Analog...... - NE ESI Accessories................. -11 D Dimensions.................. -1 A Series Analog.... -15 D Series Digital....

More information

ON-delay operation 8-pin round socket DPDT --- H3CA-8 H3CA-8 SPDT SPDT H3CA-8H H3CA-8H

ON-delay operation 8-pin round socket DPDT --- H3CA-8 H3CA-8 SPDT SPDT H3CA-8H H3CA-8H Authorised Distributors:- Intech Systems Chennai Pvt. Ltd, Chennai-600 032 Ph: +91 44 4353 8888 Fax: 044 4353 7888 E-mail: info@intechchennai.com Website: www.intechchennai.com Solid-state Timer CSM DS_E_

More information

Model Number Structure

Model Number Structure Current Sensor CSM DS_E Solid-state, Plug-in Current Sensor Applicable to motor overcurrent protection and 3-phase AC current detection. Inverse-type, start-up lock type, and instantaneous type overcurrent

More information

38 Series - Relay interface modules A

38 Series - Relay interface modules A 38 Series - Relay interface modules 0.1-2 - 3-5 - 6-8 A Common features Instant ejection of relay by plastic retaining clip Integral coil indication and protection circuit EMR Electromechanical Relays

More information

38 Series - Relay interface modules A

38 Series - Relay interface modules A 38 Series - Relay interface modules 0.1-2 - 3-5 - 6-8 A Common features Instant ejection of relay by plastic retaining clip Integral coil indication and protection circuit 6.2 mm wide EMR - DC, AC or AC/DC

More information

Power supply voltage Output Timer function Features Model No Single-function with one input/output (two circuits)

Power supply voltage Output Timer function Features Model No Single-function with one input/output (two circuits) Controller CSM DS_E_3_1 Offers High-speed Input Response of 0.1 ms and Equipped with Built-in imer High-speed response of 0.1 ms. Ideal as a two-input Controller. Lineup includes the -BK with flip-flop

More information

60 Series - General purpose relays 6-10 A. Features Plug-in mount 10 A General purpose relay

60 Series - General purpose relays 6-10 A. Features Plug-in mount 10 A General purpose relay Series - General purpose relays - 0 A Features Plug-in mount 0 A General purpose relay.. & pole changeover contacts Cadmium Free contacts (preferred version) AC coils & DC coils UL Listed (certain relay/socket

More information

Timing Mode Supply Voltage Trigger Options Reset Options Outputs Cat. No V AC Power On Power Off. Repeat Cycle OFF-Start

Timing Mode Supply Voltage Trigger Options Reset Options Outputs Cat. No V AC Power On Power Off. Repeat Cycle OFF-Start Bulletin -HR Plug-in iming Relays Product election/catalog Number Explanation Bulletin ON-Delay iming Relays ocket or Panel Mounted iming Range From. s h -pin base for socket cat. nos. -HN, -HN, -HN rigger:

More information

MasterINTERFACE 39 Series - Relay interface modules

MasterINTERFACE 39 Series - Relay interface modules MasterINTERFACE 39 Series - Relay interface modules Common features Space saving 6.2 mm wide Connections for 16-way jumper link Integral coil indication and protection circuit Secure retention and easy

More information

MK-S (New Models) General-purpose Relays. New Super MK Relays. Models with Latching Lever Added to the Series. Features. Model Number Structure

MK-S (New Models) General-purpose Relays. New Super MK Relays. Models with Latching Lever Added to the Series. Features. Model Number Structure General-purpose Relays MK-S (New Models) CSM_MK-S_DS_E 1 New Super MK Relays. Latching Lever Added to the Series. Same mounting and internal wiring as the previous Super MK Relays Built-in mechanical indicator

More information

DIN 48 SIZE DIGITAL TIMER. UL File No.: E C-UL File No.: E122222

DIN 48 SIZE DIGITAL TIMER. UL File No.: E C-UL File No.: E122222 DIN SIZE DIGIAL L4H/-L imers L4H imers Pin type 4..9 mm inch Screw terminal type RoHS Directive compatibility information http://www.nais-e.com/ UL File No.: E C-UL File No.: E Features. Bright and Easy-to-Read

More information

Solid-state Timer. Operation/resetting system Time-limit contact Time ranges Model

Solid-state Timer. Operation/resetting system Time-limit contact Time ranges Model Solid-state Timer PCB-mounting Time Unit for High-frequency Applications Ideal for high-frequency applications with 1-ms reset time (including during operation) either for power resets or external resets.

More information

2 Pole CO, 8 A Plug-in 2 CO (DPDT) 1 CO (SPDT) 8/15 16/25* 250/ /400 2,000 4, /0.5/ /0.5/ (5/5) 300 (10/5)

2 Pole CO, 8 A Plug-in 2 CO (DPDT) 1 CO (SPDT) 8/15 16/25* 250/ /400 2,000 4, /0.5/ /0.5/ (5/5) 300 (10/5) 46 Series - Relays for railway applications 8-16 A 46 SERIES Features Plug-in power relays: 8 A, 2 pole 16 A, 1 pole Complies with EN 45545-2:2013 (protection against fire of materials), EN 61373 (resistance

More information

38 SERIES. Relay interface modules A. EMR Electromechanical Relays. Common features. SSR Solid State Relays. 6.

38 SERIES. Relay interface modules A. EMR Electromechanical Relays. Common features. SSR Solid State Relays. 6. 38 Relay interface modules 0.1-2 - 3-5 - 6-8 - 16 A 38 Common features Instant ejection of relay by plastic retaining clip Integral coil indication and protection circuit 6.2 mm wide EMR - DC, AC or AC/DC

More information

DATASHEET - ETR4-70-A. Delivery program. Timing relay, 2W, 0.05s-100h, multi-function, VAC/DC, potentiometer connection

DATASHEET - ETR4-70-A. Delivery program. Timing relay, 2W, 0.05s-100h, multi-function, VAC/DC, potentiometer connection DATASHEET - ETR4-70-A Delivery program Timing relay, 2W, 0.05s-100h, multi-function, 24-240VAC/DC, potentiometer connection Part no. ETR4-70-A Catalog No. 031888 Eaton Catalog No. XTTR6A100H70B EL-Nummer

More information

Monitoring voltages of 3-phase 4 wires with a single unit

Monitoring voltages of 3-phase 4 wires with a single unit VOLTAGE RELAY PTS TYPE High-performance under-voltage relay that activates output when all 3-phase voltages fall below a reference voltage by monitoring voltage on each phase of 4 wires FEATURES Monitoring

More information

Over or Under Current. Over and Under Current Monitor. Current Transducer. Current Indicator. DIN Rail Mounting Current Monitors

Over or Under Current. Over and Under Current Monitor. Current Transducer. Current Indicator. DIN Rail Mounting Current Monitors Selection Guide...8.2 Over or Under ECS... 8.4 TCS... 8.8 Over and Under Monitor ECSW... 8.6 Transducer TCSA... 8.10 DCSA... 8.12 Indicator LCS... 8.14 LPM... 8.14 DIN Rail Mounting CM-SFS CM-SRS.1 CM-SRS.2

More information

3.5 mm contact pin pitch 1 Pole 12 A PCB direct or via socket

3.5 mm contact pin pitch 1 Pole 12 A PCB direct or via socket 41 Low profile PCB relays 8-12 - 16 41 1 & 2 Pole - Low profile (15.7 mm height) 41.31-1 Pole 12 (3.5 mm pin pitch) 41.52-2 Pole 8 (5 mm pin pitch) 41.61-1 Pole 16 (5 mm pin pitch) PCB mount - direct or

More information

MasterINTERFACE 39 Series - Relay interface modules

MasterINTERFACE 39 Series - Relay interface modules Common features Space saving 6.2 mm wide Connections for 16-way jumper link Integral coil indication and protection circuit Secure retention and easy ejection by plastic clip Dual screw head (blade+cross)

More information

Timers GE1A. GE1A Series ON Delay Timers Single Function

Timers GE1A. GE1A Series ON Delay Timers Single Function Key features: DPDT or SPDT + instantaneous SPDT 8-pin, octal base 8 time ranges Repeat error ±0.2% maximum Large, clear knob for easy setting Instant monitoring of operational status by LED indicators

More information

WHEN A PLC IS TOO MUCH, AND SPACE FOR

WHEN A PLC IS TOO MUCH, AND SPACE FOR WHEN A PLC IS TOO MUCH, AND SPACE FOR A RELAY SEQUENCE CIRCUIT IS TOO LITTLE Pattern Selector 59 2.33 66 2.6 70 2.75 No programming required Select from among 15 preset patterns Wiring far simpler than

More information

Timers. GT3A Series Analog Timers. GT3A-1 GT3A-2 GT3A-3 GT3A-4,-5,-6 Operation Multi-mode Multi-mode with inputs (11 pins) Time Range 13.

Timers. GT3A Series Analog Timers. GT3A-1 GT3A-2 GT3A-3 GT3A-4,-5,-6 Operation Multi-mode Multi-mode with inputs (11 pins) Time Range 13. GT3A GT3A Key features: 4 selectable operation modes on each model External start, reset, and gate inputs Panel mount or socket mount Large variety of timing functions and output status indicating LEDs

More information

Multi-function 11 pin Plug-in for use with 90 series sockets

Multi-function 11 pin Plug-in for use with 90 series sockets 88 88 Multi-voltage and multi-function timer range Front panel or socket mount 8 and 11 pin plug-in versions available Time scales from 0.05 s to 100 h 1 delayed contact +1 instantaneous contact version

More information

RJ Series Slim Power Relays

RJ Series Slim Power Relays RJ Series RJ Series Slim Relays Circuit Breakers Terminal Blocks Timers Display Lights Switches & Pilot Lights Compact and rugged power relays. Large switching capacity. Compact housing only.7-mm wide.

More information

Block Contactors. Contents. Panorama 3-pole Contactors... 2/2 4-pole Contactors... 2/4

Block Contactors. Contents. Panorama 3-pole Contactors... 2/2 4-pole Contactors... 2/4 /0 Block Contactors Contents Panorama -pole Contactors... / 4-pole Contactors... /4 -pole Contactors: Description and Ordering Details A 9... A 0 Contactors (a.c. Operated)... /6 A 4... AF 60 Contactors

More information

Bulletin 700-HX Multifunction Digital Timing Relay

Bulletin 700-HX Multifunction Digital Timing Relay Bulletin 700-HX Multifunction Digital Timing Relay Model Operating Mode Timing Range Socket Type Contact Output No. of Pins Input Voltage Cat. No. Cat. No. 700 HX A mode: Signal ON-Delay 1 A-1 mode: Signal

More information

Multi Function Timer with Free power, Compact size W38 H42mm

Multi Function Timer with Free power, Compact size W38 H42mm Multi Function with Free power, ompact size W8 H4mm Features Wide power supply range : 100-40VA 50/0Hz, 4-40VD (universal), 4VA 50/0Hz / 4VD (universal), 1VD Various output operations( operation modes)

More information

SLB 0587 SLB Dimmer IC for Halogen Lamps

SLB 0587 SLB Dimmer IC for Halogen Lamps Dimmer IC for Halogen Lamps SLB 0587 Preliminary Data CMOS IC Features Phase control for resistive and inductive loads Sensor operation no machanically moved switching elements Operation possible from

More information

COMPACT AND HIGH CAPACITY GENERAL PURPOSE POWER RELAYS

COMPACT AND HIGH CAPACITY GENERAL PURPOSE POWER RELAYS COMPACT AND HIGH CAPACITY GENERAL PURPOSE POWER RELAYS HK RELAYS (AHK) RoHS Directive compatibility information http://www.nais-e.com/ FEATURES Compact and high-capacity Form C: A, Form C: high capacity

More information

T ime Delay Relays General information

T ime Delay Relays General information General information Time delay relays FUJI time delay relays feature top performance and dependability. These compact industrial time delay relays are specifically designed for process control, machine

More information

onlinecomponents.com

onlinecomponents.com General information Time delay relays FUJI time delay relays feature top performance and dependability. These compact industrial time delay relays are specifically designed for process control, machine

More information

3.5 mm contact pin pitch 1 Pole 12 A PCB direct or via socket

3.5 mm contact pin pitch 1 Pole 12 A PCB direct or via socket 41 Series - Low profile PCB relays 8-12 - 16 A Features 41.31 41.52 41.61 1 & 2 Pole - Low profile (15.7 mm height) 41.31-1 Pole 12 A (3.5 mm pin pitch) 41.52-2 Pole 8 A (5 mm pin pitch) 41.61-1 Pole 16

More information

Electronic timers CT-S range Selection and ordering details

Electronic timers CT-S range Selection and ordering details CT-S range Selection and ordering details Characteristics CT-S range CT-MFS 1SVR 430 010 F 0200 3 multifunction and 21 multi-range Continuous supply voltage range (24-240VAC/DC) or multisupply voltage

More information

3.5 mm contact pin pitch 1 Pole 12 A PCB direct or via socket

3.5 mm contact pin pitch 1 Pole 12 A PCB direct or via socket 8-12 - 16 A Features 41.31 41.52 41.61 1 & 2 Pole - Low profile (15.7 mm height) 41.31-1 Pole 12 A (3.5 mm pin pitch) 41.52-2 Pole 8 A (5 mm pin pitch) 41.61-1 Pole 16 A (5 mm pin pitch) PCB mount - direct

More information

ELECTRONIC COUNTER (with pre-scaling function) UL File No.: E C-UL File No.: E122222

ELECTRONIC COUNTER (with pre-scaling function) UL File No.: E C-UL File No.: E122222 EECTRIC (with pre-scaling function) C-S Counters C-S -digit type -digit type pin type type U File No.: E C-U File No.: E Features. Bright and Easy-to-Read Display A brand new bright -color backlight CD

More information

Controls Contactors and Contactor Assemblies Special Applications

Controls Contactors and Contactor Assemblies Special Applications Controls Contactors and Contactor Assemblies Special Applications Price groups 1B, 1H /2 Introduction More information can be found on the Internet: see the opening information, page 13 - Contactors for

More information

Two-way Action Test Button (Models with Lockable Test Button) For Momentary Operation

Two-way Action Test Button (Models with Lockable Test Button) For Momentary Operation General Purpose Relays MKS Exceptionally Reliable General Purpose Relay now available with Lockable Test Button IEC Rating of A 0 V AC 0/0 Hz, General use 100,000 cycles. Mechanical indicator standard

More information

Classification Terminal Shape Contact form Enclosure rating Model Rated coil voltage

Classification Terminal Shape Contact form Enclosure rating Model Rated coil voltage ow-profile Relay with Various Models ow profile:.7 mm in height. Creepage distance 8mm between coil and contacts 0 kv Impulse withstand voltage Models with AC coil available. High-Inrush model available

More information

62 Series - Power relays 16 A. Features / /

62 Series - Power relays 16 A. Features / / 6 Series - Power relays 6 A Features 6. / 6.3 6.-0300 / 6.3-0300 Printed circuit mount 6 A Power relay & 3 Pole changeover contacts or NO ( 3 mm contact gap) AC coils & DC coils Reinforced insulation between

More information

Switching & Controls Timers

Switching & Controls Timers Switching & Controls imers Selection Guide...792 RE Series Analog imers... 798 Accessories...803 Dimensions...804 G3A Series Analog imers... 805 G3D Digital imers...813 G3F Series rue OFF Delay imers 826...

More information

Application Note 1047

Application Note 1047 Low On-Resistance Solid-State Relays for High-Reliability Applications Application Note 10 Introduction In military, aerospace, and commercial applications, the high performance, long lifetime, and immunity

More information

02/11/2015

02/11/2015 35 mm - 1 Relay 8A OUR3 Part number 88867103 Multi-function or mono-function Multi-range Multi-voltage Relay output 1 or 2 : 8 A - 250 V (10 A UL) LED status indicator Option of connecting an external

More information

TD62308AP,TD62308AF TD62308AP/AF. 4ch Low Input Active High-Current Darlington Sink Driver. Features. Pin Assignment (top view)

TD62308AP,TD62308AF TD62308AP/AF. 4ch Low Input Active High-Current Darlington Sink Driver. Features. Pin Assignment (top view) TOSHIBA Bipolar Digital Integrated Circuit Silicon Monolithic TD6238AP,TD6238AF 4ch Low Input Active High-Current Darlington Sink Driver TD6238AP/AF The TD6238AP/AF is a non inverting transistor array

More information

Solid-State Timer. ON-delay, Repeat cycle/signal OFF start, Repeat cycle/signal ON start, Signal ON/OFF-delay, Signal OFF-delay, and Interval

Solid-State Timer. ON-delay, Repeat cycle/signal OFF start, Repeat cycle/signal ON start, Signal ON/OFF-delay, Signal OFF-delay, and Interval Solid-State Timer Analog Set Multifunction Timers in Slim Design for Track Mounting All settings are made though front panel Six operating modes in a single timer provides flexibility for many applications

More information

1a 8A, 1a1b/2a 5A small polarized power relays

1a 8A, 1a1b/2a 5A small polarized power relays Automation Controls Catalog a A, ab/a A small polarized power DSP RELAYS RoHS compliant Protective construction: Sealed type FEATURES. Compact with high contact rating Even with small mm. inch (H) mm.

More information

HC RELAY PRODUCT TYPES

HC RELAY PRODUCT TYPES FROM SEQUENCE TO POWER CIRCUITS COMPATIBLE WORLDWIDE HC RELAY PRODUCT TYPES Standard type Amber sealed type FEATURES. Long track record means reliable quality.. Can provide switching across the range from

More information

PIR6WT-1Z interface - time relays

PIR6WT-1Z interface - time relays 1 9-functions electronic time relays compliance with standard PN-EN 612-1 Time relay PIR6WT-1Z consists of: - universal socket with electronic PI6WT-1Z with screw terminals, - changeover relay RM699V,

More information

Modular timers A

Modular timers A Modular timers 1-6 - 8-16 A Building automation Elevators and lifts 80 SЕRIES Automation for blinds, grilles and shutters oists and cranes Panels for electrical distribution Door and gate openers FINDER

More information

CD770 DIGITAL MULTIMETER INSTRUCTION MANUAL

CD770 DIGITAL MULTIMETER INSTRUCTION MANUAL CD770 DIGITAL MULTIMETER INSTRUCTION MANUAL Table of Contents 1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Before use, read the following safety precautions.- 1-1 Explanation of Warning Symbols 001 1-2 Warning Messages for Safe

More information

The power in relays and timers since Catalogue

The power in relays and timers since Catalogue The power in relays and timers since 1954 2012 Catalogue PCB relays Industrial relays Relay interface modules Sockets and accessories Timers Monitoring relays Energy meters Surge protection devices Industrial

More information

RC NETWORKS SALES GUIDE

RC NETWORKS SALES GUIDE SALES GUIDE INTRODUCTION TO Recent developments in electronic equipment have shown the following trends: Increasing demands for numerical control machines, robotics and technically advanced appliances

More information

6mm Interface Relays RV8 Series

6mm Interface Relays RV8 Series 6mm Interface Relays RV8 Series PRODUCT DESCRIPTION Electromechanical C1D2 (screw terminal) Solid State (spring clamp) IDEC 6mm interface relays provide a compact solution for general purpose relay requirements.

More information

HG RELAYS 20 AMP POWER RELAY FEATURES SPECIFICATIONS

HG RELAYS 20 AMP POWER RELAY FEATURES SPECIFICATIONS 20 AMP POWER RELAY RELAYS a 3 1.4 5 a.0 50.0 1.99 8.0 2. FEATURES Large capacity 20 A V AC resistive and 1.5 kw 3 phase 220 V AC motor loads High contact reliability after long use Usable with direct soldering,

More information

4. Classification E: High capacity. 3. Terminal Form Blank: Tab terminals (#250 terminals) Tab terminals #250 SPST-NO

4. Classification E: High capacity. 3. Terminal Form Blank: Tab terminals (#250 terminals) Tab terminals #250 SPST-NO New Product News G9EJ--E Compact Capable of Switching 4 V A DC loads Actualize a high capacity interruption through the function of extinction of magnetic arc by adopting high-efficiency magnetic circuit.

More information

DPDT MY2N-D2 MY2IN-D2 --- (DC only) 4PDT MY4N-D2 MY4IN-D PDT (bifurcated) MY4ZN-D2 MY4ZIN-D2 --- With built-in CR

DPDT MY2N-D2 MY2IN-D2 --- (DC only) 4PDT MY4N-D2 MY4IN-D PDT (bifurcated) MY4ZN-D2 MY4ZIN-D2 --- With built-in CR General-purpose Relay MY New model Versatile and Function-filled Miniature Power Relay for Sequence Control and Power Switching Applications Models with lockable test buttons now available. Many variations

More information

2 or 4 pole changeover contact Plug-in/Faston 187

2 or 4 pole changeover contact Plug-in/Faston 187 56 Miniature power relays 56 Plug-in - Power relay, & 4 pole Flange mount option - (Faston 87, 4.8 x 0.5 mm termination) C coils & DC coils Lockable test button and mechanical flag indicator Cadmium Free

More information

mm wide Low coil power PCB or 93 series sockets. Copper side view. 1 CO (SPDT) 6/10 250/400 1, /0.2/ (12/10) AgNi

mm wide Low coil power PCB or 93 series sockets. Copper side view. 1 CO (SPDT) 6/10 250/400 1, /0.2/ (12/10) AgNi 34 Series - Slim electromechanical PCB relays 6 A Features 34.51 Ultra-slim 1 Pole - 6 A relay Printed circuit mount - direct or via PCB socket 35 mm rail mount - via screw or screwless sockets 1 Pole

More information

CP RELAYS POWER TYPE. TYPICAL APPLICATIONS Defoggers, Ignitions, Heaters, Accessories, Powered windows, etc. ORDERING INFORMATION TYPES

CP RELAYS POWER TYPE. TYPICAL APPLICATIONS Defoggers, Ignitions, Heaters, Accessories, Powered windows, etc. ORDERING INFORMATION TYPES High Carrying Current Type Miniature Low Profile Automotive Relay CP RELAYS POWER TYPE Sealed 13.1 14.1 9..374 FEATURES Maximum carrying current of 3 A (4 mw type, 1 V applied)

More information

G5NB. A Miniature Relay with 1-pole 3A/5A Switching Capability and 10 kv Impulse Withstand Voltage. Application Examples. Model Number Legend

G5NB. A Miniature Relay with 1-pole 3A/5A Switching Capability and 10 kv Impulse Withstand Voltage. Application Examples. Model Number Legend PC Power Relay A Miniature Relay with -pole A/5A Switching Capability and 0 kv Impulse Withstand Voltage Highly efficient magnetic circuit for high sensitivity (200 mw). Small, yet provides 0-kV impulse

More information

MK-S (New Models) General-purpose Relays. New Super MK Relays. Models with Latching Lever Added to the Series. Features. Model Number Structure

MK-S (New Models) General-purpose Relays. New Super MK Relays. Models with Latching Lever Added to the Series. Features. Model Number Structure General-purpose Relays MK-S (New Models) CSM_MK-S_DS_E New Super MK Relays. Latching Lever Added to the Series. Same mounting and internal wiring as the previous Super MK Relays Built-in mechanical indicator

More information

Electronic timer CT-MVS.23 Multifunctional with 2 c/o (SPDT) contacts

Electronic timer CT-MVS.23 Multifunctional with 2 c/o (SPDT) contacts Data sheet Electronic timer CT-MVS.23 Multifunctional with 2 c/o (SPDT) contacts The CT-MVS.23 is a multifunctional electronic timer from the CT-S range. It provides 11 timing functions and 10 time ranges.

More information

83 SERIES. 83 Series - Modular timers A. Features

83 SERIES. 83 Series - Modular timers A. Features Features 83 Series - Modular timers 12-16 A 83.01 83.02 83 Multi-function timer range 83.01 - Multi-function & multi-voltage, 1 Pole 83.02 - Multi-function & multi-voltage, 2 Pole (timed + instantaneous

More information

48 SERIES. Relay interface modules 8 A CO forcibly guided contacts relay interface modules,15.8 mm wide Type 48.12

48 SERIES. Relay interface modules 8 A CO forcibly guided contacts relay interface modules,15.8 mm wide Type 48.12 48 Relay interface modules 8 A 48 2 CO forcibly guided contacts relay interface modules,15.8 mm wide Type 48.12 2 CO 8 A s Relay with forcibly guided contacts according to EN 50205 Type 35 mm rail (EN

More information

48 Series - Relay interface modules A. Features

48 Series - Relay interface modules A. Features Series - Relay interface modules 8-0 - 6 A Features & Pole relay interface modules, 5.8 mm wide. Ideal interface for PLC and electronic systems.3 - Pole 0 A.5 - Pole 8 A.6 - Pole 6 A coils or sensitive

More information